S7-400 ModuleData e

SIMATIC Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications
Reference Manual
Preface, Contents General Technical Specifications Racks Power Supply Modules Digital Modules Analog Modules Interface Modules IM 463-2 PROFIBUS DP Master Interface IM 467/IM 467 FO Cable Duct and Fan Subassemblies RS 485 Repeater Appendices Glossary, Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
This manual is part of the documentation package with the order number 6ES7498-8AA04-8BA0
Edition 04/2004
A5E00267842-01
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices intended to ensure personal safety, as well as to protect the products and connected equipment against damage. These notices are highlighted by the symbols shown below and graded according to severity by the following texts:
! ! !
Danger
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a particular part of the documentation.
Qualified Personnel
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground and to tag circuits, equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Correct Usage
Note the following:
Warning
This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens. This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.
Trademarks
SIMATIC, SIMATIC HMI and SIMATIC NET are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG. Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trademarks might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners.
Copyright Siemens AG 2004 All rights reserved The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. Siemens AG Bereich Automation and Drives Geschaeftsgebiet Industrial Automation Systems Postfach 4848, D- 90327 Nuernberg Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Disclaim of Liability We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed. Siemens AG 2004 Technical data subject to change. A5E00267842-01
Preface
Purpose of the Manual
The manual contains reference information on operator actions, descriptions of functions and technical specifications of the central processing units, power supply modules and interface modules of the S7-400. How to configure, assemble and wire these modules in an S7-400 system is described in the installation manuals for each system.
Required Basic Knowledge

You will need a general knowledge of automation to understand this manual. In addition, you are required to know how to use computers or devices with similar functions (e. g. programming devices) under Windows 2000 / XP operating systems. Since S7-400 is configured with the STEP 7 basic software, you have to have a good working knowledge of the software. You can acquire this knowledge in the manual Programming with STEP 7. Read the notes on the safety of electronic controllers in the appendix of the Installation manual especially when using a S7-400 in safety-relevant areas.
Target Group
This manual is aimed at people with the required qualifications to commission, operate and maintain the products described.
Where is this Manual valid?

The manual is valid for the S7-400 programmable controller.
Certification
You can find details on the certificates and approvals in the reference manual General Technical Data.
Place of this Documentation in the Information Environment

This manual forms part of the S7-400 documentation. System
S7-400 Documentation Package
S7-400 Programmable Controllers; Hardware and Installation S7-400 Programmable Controllers; Module Specifications Automation System S7-400 CPU Data S7-400 Instruction List
Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01
iii
Preface
Finding Your Way

To help you find special information quickly, the manual contains the following access aids: At the start of the manual you will find a complete table of contents and a list of the diagrams and tables that appear in the manual. You will find a glossary in the appendix at the end of the manual. The glossary contains definitions of the main technical terms used in the manual. At the end of the manual you will find a comprehensive index which gives you rapid access to the information you need.
Recycling and Disposal

The S7-400 is environmentally friendly and can thus recyclable. Consult a certified disposal agency for electronics junk to recycle and dispose of your old equipment in an environmentally friendly manner.
Further Support
If you have any technical questions, please get in touch with your Siemens representative or agent responsible. http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner A guide for the technical documentation for the various SIMATIC products and systems is found under: http://www.siemens.de/simatictechdokuportal You find the online catalog and order system under: http://mall.ad.siemens.com/
Training Centers
Siemens offers a number of training courses to familiarize you with the SIMATIC S7 automation system. Please contact your regional training center or our central training center in D 90327 Nuremberg, Germany for details: Telephone: Internet: +49 (911) 895-3200. http://www.sitrain.com
iv
Preface
A&D Technical Support

Worldwide, available 24 hours a day:
Nuernberg Johnson City Beijing
Technical Support Worldwide (Nuernberg) Technical Support

24 hours a day, 365 days a year Phone: Fax: GMT: +49 (180) 5050-222 +49 (180) 5050-223 +1:00
mailto:adsupport@siemens.com
Europe / Africa (Nuernberg) Authorization

Local time: Mon.-Fri. 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM Phone: Fax: +49 (180) 5050222 +49 (180) 5050-223
United States (Johnson City) Technical Support and Authorization

Local time: Mon.-Fri. 8:00 AM to 500 PM Phone: Fax: +1 (423) 262 2522 +1 (423) 262 2289
Asia / Australia (Beijing) Technical Support and Authorization

Local time: Mon.-Fri. 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM Phone: Fax: +86 10 64 75 75 75 +86 10 64 74 74 74
mailto:adsupport@siemens.com GMT: +1:00
mailto:simatic.hotline@sea.siemens.com GMT: 5:00
mailto:adsupport.asia@siemens.com GMT: +8:00
The languages of the SIMATIC Hotlines and the authorization hotline are generally German and English.
Preface
Service & Support on the Internet

In addition to our documentation, we offer our Know-how online on the internet at: http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support where you will find the following: The newsletter, which constantly provides you with uptodate information on your products. The right documents via our Search function in Service & Support. A forum, where users and experts from all over the world exchange their experiences. Your local representative for Automation & Drives. Information on field service, repairs, spare parts and more under Services.
vi
Contents
1 General Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 2 Standards and Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup Batteries . . . . Mechanical and Ambient Climatic Conditions for Operating the S7-400 . . Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using S7-400 in a zone 2 explosion-risk area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1-2 1-8 1-11 1-13 1-16 1-17 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-6 2-7 2-8 3-1 3-2 3-4 3-6 3-8 3-12 3-18
Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 Function and Structure of the Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Racks UR1; (6ES7400-1TA01-0AA0) and UR2; (6ES7400-1JA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Rack UR2-H; (6ES7400-2JA00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Rack CR2; (6ES7401-2TA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Rack CR3; (6ES7401-1DA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Racks ER1; (6ES7403-1TA01-0AA0) and ER2; (6ES7403-1JA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 Common Characteristics of the Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup Battery (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault/Error Messages via LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Module PS 407 4A; (6ES7407-0DA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Modules PS 407 10A; (6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 407 10A R; (6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Module PS 407 20A; (6ES7407-0RA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Module PS 405 4A; (6ES7405-0DA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Modules PS 405 10A; (6ES7405-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 405 10A R; (405-0KR00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Module PS 405 20A; (6ES7405-0RA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . .
3-20 3-22 3-24
3.8 3.9 3.10
3-26 3-28
3.11
vii
Contents
Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.8.1 4.8.2 4.9 4.10 4.10.1 4.11 4.12 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module Digital Module Parameter Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics of the Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupts of the Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Characteristic Curve for Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 32 x 24 VDC; (6ES7421-1BL01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC; (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Parameters to the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behavior of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16 x 120 VAC; (6ES7421-5EH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC; (6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Parameters to the SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16 x 120/230 VUC; (6ES7421-1FH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16 x 120/230 VUC; (6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0) ................................................................ Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 32 x 120 VUC; (6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 16 x 24 VDC/2 A; (6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A; (6ES7422-5EH10-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Parameters to the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7422-1BL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Parameters to the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . Behavior of the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/5 A; (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/2 A; (6ES7422-1FH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1 4-3 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-13 4-15 4-17 4-20 4-24 4-26 4-28 4-31 4-34 4-36
4-38 4-41 4-44 4-47 4-51 4-52 4-55 4-59 4-60 4-61 4-64
4.13 4.14 4.15 4.15.1 4.16 4.17 4.17.1 4.17.2 4.18 4.19
viii
Contents
4.20 4.20.1 4.21 5
Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A; (6ES7422-5EH00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Parameters to the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A . . . . . . . . Relay Output Module SM 422; DO 16 x 30/230 VUC/Rel. 5 A; (6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-68 4-71 4-72 5-1 5-3 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-22 5-27 5-30 5-30 5-31 5-32 5-34 5-38 5-39 5-41 5-42 5-45 5-46 5-49 5-52 5-58 5-59 5-61 5-62 5-66 5-68 5-72 5-73 5-74 5-81 5-83 5-88 5-92 5-94
Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.4 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.6 5.7 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.8 5.9 5.10 5.11 5.12 5.13 5.14 5.15 5.16 5.17 5.18 5.18.1 5.18.2 5.19 5.19.1 5.19.2 5.20 5.20.1 5.20.2 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Analog Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Analog Output Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Measuring Method and Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behavior of the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effect of Supply Voltage and Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effect of Range of Values of the Analog Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effect of Operational Limit and Basic Error Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion, Cycle, Setting and Response Time of Analog Modules . . . . . Analog Module Parameter Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Voltage Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Current Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Loads/Actuators to Voltage Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Loads/Actuators to Current Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics of the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Module Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit; (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0) . . . Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit; (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0) . . . Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit; (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0) . . . Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ix
Contents
5.21 5.21.1 5.21.2 5.22 5.22.1 5.22.2 5.23 5.23.1 5.23.2 5.24 5.24.1 5.24.2 5.25 5.25.1 5.25.2 6
Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit; (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103 Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit; (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115 Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit; (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128 Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit; (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139 Analog Output Module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit; (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-141 Commissioning the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit . . . . 5-145 6-1 6-2
Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 6.2 Common Features of the Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Interface Modules IM 460-0; (6ES7460-0AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-0; (6ES7461-0AA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Interface Modules IM 460-1; (6ES7460-1BA01-0AB0) and IM 461-1; (6ES7461-1BA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Interface Modules IM 460-3; (6ES7460-3AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-3; (6ES7461-3AA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Interface Modules IM 460-4; (6ES7460-4AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-4; (6ES7461-4AA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7 6-10 6-14
6.3 6.4 6.5
6-18 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-6 7-8 7-10 7-11 7-13 7-14
IM 463-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 Using SIMATIC S5 Expansion Units in an S7-400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rules for Connecting S5 Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing and Connecting the IM 463-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Operating Modes of the IM 314 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring S5 Modules for Operation in the S7-400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Assignments of the 721 Connecting Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminating Connector for IM 314 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Specifications (6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
PROFIBUS DP Master Interface IM 467/IM 467 FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 8.1.1 8.2 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 PROFIBUS DP Master Interface IM 467/IM 467 FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicators and the Mode Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection to PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bus Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical Connection to PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to the IM 467 FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Specifications of the IM 467 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Specifications of the IM 467 FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1 8-2 8-4 8-6 8-8 8-8 8-9 8-10 8-12 8-12 8-13 9-1 9-2 9-4 9-5 9-7 10-1 10-2 10-3 10-4 10-6 A-1 A-2 A-3 A-6 A-9 B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-8 B-14 C-1
Cable Duct and Fan Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 Fan Monitoring in the Fan Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Duct; (6ES7408-0TA00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The 120/230 VAC Fan Subassembly; (6ES7408-1TB00-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . The 24 VDC Fan Subassembly; (6ES7408-1TA00-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
RS 485 Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 Application and Characteristics (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appearance of the RS 485 Repeater; (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0) . . . . . . . . RS 485 Repeater in Ungrounded and Grounded Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the User Program . Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1 B.2 B.3 B.4 B.5 Evaluating the Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules in the User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure and Contents of Diagnostic Data Bytes 0 and 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Data of the Digital Input Modules as of Byte 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Data of the Digital Output Modules as of Byte 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Data of the Analog Input Modules as of Byte 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Parts and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
Contents
Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.1 D.2 D.3 What is ESD? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrostatic Charging of Persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge Damage .
D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 E-1
List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary-1 Index-1
xii
Contents
Figures 1-1 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-18 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 Power supply to the backup battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of a Rack with 18 Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of the UR1 18-Slot or UR2 9-Slot Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rack Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CR2 Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CR3 Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ER1 Rack with 18 Slots and ER2 Rack with 9 Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls and Indicators on the PS 407 20A Power Supply Module . . . . . . Controls and Indicators of the PS 407 4 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls and Displays of the PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R . . . . . . . . . . Controls and Indicators of the PS 407 20 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 4 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls and Displays of the PS 405 10A and PS 405 10A R . . . . . . . . . . Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 20 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Characteristic Curve for Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 32 24 VDC Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC Terminal Assignment Diagram for the Redundant Supply of Sensors of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x 120 VDC . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit as for Active High or Active Low Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x 120/230 VUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x 120/230 VUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 32 x 120 VUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 24 VDC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 32 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A . Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x 30/230 VUC/Rel. 5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Levering the Measuring Range Module out of the Analog Input Module . Inserting the Measuring Range Module into the Analog Input Module . . . Example of the Relative Error of an Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan Time of an Analog Input or Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of the Influence of Smoothing on the Step Response . . . . . . . . . Settling and Response Times of the Analog Output Channels . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Non-Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Voltage Sensors to an AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Two-Wire Transmitters to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-6 2-7 2-8 3-8 3-18 3-20 3-22 3-24 3-26 3-28 4-16 4-18 4-21 4-22 4-29 4-32 4-35 4-37 4-39 4-42 4-45 4-48 4-53 4-56 4-62 4-65 4-69 4-73 5-28 5-29 5-33 5-34 5-36 5-37 5-43 5-44 5-45 5-47
xiii
Contents
5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-22 5-23 5-24 5-25 5-26 5-27 5-28 5-29 5-30 5-31 5-32 5-33 5-34 5-35 5-36 5-37 5-38 5-39 5-40 5-41 5-42 5-43 5-44 5-45 5-46 5-47 5-48 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4
Connecting Two-Wire Transmitters to an SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Four-Wire Transmitters to an AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Four-Wire Transmitters to an SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . Four-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers on an AI . . . . . Three-Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an AI . . . . . . . . . Two-Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an AI . . . . . . . . . . . Design of Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of Thermocouples without Compensation or Using the Reference Temperature Value to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of a Thermocouple with Reference Junction (Order No. M72166-xxx00) to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of Thermocouples of the Same Type with Ext. Compensation by Means of a Resistance Thermometer, Connected to Channel 0 . . . . . . Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated AO over a Four-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-Conductor Connection of Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Loads to a Current Output of an Isolated AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start Information of OB 40: Which Event Triggered the Hardware Interrupt at the Limit Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . Step Response of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . Step Response of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0) . . . Block Diagram of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . Step Response of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0) . Block Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit . . . . . . Step Response of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment Diagram SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step Response at 10 Hz Interference Frequency Suppression of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step Response at 50 Hz Interference Frequency Suppression of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step Response at 60 Hz Interference Frequency Suppression of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step Response at 400 Hz Interference Frequency Suppression of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Configuration with Send IMs, Receive IMs and Terminators . . . Position of the Operator Controls and Indicators of the IM 460-0 and IM 461-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position of the Operator Controls and Indicators of the IM 460-1 and IM 461-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position of the Operator Controls and Indicators of the IM 460-3 and IM 461-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-47 5-48 5-48 5-50 5-51 5-51 5-52 5-55 5-56 5-57 5-60 5-60 5-61 5-67 5-69 5-70 5-75 5-76 5-82 5-88 5-89 5-94 5-98 5-99 5-106 5-107 5-114 5-121 5-122 5-126 5-130 5-131 5-137 5-137 5-138 5-138 5-141 5-142 6-5 6-7 6-10 6-14
xiv
Contents
6-5 7-1 7-2 7-3 8-1 8-2 8-3 8-4 8-5 8-6 8-7 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 10-1 10-2 10-3 A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5 B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-6 B-7 B-8 B-9 B-10 B-11 B-12 B-13 B-14 B-15
Position of the Operator Controls and Indicators of the IM 460-4 and IM 461-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layout of the Controls and Indicators of the IM 463-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings of the IM 314 with Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Variant for CCs and EUs via the IM 463-2 and IM 314 . . . . . . Configuration of the IM 467/467 FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs of the IM 467/467 FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Bus Connector to the IM 467 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical Connection to PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting the Fiber-Optic Cables into the IM 467 FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of a Message Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front View of the Cable Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls and Indicators of the Fan Subassembly 120/230 VAC (6ES7408-1TB00-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls and Indicators of the Fan Subassembly 24 VDC (6ES7408-1TA00-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RC Network with 10 MW for Configuration with Ungrounded Reference Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolation Between the Bus Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram of the RS 485 Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 1 of the Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC . . Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC . . . . . . Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bytes 4 to 10 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-18 7-4 7-8 7-10 8-3 8-4 8-8 8-9 8-9 8-10 8-11 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-7 10-5 10-5 10-7 A-4 A-5 A-7 A-8 A-10 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-5 B-6 B-6 B-7 B-8 B-9 B-9 B-10 B-11 B-12 B-12 B-13
xv
Contents
B-16 B-17 B-18 B-19 B-20 B-21 B-22 B-23 B-24 B-25 B-26 B-27 D-1
Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A . Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit Bytes 4 to 7 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit . . Even Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit . Odd Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit . . Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit . . . . . . Bytes 4 to 7 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . Even Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . Odd Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . Electrostatic Voltages which Can Build up on a Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-13 B-14 B-15 B-15 B-16 B-16 B-17 B-17 B-18 B-18 B-19 B-19 D-3
xvi
Contents
Tables 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8 1-9 1-10 1-11 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 Use in an Industrial Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Products that Fulfill the Requirements of the Low-Voltage Directive . . . . Pulse-Shaped Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sinusoidal Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interference emission of electromagnet fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interference emission via the mains AC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ambient Climatic Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTF, DC 5V, DC 24 V LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BAF, BATTF LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function of the operator controls of the power supply modules . . . . . . . . Error messages of the power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTF, DC5V, DC24V LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BAF, BATTF; BATT INDIC LEDs on BATT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F; BATT INDIC LEDs on 1BATT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F; BATT INDIC LEDs on 2BATT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay Output Module: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Messages of the Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Messages of the Digital Modules, Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How the Input Values Depend on the Operating Mode of the CPU and on the Supply Voltage L+ of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . How the Input Values Are Affected by Faults and by the Parameter Assignment of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 422; DO 1 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 422; DO 3 x 24 VDC/0.5 A (6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dependence of the Output Values on the Operating Mode of the CPU and on the Supply Voltage L+ of the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module Example: Bit Pattern of a 16-Bit and a 13-Bit Analog Value . . . . . . . . . . . . Possible Resolutions of the Analog Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bipolar Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unipolar Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Life-Zero Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges + 10 V to + 1 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1-3 1-9 1-9 1-10 1-10 1-11 1-13 1-14 1-15 1-16 3-4 3-9 3-9 3-9 3-11 3-12 3-12 3-15 3-16 3-17 4-3 4-4 4-4 4-5 4-7 4-8 4-10 4-11 4-24 4-26
4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9
4-27 4-34 4-51 4-59 4-60 4-71 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-9 5-10 5-10
xvii
Contents
5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-22 5-23 5-24 5-25 5-26 5-27 5-28 5-29 5-30 5-31 5-32 5-33 5-34 5-35 5-36 5-37 5-38 5-39 5-40 5-41 5-42 5-43 5-44 5-45 5-46 5-47 5-48 5-49 5-50
Analog Value Representation in the Voltage Measuring Ranges + 500 mV to + 25 mV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation in the Voltage Measuring Ranges 1 to 5 V and 0 to 10 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation in the Current Measuring Ranges + 20 mA to + 3.2 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges 0 to 20 mA . Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges 4 to 20 mA . Analog Value Representation for Resistance-Type Sensors from 48 W to 6 kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Pt 100, 200, 500,1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Pt 100, 200, 500,1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Ni100, 120, 200, 500, 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Cu 10 . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Cu 10 . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Types R, S . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bipolar Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unipolar Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Life-Zero Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation in Output Range + 10 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 to 10 V and 1 to 5 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation in Output Range + 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 and 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dependencies of the Analog Input/Output Values on the Operating Mode of the CPU and the Supply Voltage L+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behavior of the Analog Input Modules as a Function of the Position of the Analog Value Within the Range of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behavior of the Analog Output Modules as a Function of the Position of the Analog Value Within the Range of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options for Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature . . . . . Ordering Data of the Comparison Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Messages of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules, Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channels for Resistance Measurement of the SM 431; AI 8 13 Bit . . . . . Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11 5-11 5-12 5-12 5-13 5-13 5-14 5-14 5-15 5-15 5-16 5-16 5-17 5-17 5-18 5-18 5-19 5-19 5-20 5-20 5-21 5-22 5-23 5-24 5-25 5-25 5-26 5-26 5-30 5-31 5-32 5-39 5-41 5-53 5-56 5-63 5-64 5-72 5-73 5-74 5-81
xviii
Contents
5-51 5-52 5-53 5-54 5-55 5-56 5-57 5-58 5-59 5-60 5-61 5-62 5-63 5-64 5-65 5-66 5-67 5-68 5-69 5-70 5-71 5-72 5-73 5-74 5-75 5-76 5-77 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4
Selection of the Measuring Method for Channel n and Channel n+1 of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channels for Resistance and Temperature Measurement with the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermocouple with Reference Junction Compensation via RTD on Channel 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0) . . . . . . Interference Frequency Suppression and Filter Settling Time with Smoothing of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0) . . . Selection of the Measuring Method for Channel n and Channel n+1 of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channels for Resistance Measurement of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0) Parameters of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection of the Measuring Method for Channel n and Channel n+1 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Information of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection of the Measuring Method for Channel n and Channel n+1 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channels for Resistance and Temperature Measurement of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference Junction Compensation via RTD on Channel 0 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Points to Note when Checking for Underflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Information of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Response Times Depend on the Parameterized Interference Frequency Suppression and Smoothing of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit . . . Diagnostic Information of the SM 431; AI 8 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 432; AO8 x 13 Bit . . . . Interface Modules of the S7-400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eigenschaften der Kopplungen im berblick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leitungslngen fr verschiedene Kopplungen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminators for the Receive IMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Cable for Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bedien- und Anzeigeelemete der Sende-IM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bedien- und Anzeigeelemente der Empfangs-IM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bedien- und Anzeigeelemente der Sende-IM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bedien- und Anzeigeelemente der Empfangs-IM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bedien- und Anzeigeelemente der Sende-IM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bedien- und Anzeigeelemente der Empfangs-IM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bedien- und Anzeigeelemente der Sende-IM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bedien- und Anzeigeelemente der Empfangs-IM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S5 Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs of the IM 4632 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch Position: Interface Selector of the IM 463-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch Position: Leitungslngen Selector of the IM 463-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-83 5-84 5-84 5-85 5-92 5-93 5-95 5-95 5-96 5-102 5-103 5-104 5-112 5-114 5-115 5-116 5-116 5-117 5-119 5-125 5-127 5-128 5-135 5-136 5-139 5-140 5-145 6-2 6-2 6-4 6-4 6-5 6-8 6-9 6-12 6-12 6-16 6-16 6-20 6-20 7-2 7-5 7-5 7-5
xix
Contents
7-5 7-6 7-7 8-1 8-2 9-1 10-1 10-2 10-3 A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 B-1
Settings Address Areas on the IM 314 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of the Connecting Cable 721 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of the Terminator 760-1AA11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Modes of the IM 467/467 FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPU and IM 467/467 FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function of Fan Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum Cable Length of a Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum Cable Length between Two RS 485 Repeaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description and Functions of the RS 485 Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SFCs for assigning Parameters to Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Codes of the Module Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9 7-11 7-13 8-4 8-7 9-2 10-2 10-2 10-3 A-2 A-3 A-6 A-9 B-3
xx
General Technical Specifications
What are General Technical Specifications?

General technical specifications include the following: The standards and test specifications complied with and met by the modules of the S7-400 programmable controllers The test criteria against which the S7-400 modules were tested
Chapter Overview
Section 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 Standards and Approvals Electromagnetic Compatibility Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup Batteries Mechanical and Ambient Climatic Conditions for Operating the S7-400 Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of Protection Using S7-400 in a zone 2 explosion-risk area Description Page 1-2 1-8 1-11 1-13 1-16 1-17
1-1
1.1
Standards and Approvals

Note You will find the current approvals on the identification label of the respective products.
IEC 61131-2
The S7-400 programmable controller satisfies the requirements and criteria of the IEC 61131-2 standard (programmable controllers, part 2 on equipment requirements and tests).
CE Mark
Our products satisfy the requirements and protection objectives of the EC Directives listed below and comply with the harmonized European standards (EN) promulgated in the Official Journals of the European Community for programmable controllers: 73/23/EEC Electrical Equipment Designed for Use between Certain Voltage Limits (Low-Voltage Directive) 89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC Directive) 94/9/EG Devices and protection systems to be used as prescribed in potentially explosive areas (Guidelines for Explosion Protection) The declarations of conformity are held at the disposal of the competent authorities at the address below: Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Bereich Automation and Drives A&D AS RD 42 Postfach 1963 D-92209 Amberg These files are also available for download on the CUstomer Support Internet pages, under Declaration of Conformity.
EMC Directive
SIMATIC products are designed for use in industrial environments.
Table 1-1 Use in an Industrial Environment EMC Directive Industry Requirements in respect of: Emitted interference EN 61000-6-4 : 001 Immunity EN 61000-6-2 : 001
1-2
Low Voltage Directive The products listed in the table below fulfill the requirements of EU low-voltage directive (73/23/EEC). Adherence to this EU directive was tested in accordance with IEC 61131-2.
Table 1-2 Products that Fulfill the Requirements of the Low-Voltage Directive Name Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 32 x 120 VUC Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16 x 120/230 VUC Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/5 A Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/2 A Relay Output Module SM 422; DO 16 x 30/230 VUC/Rel5A Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V The 120/230 VAC Fan Subassembly PS 407 4A PS 407 10A PS 407 20A PS 407 10A R Order number 6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0 6ES7421-1FH00-0AA0 6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0 6ES7422-1FH00-0AB0 6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0 6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0 6ES7408-1TB00-0XA0 6ES7407-0DA01-0AA0 6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0 6ES7 407-0RA01-0AA0 6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0
Note In the new releases, some of the devices listed above fulfil the requirements of the explosion protection guidelines instead of that of the low-voltage directive. Please note the information on the identification label.
Explosion Protection Guidelines
According to EN 50021 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of protection n) II 3 G EEx nA II T3..T6
1-3
Mark for Australia and New Zealand

Our products satisfy the requirements of Standard AS/NZS 2064 (Class A).
Note You will recognize the approval assigned to your product from the mark on the identification label. The opprovals are listed below UL/CSA or cULus.
UL Approval
UL recognition mark Underwriters Laboratories (UL) to the UL 508 Standard: Report E 85972
CSA Approval
CSA certification mark Canadian Standard Association (CSA) to Standard C 22.2 No. 142: Certification Record 212191-0-000
or cULus Approval
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. nach S S UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment) CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Pocess Control Equipment)
or cULus Approval, Hazardous Location
CULUS Listed 7RA9 INT. CONT. EQ. FOR HAZ. LOC. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. nach S S S S S S
HAZ. LOC.
UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment) CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Pocess Control Equipment) UL 1604 (Hazardous Location) CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for Use in Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP. A, B, C, D T4A Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP. IIC T4
Please read the notes below.
1-4
or cULus Approvals, Hazardous Location for Relay Modules
CULUS Listed 7RA9 INT. CONT. EQ. FOR HAZ. LOC. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. nach
HAZ. LOC.
S S S S S S S
UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment) CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Pocess Control Equipment) UL 1604 (Hazardous Location) CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for Use in Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP. A, B, C, D T4A Cl. 1, Zone 2, AEx nC IIC T4 Cl. 1, Zone 2, Ex nC IIC T4
Please read the notes below.
Note This plant has to be mounted according to the NEC (National Electric Code) stipulations. When used in environments according to class I, division 2 (see above), S7-400 must be mounted in a housing that corresponds to at least IP54 according to EN 60529.
1-5
cuULu requirements on hazardous location on the battery power supply for CPUs
The power supply to the backup battery of a CPU must be via a non-incendive plug. The figure below portrays the concept of such connection.
Battery or Power supply unit

Cc = Cable capacity Lc = Cable inductance
CPU with connector ext. batt.
Figure 1-1
Power supply to the backup battery
The following conditions apply to the performance characteristics of this connection: Voc (no load voltage) = 15V Isc (shortcircuit current )= 50 mA Ca = Battery capacity/ power supply La= Battery inductance/ power supply Vmax = 15V Imax = 50 mA Ci = 25 nF maximum Li = 2 mH maximum
The battery/power supply which supplies the noningnitable connection must have the following values:
Battery/Power supply
CPU iput Ext. Batt. incl. cabel
Voc Isc
Vmax (15V) Imax (50 mA)
Battery/Power supply
CPU iput Ext. Batt. incl. cable
Ca La
Ci + Cc (25nF + Cc) Li + Lc (2mH + Lc)
The batteries used must have the following properties: Battery technology: Li/SOCL2 Model: AA Voltage: 3.6 V
1-6
The batteries stipulated by Siemens fulfil requirements that go beyond the ones mentioned above. You may only use batteries approved by Siemens !
Note If you do not know the capacity and inductance of the cable, you can use the following values: Cc = 197 pF/m (60 pF/ft.), Lc = 0.66 pF/m (0.2 mH/ft)
Example
The battery of type 4022 from Varta together with a 1.5 m long cable and a plug connection of type 0202.1500 from Leonhardy meet these conditions.
FM Approval
Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611, Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D. Temperature class: T4 at 60 C ambient temperature
Warning Personal injury or property damage can result. In hazardous areas, personal injury or property damage can result if you create or break an electrical circuit during operation of an S7-400 (for example, by means of plug-in connections, fuses, switches). Do not create or break live electric circuits unless you are certain there is no danger of explosion. If you use S7-400 under FM conditions, it has to be mounted in a housing, which at least corresponds to IP54 in accordance with EN 60529.
Marine approvals
Classification organizations: ABS (American Bureau of Shipping) BV (Bureau Veritas) DNV (Det Norske Veritas) GL (Germanischer Lloyd) LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping) Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)
1-7
Safety Requirements for Installation The S7-400 programmable controllers are open type equipment to the IEC 61131-2 standard and therefore adhere to the EU directive 73/23/EEC Low-Voltage Directive and are UL/CSA certified as such. To fulfill requirements for safe operation with regard to mechanical stability, flame retardance, stability, and shock-hazard protection, the following alternative types of installation are specified: Installation in a suitable cabinet Installation in a suitable housing Installation in a suitably equipped, enclosed operating area.
1.2
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Introduction
In this section you will find information on the noise immunity of S7-400 modules and on radio interference suppression. All the components of S7-400 automation systems meet the requirements of the standards that apply in Europe provided they are installed in accordance with all the appropriate regulations (see Installation Manual, Chapters 2 and 4).
Definition of EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical installation to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with that environment. Warning Personal injury or property damage can result. Installation of expansions that have not been approved for the S7-400 can result in violations of the requirements and regulations for safety and electromagnetic compatibility. Use only expansions that have been approved for the system.
1-8
Pulse-Shaped Interference The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of modules when there are pulse-shaped disturbance variables. A requirement for this is that the S7-400 system complies with the relevant requirements and guidelines on electric design.
Table 1-3 Pulse-Shaped Interference Pulse-Shaped Interference Electrostatic discharge To IEC 61000-4-2 Bursts (fast transient interference in accordance with IEC 61000-4-4) Energy-rich single impulse (surge) to IEC 61000-4-5 Test Voltage Discharge to air: 8 kV Contact discharge: 6 kV 2 kV (power supply line) 2 kV (signal line > 30 m) 1 kV (signal line < 30 m) Degree of Severity 3
3 2 kV (supply line) DC voltage with protective elements 2 kV (signal line/data line > 30 m only), possibly with protective elements 1 kV (supply line) DC voltage with protective elements 1 kV (signal line > 30 m only), possibly with protective elements
Asymmetrical coupling
Symmetrical coupling
Sinusoidal Interference
The following table shows you the EMC behavior of the S7-400 modules when there is sinusoidal interference.
Table 1-4 Sinusoidal Interference Test Values 10 V/m with 80% amplitude modulation of 1 kHz over the range from 80 MHz to 1000 MHz 10 V/m with 50% pulse modulation at 900 MHz Test voltage 10 V with 80% amplitude modulation of 1 kHz over the range from 9 MHz to 80 MHz 3 Degree of Severity
Sinusoidal Interference RF irradiation (electromagnetic fields) To IEC 61000-4-3
To IEC 61000-4-3 RF conductance on cables and cable shields to IEC 61000-4-6
1-9
Emission of Radio Interference

Interference emission of electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 55011: Limit value class A, Group 1.
Table 1-5 Interference emission of electromagnet fields Frequency Range From 20 to 230 MHz From 230 to 1000 MHz Measured at a distance of 30 m (98.4 ft.) 30 dB (mV/m)Q 37 dB (mV/m)Q Limit Value
Emitted interference via the mains AC power supply in accordance with EN 55011: Limit value class A, group 1.
Table 1-6 Interference emission via the mains AC power supply Frequency Range From 0.15 to 0.5 MHz From 0.5 to 5 MHz From 5 to 30 MHz 79 dB (mV)Q 66 dB (mV)M 73 dB (mV)Q 60 dB (mV)M 73 dB (mV)Q 60 dB (mV)M Limit Value
System Perturbation
The S7-400 AC Power Supply Modules fulfill the requirements of the following standards for system perturbation: Harmonic currents: Voltage fluctuations and flicker Additional Measures If you want to connect an S7-400 system to the public power system, you must ensure compliance with limit value class B in accordance with EN 55022. Suitable additional measures must be taken, if you need to enhance the noise immunity of the system as a result of high external noise levels. EN 61000-3-2 EN 61000-3-3
1-10
1.3
Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup Batteries
Shipping and Storage of Modules S7-400 modules surpass the requirements of IEC 61131-2 in respect of shipping and storage requirements. The following details apply to modules shipped and/or stored in their original packing. The climatic conditions conform to IEC 60721, Part 3-3, Class 3K7 for storage and IEC 60721, Part 3-2, Class 2K4 for transport. The mechanical conditions conform to IEC 60721, Part 3-2, Class 2M2.
Table 1-7 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules Permitted Range Free fall Temperature Atmospheric pressure Relative humidity (at +25 C) Sinusoidal oscillations to IEC 60068-2-6 Shock to IEC 60068-2-29 1 m (up to 10 kg) 40 C to +70 &C 1080 to 660 hPa (corresponds to a height of -1000 to 3500 m) 5 to 95 %, without condensation 5 to 9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 to 500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks
Shipping of Backup Batteries Wherever possible, transport backup batteries in their original packing. No special measures are required for the transport of the backup batteries used in the S7-400 system. The lithium component of the backup battery is less than 0.5 g.
1-11
Storing Backup Batteries

Backup batteries must be stored in a cool, dry place. The maximum storage time is 10 years.
Warning Risk of injury, material damage, release of hazardous substances. Lithium batteries can explode if handled improperly. Their improper disposal may result in the release of hazardous substances. Strictly adhere to the following instructions: Do not throw a new or low battery into an open fire and do not perform any soldering work on the cell casing (max. temperature 100 C). Do not recharge the battery risk of explosion! Do not open a battery. Replace a faulty battery onoly with the same type. Replacement batteries can be ordered from SIEMENS (for order numbers, refer to the Module data reference manual, in appendix C). This will insure that your are installing a short circuit-proof type. Always try to return low batteries to the manufacturer or deliver these to a registered recycling company.
1-12
1.4
Mechanical and Ambient Climatic Conditions for Operating the S7-400
Operating Conditions
The S7-400 is designed for weather-protected use as a permanent installation. The S7-400 fulfills the requirements for use in accordance with IEC 60721-3-3: Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements) Class 3K3 (ambient climatic conditions)
Use with Additional Measures

The S7-400, for example, must not be used without taking additional measures: In locations exposed to a high degree of ionizing radiation In hostile environments caused, for instance, by Dust accumulation Corrosive vapors or gases Strong electric or magnetic fields In installations requiring special monitoring, for example Elevators Electrical installations in particularly hazardous areas An additional measure might be, for instance, installation of the S7-400 in a cabinet or in a housing.
Ambient Mechanical Conditions The ambient mechanical conditions for S7-400 modules are listed in the following table in the form of sinusoidal oscillations.
Table 1-8 Mechanical Conditions Test Values 0.075 mm amplitude 1 g constant acceleration
Frequency Range in Hz 10 f < 58 58 f < 500
Reducing Vibrations
If the S7-400 is subject to high levels of shock or vibration, you must take suitable measures to reduce the acceleration or amplitude. We recommend that you install the S7-400 on vibration-damping materials (for example, rubber-metal antivibration mountings).
1-13
Tests for Ambient Mechanical Conditions The following table contains important information on the type and scope of tests for ambient mechanical conditions.
Table 1-9 Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test Test Standard Vibration test in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6 (sinusoidal) Remarks Type of oscillation: frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 octave/minute. 10 Hz &f < 58 Hz, constant amplitude 0.075 mm 58 Hz &f < 500 Hz, constant acceleration 1g Duration of oscillation: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of three axes perpendicular to each other Type of shock: half-sine Severity of shock: 10 g peak value, 6 ms duration Direction of shock: 100 shocks in each of the 3 axes arranged vertically to each other
Test ... Vibrations
Shock
Shock test in accordance with IEC 60068-2-29
1-14
Ambient Climatic Conditions You can use the S7-400 under the following ambient climatic conditions:
Table 1-10 Ambient Climatic Conditions Climatic Conditions Temperature Temperature change Relative humidity Permitted Range 0 to +60 C Max. 10 C/h Max. 95 % at +25 C No condensation, corresponds to RH stressing level 2 in accordance with IEC 61131-2 Remark
Atmospheric pressure Concentration of contaminants
1080 to 795 hPa (corresponds to a height of -1000 to 2000 m) SO2: < 0.5 ppm; RH < 60 %, no condensation H2S: < 0.1 ppm; RH < 60 %, no condensation Test: 10 ppm; 4 days
Test: 1 ppm; 4 days
1-15
1.5
Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of Protection
Test Voltages
Insulation resistance was demonstrated in routine testing with the following test voltages in accordance with IEC 61131-2:
Table 1-11 Test Voltages Circuits with Rated Voltage Ue to Other Circuits or Ground 0 V < Ue 50 V 50 V < Ue 100 V 100 V < Ue 150 V 150 V < Ue 300 V Test Voltage 350 V 700 V 1300 V 2200 V
Protection Class Safety class I to IEC 60536 (VDE 0106, Part 1). In other words, a connection is required from the protective conductor to the power supply module.
Protection Against Ingress of Foreign Bodies and Water Degree of protection IP 20 to IEC 60529. In other words, there is protection against contact with standard probes. There is no special protection against the ingress of water.
1-16
1.6
Using S7-400 in a zone 2 explosion-risk area

You will find important information in different languages in the chapters below.
Chapter overview
Chapter 1.6.1 1.6.2 1.6.3 1.6.4 1.6.5 1.6.6 1.6.7 1.6.8 1.6.9 1.6.10 1.6.11 Thema Einsatz der S7-400 im explosionsgefhrdeten Bereich Zone 2 Use of the S7-400 in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area Utilisation de la S7-400 dans un environnement risque dexplosion en zone 2 Aplicacin del S7-400 en reas con peligro de explosin, zona 2 Impiego dell S7-400 nellarea a pericolo di esplosione zona 2 Gebruik van de S7-400 in het explosieve gebied zone 2 Brug af S7-400 i det eksplosionsfarlige omrde zone 2 S7-400:n kytt rjhdysvaarannetuilla alueilla, vyhyke 2 Anvndning av S7-400 i explosionsriskomrde zon 2 Uso do S7-400 em rea exposta ao perigo de exploso, zona 2 Xphsh thj susKeuhj S7 400 se ...
1-17
1.6.1
Einsatz der S7-400 im explosionsgefhrdeten Bereich Zone 2
Zone 2
Explosionsgefhrdete Bereiche werden in Zonen eingeteilt. Die Zonen werden nach der Wahrscheinlichkeit des Vorhandenseins einer explosionsfhigen Atmosphre unterschieden.
Zone 2 Explosionsgefahr explosive Gasatmosphre tritt nur selten und kurzzeitig auf nein Beispiel Bereiche um Flanschverbindungen mit Flachdichtungen bei Rohrleitungen in geschlossenen Rumen auerhalb der Zone 2 Standardanwendungen von dezentraler Peripherie
sicherer Bereich
Nachfolgend finden Sie wichtige Hinweise fr die Installation der SIMATIC S7-400 im explosionsgefhrdeten Bereich.
Weitere Informationen
Weitere Informationen zu den verschiedenen S7-400-Baugruppen finden Sie im Handbuch.
Fertigungsort
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D stliche Rheinbrckenstrae 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany
Zulassung
II 3 G Prfnummer: EEx nA II T3 .. T6 KEMA 03ATEX1125 X nach EN 50021 : 1999
Hinweis II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 drfen nur in Baugruppen mit der Zulassung Automatisierungssystemen SIMATIC S7-400 der Gertekategorie 3 eingesetzt werden.
1-18
Automation System S7-400 CPU Specifications A5E00267842-01
Instandhaltung
Fr eine Reparatur muss die betroffene Baugruppe an den Fertigungsort geschickt werden. Nur dort darf die Reparatur durchgefhrt werden.
Besondere Bedingungen
1. Die SIMATIC S7-400 muss in einen Schaltschrank oder ein metallisches Gehuse eingebaut werden. Diese mssen mindestens die Schutzart IP 54 (nach EN 60529) gewhrleisten. Dabei sind die Umgebungsbedingungen zu bercksichtigen, in denen das Gert installiert wird. Fr das Gehuse muss eine Herstellererklrung fr Zone 2 vorliegen (gem EN 50021). 2. Wenn am Kabel bzw. an der Kabeleinfhrung dieses Gehuses unter Betriebsbedingungen eine Temperatur > 70 C erreicht wird oder wenn unter Betriebsbedingungen die Temperatur an der Aderverzweigung > 80 C sein kann, mssen die Temperatureigenschaften der Kabel mit den tatschlich gemessenen Temperaturen bereinstimmen. 3. Die eingesetzten Kabeleinfhrungen mssen der geforderten IP-Schutzart und dem Abschnitt 7.2 (gem EN 50021) entsprechen. 4. Alle Gerte, einschlielich Schalter etc., die an den Ein- und Ausgngen von S7-400-Systemen angeschlossen werden, mssen fr den Explosionsschutz Typ EEx nA oder EEx nC genehmigt sein. 5. Es mssen Manahmen getroffen werden, dass die Nennspannung durch Transienten um nicht mehr als 40 % berschritten werden kann. 6. Umgebungstemperaturbereich: 0 C bis 60 C 7. Innerhalb des Gehuses ist an einem nach dem ffnen gut sichtbaren Platz ein Schild mit folgender Warnung anzubringen: Warnung Das Gehuse darf nur kurze Zeit geffnet werden, z. B. fr visuelle Diagnose. Bettigen Sie dabei keine Schalter, ziehen oder stecken keine Baugruppen und trennen keine elektrischen Leitungen (Steckverbindungen). Diese Warnung kann unbercksichtigt bleiben, wenn bekannt ist, dass keine explosionsgefhrdete Atmosphre herrscht.
Liste der zugelassenen Baugruppen

Die Liste mit den zugelassenen Baugruppen finden Sie im Internet: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ unter der Beitrags-ID 13702947
1-19
1.6.2
Use of the S7-400 in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area
Zone 2
Hazardous areas are divided up into zones. The zones are distinguished according to the probability of the existence of an explosive atmosphere.
Zone 2 Explosion Hazard Explosive gas atmosphere occurs only seldom and for a short time No Example Areas around flange joints with flat gaskets in pipes in enclosed spaces Outside zone 2 Standard distributed I/O applications
Safe area
Below you will find important information on the installation of the SIMATIC S7-400 in a hazardous area.
Further Information
You will find further information on the various S7-400 modules in the manual.
Production Location
Certification
II 3 G Test number: EEx nA II T3 .. T6 KEMA 03ATEX1125 X in accordance with EN 50021 : 1999
Note Modules with II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 certification can only be used in SIMATIC S7-400 automation systems belonging to equipment category 3.
1-20
Maintenance
If repair is necessary, the affected module must be sent to the production location. Repairs can only be carried out there.
Special Conditions
1. The SIMATIC S7-400 must be installed in a cabinet or metal housing. These must comply with the IP 54 (in accordance with EN 60529) degree of protection as a minimum. The environmental conditions under which the equipment is installed must be taken into account. There must be a manufacturer's declaration for zone 2 available for the housing (in accordance with EN 50021). 2. If a temperature of > 70 C is reached in the cable or at the cable entry of this housing under operating conditions, or if a temperature of > 80 C can be reached at the junction of the conductors under operating conditions, the temperature-related properties of the cables must correspond to the temperatures actually measured. 3. The cable entries used must comply with the required IP degree of protection and Section 7.2 (in accordance with EN 50021). 4. All devices (including switches, etc.) that are connected to the inputs and outputs of S7-400 systems must be approved for EEx nA or EEx nC explosion protection. 5. Steps must be taken to ensure that the rated voltage through transients cannot be exceeded by more than 40 %. 6. Ambient temperature range: 0 C to 60 C 7. A sign containing the following warning must be put up inside the housing in an easily visible position when the housing is opened: Warning The housing can only be opened for a short time (e.g. for visual diagnostics). If you do this, do not operate any switches, remove or install any modules or disconnect any electrical cables (plug-in connections). You can disregard this warning if you know that the atmosphere is not hazardous (i.e. there is no risk of explosion).
List of Approved Modules

You will find the list of approved modules under the ID 13702947 on the Internet: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/. Under the ID number 13702947
1-21
1.6.3
Utilisation du S7-400 dans un environnement risque d'explosion en zone 2
Zone 2
Les environnements risque d'explosion sont rpartis en zones. Les zones se distinguent par la probabilit de prsence d'une atmosphre explosive.
Zone 2 Risque d'explosion Formation rare et brve d'une atmosphre gazeuse explosive Non Exemple Environnement de raccords joints plats dans le cas de conduites dans des locaux ferms A l'extrieur de la zone 2 Utilisation standard de priphrie dcentralise
Zone sre
Vous trouverez ci-aprs des remarques importantes pour l'installation du SIMATIC S7-400 dans un environnement prsentant un risque d'explosion.
Informations complmentaires
Des informations complmentaires sur les divers modules S7-400 se trouvent dans le manuel.
Lieu de production
Homologation
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 selon EN 50021 : 1999
Numro de contrle :
KEMA 03ATEX1125 X
Nota II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 ne peuvent tre utiliss Les modules homologus que dans des automates SIMATIC S7-400 de catgorie 3.
1-22
Entretien
Si une rparation est ncessaire, le module concern doit tre expdi au lieu de production. La rparation ne doit tre effectue qu'en ce lieu.
Conditions particulires
1. Le SIMATIC S7-400 doit tre install dans une armoire ou un botier mtallique. Ceux-ci doivent assurer au moins l'indice de protection IP 54. Il faut alors tenir compte des conditions d'environnement dans lesquelles l'appareil est install. Le botier doit faire lobjet dune dclaration de conformit du fabricant pour la zone 2 (selon EN 50021). 2. Si dans les conditions dexploitation, une temprature > 70 C est atteinte au niveau du cble ou de lentre du cble dans ce botier, ou bien si la temprature au niveau de la drivation des conducteurs peut tre > 80 C, les capacits de rsistance thermique des cbles doivent corespondre aux tempratures effectivement mesures. 3. Les entres de cbles utilises doivent avoir le niveau de protection IP exig et tre conformes au paragraphe 7.2 (selon EN 50021). 4. Tous les appareillages (y compris les interrupteurs, etc.) raccords aux entres et sorties de modules de signaux scurit intrinsque doivent tre homologus pour la protection antidflagrante type EEx nA ou EEx nC. 5. Il faut prendre des mesures pour que la tension nominale ne puisse pas tre dpasse de plus de 40% sous linfluence de transitoires. 6. Plage de temprature ambiante : 0 C 60 C 7. A lintrieur du botier, il faut placer, un endroit bien visible aprs ouverture, une plaquette comportant lavertissement suivant : Avertissement Ouvir le botier le moins longtemps possible, par exemple pour effectuer un diagnostic visuel. Ce faisant, nactionnez aucun commutateur, ne dconnectez aucun module et ne dbanchez pas de cbles lectriques (connexions). Le respect de cet avertissement nest pas impratif sil est certain que lenvironnement ne prsente pas de risque dexplosion.
Liste des modules homologus

Vous trouverez sur Internet la liste des modules homologus : http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ rfrence ID 13702947
1-23
1.6.4
Aplicacin de la S7-400 en reas con peligro de explosin, zona 2
Zona 2
Las reas con peligro de explosin se clasifican en zonas. Las zonas se diferencian segn la probabilidad de la existencia de una atmsfera capaz de sufrir una explosin.
Zona 2 Peligro de explosin Ejemplo
La atmsfera explosiva de gas reas alrededor de uniones abridadas con slo se presenta rara vez y muy juntas planas en tuberas en locales brevemente cerrados Fuera de la zona 2 Aplicaciones estndar de la periferia descentralizada
rea segura No
A continuacin encontrar importantes informaciones para la instalacin del SIMATIC S7-400 en reas con peligro de explosin.
Otras informaciones
Encontrar otras informaciones relativas a los distintos mdulos S7-400 en el Manual.
Lugar de fabricacin
Homologacin
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 segn norma EN 50021 : 1999
Nmero de comprobacin: KEMA 03ATEX1125 X
Nota II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 pueden Los mdulos con la homologacin utilizarse nicamente en los autmatas programables SIMATIC S7-400 de la categora de equipo 3.
1-24
Mantenimiento
Para una reparacin se ha de remitir el mdulo afectado al lugar de fabricacin. Slo all se puede realizar la reparacin.
Condiciones especiales
1. El SIMATIC S7-400 se ha de montar en un armario elctrico de distribucin o en una carcasa metlica. stos deben garantizar como mnimo el grado de proteccin IP 54 (conforme a EN 60529). Para ello se han de tener en cuenta las condiciones ambientales, en las cuales se instala el equipo. La caja deber contar con una declaracin del fabricante para la zona 2 (conforme a EN 50021). 2. Si durante la operacin se alcanzara una temperatura > 70 C en el cable o la entrada de cables de esta caja o bien una temperatura > 80 C en la bifurcacin de hilos, debern adaptarse las propiedades trmicas de los cables a las temperaturas medidas efectivamente. 3. Las entradas de cable utilizadas deben cumplir el grado de proteccin IP exigido y lo expuesto en el apartado 7.2 (conforme a EN 50021). 4. Todos los dispositivos inclusive interruptores, etc. conectados a las entradas y salidas sistemas S7-400 deben estar homologados para la proteccin contra explosiones del tipo EEx nA o EEx nC. 5. Es necesario adoptar las medidas necesarias para evitar que la tensin nominal se pueda rebasar en ms del 40 % debido a efectos transitorios. 6. Margen de temperatura ambiente: 0 C hasta 60 C 7. Dentro de la caja deber colocarse en un lugar perfectamente visible tras su apertura un rtulo con la siguiente advertencia: Precaucin Abrir la caja slo brevemente, p.ej. para el diagnstico visual. Durante este tiempo Ud. no deber activar ningn interruptor, desenchufar o enchufar mdulos ni separar conductores elctricos (conexiones enchufables). Esta advertencia puede ignorarse si Ud. sabe que en la atmsfera existente no hay peligro de explosin.
Lista de los mdulos homologados

En internet hallar Ud. una lista con los mdulos homologados: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ bajo el ID de asignacin 13702947
1-25
1.6.5
Impiego dell'S7-400 nell'area a pericolo di esplosione zona 2
Zona 2
Le aree a pericolo di esplosione vengono suddivise in zone. Le zone vengono distinte secondo la probabilit della presenza di un'atmosfera esplosiva.
Zona 2 Pericolo di esplosione L'atmosfera esplosiva si presente solo raramente e brevemente No Esempio Aree intorno a collegamenti a flange con guarnizioni piatte nelle condotte in ambienti chiusi Al di fuori della zona 2 Applicazioni standard di periferia decentrata
Area sicura
Qui di seguito sono riportate delle avvertenze importanti per l'installazione del SIMATIC S7-400 nell'area a pericolo di esplosione.
Ulteriori informazioni
Ulteriori informazioni sulle diverse unit S7-400 si trovano nel manuale.
Luogo di produzione
Autorizzazione
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 secondo EN 50021 : 1999
Numero di controllo:
KEMA 03ATEX1125 X
Avvertenza Le unit con l'autorizzazione II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 possono essere impiegate solo nei sistemi di controllori programmabili SIMATIC S7-400 della categoria di apparecchiature 3.
1-26
Manutenzione
Per una riparazione, l'unit interessata deve essere inviata al luogo di produzione. La riparazione pu essere effettuata solo l.
Condizioni particolari
1. Il SIMATIC S7-400 deve essere montato in un armadio elettrico o in un contenitore metallico. Questi devono assicurare almeno il tipo di protezione IP 54 (secondo EN 60529). In questo caso bisogna tenere conto delle condizioni ambientali nelle quali l'apparecchiatura viene installata. Per il contenitore deve essere presente una dichiarazione del costruttore per la zona 2 (secondo EN 50021). 2. Se nei cavi o nel loro punto di ingresso in questo contenitore viene raggiunta in condizioni di esercizio una temperatura > 70 C o se in condizioni di esercizio la temperatura nella derivazione dei fili pu essere > 80 C, le caratteristiche di temperatura dei cavi devono essere conformi alla temperatura effettivamente misurata. 3. Gli ingressi dei cavi usati devono essere conformi al tipo di protezione IP richiesto e alla sezione 7.2 (secondo EN 50021). 4. Tutte le apparecchiature, inclusi interruttori, ecc. che vengono collegati a ingressi/uscite di sistemi S7-400, devono essere stati omologati per la protezione da esplosione tipo EEx nA o EEx nC. 5. Devono essere prese delle misure per evitare che la tensione nominale possa essere superata per pi del 40% da parte di transienti. 6. Campo termico ambientale: da 0 C a 60 C 7. Allinterno del contenitore va apportata, in un luogo ben visibile dopo lapertura, una targhetta con il seguente avvertimento: Attenzione Il contenitore pu rimanere aperto solo per breve tempo, ad esempio per una diagnostica a vista. In tal caso non azionare alcun interruttore, non disinnestare o innestare unit e non staccare connessioni elettriche (connettori). Non necessario tenere conto di questo avvertimento se noto che non c unatmosfera a rischio di esplosione.
Elenco delle unit omologate

La lista con le unit omologate si trova in Internet al sito: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ allID di voce 13702947
1-27
1.6.6
Gebruik van de S7-400 in het explosief gebied zone 2
Zone 2
Explosieve gebieden worden ingedeeld in zones. Bij de zones wordt onderscheiden volgens de waarschijnlijkheid van de aanwezigheid van een explosieve atmosfeer.
Zone 2 Explosiegevaar Een explosieve gasatmosfeer treedt maar zelden op en voor korte duur Neen Voorbeeld Gebieden rond flensverbindingen met pakkingen bij buisleidingen in gesloten vertrekken Buiten de zone 2 Standaardtoepassingen van decentrale periferie
Veilig gebied
Hierna vindt u belangrijke aanwijzingen voor de installatie van de SIMATIC S7-400 in het explosief gebied.
Verdere informatie
In het handboek vindt u verdere informatie over de verschillende S7-400-modulen.
Productieplaats
Vergunning
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 conform EN 50021 : 1999
Keuringsnummer: KEMA 03ATEX1125 X
Opmerking II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 mogen slechts worden Modulen met de vergunning gebruikt in automatiseringssystemen SIMATIC S7-400 van de apparaatcategorie 3.
1-28
Instandhouding
Voor een reparatie moet de betreffende module naar de plaats van vervaardiging worden gestuurd. Alleen daar mag de reparatie worden uitgevoerd.
Speciale voorwaarden
1. Het SIMATIC S7-400 moet worden ingebouwd in een schakelkast of in een behuizing van metaal. Deze moeten minstens de veiligheidsgraad IP 54 (volgens EN 60529) waarborgen. Hierbij dient rekening te worden gehouden met de omgevingsvoorwaarden waarin het apparaat wordt genstalleerd. Voor de behuizing dient een verklaring van de fabrikant voor zone 2 te worden ingediend (volgens EN 50021). 2. Als aan de kabel of aan de kabelinvoering van deze behuizing onder bedrijfsomstandigheden een temperatuur wordt bereikt > 70 C of als onder bedrijfsomstandigheden de temperatuur aan de adervertakking > 80 C kan zijn, moeten de temperatuureigenschappen van de kabel overeenstemmen met de werkelijk gemeten temperaturen. 3. De aangebrachte kabelinvoeringen moeten de vereiste IP-veiligheidsgraad hebben en in overeenstemming zijn met alinea 7.2 (volgens EN 50021). 4. Alle apparaten, schakelaars enz. inbegrepen, die worden aangesloten op de in- en uitgangen van S7-400 systemen, moeten zijn goedgekeurd voor de explosiebeveiliging type EEx nA of EEx nC. 5. Er dienen maatregelen te worden getroffen, zodat de nominale spanning door transinten met niet meer dan 40 % kan worden overschreden. 6. Omgevingstemperatuurbereik: 0 C tot 60 C 7. Binnen de behuizing dient op een na het openen goed zichtbare plaats een bord te worden aangebracht met de volgende waarschuwing: Waarschuwing De behuizing mag slechts voor korte tijd worden geopend, bijv. voor een visuele diagnose. Bedien hierbij geen schakelaar, trek of steek geen modulen en ontkoppel geen elektrische leidingen (steekverbindingen). Deze waarschuwing kan buiten beschouwing blijven, indien bekend is dat er geen explosieve atmosfeer heerst.
Lijst van de toegelaten modulen

De lijst met de toegelaten modulen vindt u in het internet: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ onder de bijdrage-ID 13702947
1-29
1.6.7
Brug af S7-400 i det eksplosionfarlige omrde zone 2
Zone 2
Eksplosionsfarlige omrder inddeles i zoner. Zonerne adskiller sig indbyrdes efter hvor sandsynligt det er, at der er en eksplosiv atmosfre.
Zone 2 Eksplosionsfare Eksplosiv gasatmosfre optrder kun sjldent og varer kort Nej Eksempel Omrder rundt om flangeforbindelser med flade pakninger ved rrledninger i lukkede rum Uden for zone 2 Standardanvendelser decentral periferi
Sikkert omrde
I det flgende findes vigtige henvisninger vedr. installation af SIMATIC S7-400 i det eksplosionfarlige omrde.
Yderligere informationer
Yderligere informationer om de forskellige S7-400-komponenter findes i manualen.
Produktionssted
Godkendelse
II 3 G Kontrolnummer: EEx nA II T3 .. T6 KEMA 03ATEX1125 X efter EN 50021 : 1999
Bemrk Komponenter med godkendelsen II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 m kun monteres i automatiseringssystemer SIMATIC S7-400 - udstyrskategori 3.
1-30
Vedligeholdelse
Skal den pgldende komponent repareres, bedes De sende den til produktionsstedet. Reparation m kun udfres der.
Srlige betingelser
1. SIMATIC S7-400 skal monteres i et kontrolskab eller et metalkabinet. Disse skal mindst kunne sikre beskyttelsesklasse IP 54. I denne forbindelse skal der tages hjde for de omgivelsestemperaturer, i hvilke udstyret er installeret. Der skal vre udarbejdet en erklring fra fabrikanten for kabinettet for zone 2 (iht. EN 50021). 2. Hvis kablet eller kabelindfringen p dette hus nr op p en temperatur p > 70 C under driftsbetingelser eller hvis temperaturen p reforegreningen kan vre > 80 C under driftsbetingelser, skal kablernes temperaturegenskaber stemme overens med de temperaturer, der rent faktisk mles. 3. De benyttede kabelindfringer skal vre i overensstemmelse med den krvede IP-beskyttelsestype og afsnittet 7.2 (iht. EN 50021). 4. Alle apparater, inkl. kontakter osv., der forbindes med ind- og udgangene p S7-400 systemer, skal vre godkendt til eksplosionsbeskyttelse af type EEx nA eller EEx nC. 5. Der skal trffes foranstaltninger, der srger for, at den nominelle spnding via transienter ikke kan overskrides mere end 40 %. 6. Omgivelsestemperaturomrde: 0 C til 60 C 7. I kabinettet skal der anbringes et skilt, der skal kunne ses, nr kabinettet bnes. Dette skilt skal have flgende advarsel: Advarsel Kabinettet m kun bnes i kort tid, f.eks. til visuel diagnose. Tryk i denne forbindelse ikke p kontakter, trk eller ist ikke komponenter og afbryd ikke elektriske ledninger (stikforbindelser). Denne advarsel skal der ikke tages hjde for, hvis man ved, at der ikke er nogen eksplosionsfarlig atmosfre.
Liste over godkendte komponenter

Listen med de godkendte komponenter findes p internettet: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ under bidrags-ID 13702947
1-31
1.6.8
S7-400:n kytt rjhdysvaarannetuilla alueilla, vyhyke 2
Vyhyke 2
Rjhdysvaarannetut alueet jaetaan vyhykkeisiin. Vyhykkeet erotellaan rjhdyskelpoisen ilmakehn olemassa olon todennkisyyden mukaan.
Vyhyke 2 Rjhdysvaara Rjhtv kaasuilmakeh ilmaantuu vain harvoin ja lyhytaikaisesti Ei Esimerkki Alueet putkistojen lattatiivisteill varustuilla laippaliitoksilla suljetuissa tiloissa vyhykkeen 2 ulkopuolella Hajautetun ulkopiirin vakiosovellukset
turvallinen alue
Seuraavasta lydtte trkeit ohjeita SIMATIC S7-400 asennukseen rjhdysvaarannetuilla alueilla.
Listietoja
Listietoja erilaisiin S7-400-rakenneryhmiin lydtte ohjekirjasta.
Valmistuspaikka
Hyvksynt
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 EN 50021 mukaan: 1999
Tarkastusnumero: KEMA 03ATEX1125 X
Ohje II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 kanssa saadaan Rakenneryhmt hyvksynnn kytt ainoastaan laitekategorian 3 automatisointijrjestelmiss SIMATIC S7-400.
1-32
Kunnossapito
Korjausta varten tytyy kyseinen rakenneryhm lhett valmistuspaikkaan. Korjaus voidaan suorittaa ainoastaan siell.
Erityiset vaatimukset
1. SIMATIC S7-400 tytyy asentaa kytkentkaappiin tai metalliseen koteloon. Niden tytyy olla vhintn kotelointiluokan IP 54 mukaisia. Tllin on huomioitava ympristolosuhteet, johon laite asennetaan. Kotelolle tytyy olla valmistajaselvitys vyhykett 2 varten (EN 50021 mukaan). 2. Kun johdolla tai tmn kotelon johdon sisnviennill saavutetaan > 70 C lmptila tai kun kyttolosuhteissa lmptila voi piuhajaotuksella olla > 80 C, tytyy johdon lmptilaominaisuuksien vastata todellisesti mitattuja lmptiloja. 3. Kytettyjen johtojen sisnohjauksien tytyy olla vaaditun IP-kotelointiluokan ja kohdan 7.2 (EN 50021 mukaan) mukaisia. 4. Kaikkien laitteiden, kytkimet jne. mukaan lukien, jotka liitetn virheilt suojattujen signaalirakenneryhmien tuloille ja lhdille, tytyy olla hyvksyttyj tyypin EEx nA tai EEx nC rjhdyssuojausta varten. 5. Toimenpiteet tytyy suorittaa, ettei nimellisjnnite voi transienttien kautta ylitty enemmn kuin 40 %. 6. Ympristlmptila-alue: 0 C ... 60 C 7. Kotelon sislle, avauksen jlkeen nkyvlle paikalle, on kiinnitettv kilpi, jossa on seuraava varoitus: Varoitus Kotelo saadaan avata ainoastaan lyhyeksi ajaksi, esim. visuaalista diagnoosia varten. l tllin kyt mitn kytkimi, ved tai liit mitn rakenneryhmi, lk erota mitn shkjohtoja (pistoliittimi). Tt varoitusta ei tarvitse huomioida, kun on tiedossa, ett minknlaista rjhdysvaarannettua ilmakeh ei ole olemassa.
Hyvksyttyjen rakenneryhmien lista

Lista hyvksiytyist rakennesarjoista lytyy internetist osoitteesta: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ kyttjtunnuksella 13702947
1-33
1.6.9
Anvndning av S7-400 i explosionsriskomrde zon 2
Zon 2
Explosionsriskomrden delas in i zoner. Zonerna delas in enligt sannolikheten att en atmosfr med explosionsfara freligger.
Zon 2 Explosionsfara Explosiv gasatmosfr uppstr endast sllan eller kortvarigt Nej Exempel Omrden kring flnsfrbindelser med packningar vid rrledningar i slutna utrymmen Utanfr zon 2 Standardanvndning av decentral periferi
Skert omrde
Nedan fljer viktiga anvisningar om installationen av SIMATIC S7-400 i ett explosionsriskomrde.
Ytterligare information
Ytterligare information om de olika S7-400-komponentgrupperna finner du i handboken.
Tillverkningsort
Godknnande
II 3 G Kontrollnummer: EEx nA II T3 .. T6 KEMA 03ATEX1125 X enligt EN 50021 : 1999
Anvisning II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 fr endast Komponentgrupper med godknnande anvndas i automatiseringssystemen SIMATIC S7-400 frn apparatgrupp 3.
1-34
Underhll
Vid reparation mste den aktuella komponentgruppen insndas till tillverkaren. Reparationer fr endast genomfras dr.
Srskilda villkor
1. SIMATIC S7-400 mste monteras i ett kopplingsskp eller metallhus. Dessa mste minst vara av skyddsklass IP 54. Drvid ska omgivningsvillkoren dr enheten installeras beaktas. Fr kpan mste en tillverkardeklaration fr zon 2 freligga (enligt EN 50021). 2. Om en temperatur p > 70C uppns vid husets kabel resp kabelinfring under driftvillkor eller om temperaturen vid trdfrgreningen kan vara > 80C under driftvillkor, mste kabelns temperaturegenskaper verensstmma med den verkligen uppmtta temperaturen. 3. De anvnda kabelinfringarna mste uppfylla kraven i det krvda IPskyddsutfrandet och i avsnitt 7.2 (enligt EN 50021). 4. Alla apparater, inklusive brytare osv, som ansluts S7 400 systemens in- och utgngar, mste vara godknda fr explosionsskydd av typ EEx nA eller EEx nC. 5. tgrder mste vidtas s, att mrkspnningen ej kan verskridas med mer n 40 % genom transienter. 6. Omgivningstemperatur: 0 C till 60 C 7. Nr huset ppnats ska en skylt med fljande varning monteras p ett tydligt synligt stlle huset: Varning Huset fr endast ppnas under kort tid, t ex fr visuell diagnos. Anvnd drvid inga brytare, lossa eller anslut inga enheter och frnskilj inga elektriska ledningar (insticksanslutningar). Ingen hnsyn mste tas till denna varning om det r skert att det inte rder ngon explosionsfarlig atmosfr.
Lista ver godknda komponentgrupper

Lista ver godknda enheter terfinns i Internet: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ under bidrags-ID 13702947
1-35
1.6.10
Uso do S7-400 em rea exposta ao perigo de exploso 2
Zona 2
As reas expostas ao perigo de exploso so divididas em zonas. As zonas so diferenciadas de acordo com a probabilidade da existncia de uma atmosfera explosiva.
Zona 2 Perigo de exploso S raramente e por um breve perodo de tempo surgem atmosferas explosivas Exemplo reas em torno de ligaes flangeadas com vedaes chatas em tubulaes em recintos fechados fora da zona 2 Aplicaes padro de periferia descentralizada
rea segura No
A seguir, o encontrar avisos importantes para a instalao do SIMATIC S7-400 em rea exposta ao perigo de exploso.
Mais informaes
Para obter mais informaes sobre os diversos componentes S7-400, consulte o manual.
Local de produo
Licena
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 seg. EN 50021 : 1999
Nmero de ensaio: KEMA 03ATEX1125 X
Aviso II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 s podem ser Componentes com a licena aplicados em sistemas de automao SIMATIC S7-400 da categoria de aparelho 3.
1-36
Reparo
Os componente em questo deve ser remetido para o local de produo a fim de que seja realizado o reparo. Apenas l deve ser efetuado o reparo.
Condies especiais
1. O SIMATIC S7-400 deve ser montado em um armrio de distribuio ou em uma caixa metlica. Estes devem garantir no mnimo o tipo de proteo IP 54. Durante este trabalho devero ser levadas em considerao as condies locais, nas quais o aparelho ser instalado. Para a caixa dever ser apresentada uma declarao do fabricante para a zona 2 (de acordo com EN 50021). 2. Caso no cabo ou na entrada do cabo desta caixa sob as condies operacionais seja atingida uma temperatura de > 70 C ou caso sob condies operacionais a temperatura na ramificao do fio possa atingir > 80 C, as caratersticas de temperatura devero corresponder s temperaturas realmente medidas. 3. As entradas de cabo utilizadas devem corresponder ao tipo exigido de proteo IP e seo 7.2 (de acordo com o EN 50021). 4. Todos os aparelhos, inclusive as chaves, etc., que estejam conectadas em entradas e sadas dos sistemas do S7;400 devem possuir a licena para a proteo de exploso do tipo EEx nA ou EEx nC. 5. Precisam ser tomadas medidas para que a tenso nominal atravs de transitrios no possa ser ultrapassada em mais que 40 %. 6. rea de temperatura ambiente: 0 C at 60 C 7. No mbito da caixa deve ser colocada em um ponto bem visvel aps a sua abertura uma placa com a seguinte advertncia: Advertncia A carcaa deve ser aberta apenas por um breve perodo de tempo, por ex. para diagnstico visual. No acione nenhum interruptor, no retire ou conecte nenhum componente e no separe nenhum fio eltrico (ligaes de tomada). Esta advertncia poder ser ignorada caso se saiba que no h atmosfera alguma sujeita ao perigo de exploso.
Lista dos componentes autorizados

A lista com os componentes autorizados encontram-se na Internet: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ sob o nmero de ID 13702947
1-37
1.6.11
S7-400 , 2
2
. .
2 2
SIMATIC S7-400 .

() S7-400 .

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D stliche Rheinbrckenstrasse 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany
II 3 G EN 50021 : 1999 : II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 SIMATIC S7-400 3. EEx nA II T3 .. T6 KEMA 03ATEX1125 X
1-38
. .

1. To SIMATIC S7-400 . IP 54. , . 2 ( EN 50021). 2. 70 C 80 C, . 3. IP 54 7.2 ( EN 50021). 4. , .., S7-400, EEx nA EEx nC. 5. , 40 %. 6. : 0 C 60 C 7. : , .. . , ( ). , .

: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ 13702947
1-39
1-40
Racks
Chapter Overview
Section 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 Description Function and Structure of the Racks The Racks UR1; (6ES7400-1TA01-0AA0) and UR2; (6ES7400-1JA01-0AA0) The Rack UR2-H; (6ES7400-2JA00-0AA0) The Rack CR2; (6ES7401-2TA01-0AA0) The Rack CR3; (6ES7401-1DA01-0AA0) The Racks ER1; (6ES7403-1TA01-0AA0) and ER2; (6ES7403-1JA01-0AA0)
2
Page 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-6 2-7 2-8
2-1
Racks
2.1
Function and Structure of the Racks
Introduction
The racks in the S7-400 have the following tasks: They hold the modules They supply the modules with operating voltage They connect the individual modules to each other via the signal buses
Structure of the Racks

A rack consists of the following elements: Mounting rail with threaded bolts for fixing the modules and lateral cutouts for mounting the rack Plastic parts that function, among other things, as guides when swinging the modules into place. A backplane bus, an I/O bus and, if necessary, a communication bus with bus connector Connection for local ground Figure 2-1 shows the mechanical configuration of a rack (UR1).
Aluminum carrier Plastic parts
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Connection for local ground
Bus connector (covered when shipped)
Figure 2-1
Structure of a Rack with 18 Slots
UL/CSA Note
Special requirements should be taken into consideration in the area of influence of the UL/CSA; these may be fulfilled by installing the system in a cabinet.
2-2
Racks
2.2
The Racks UR1; (6ES7400-1TA01-0AA0) and UR2; (6ES7400-1JA01-0AA0)
Introduction
The UR1 and UR2 racks are used for assembling central racks and expansion racks. The UR1 and UR2 racks have both an I/O bus and a communication bus.
Suitable Modules for UR1 and UR2

You can use the following modules in the UR1 and UR2 racks: When the UR1 or UR2 is used as a central rack: All S7-400 modules with the exception of receive IMs When the UR1 or UR2 is used as an expansion rack: All S7-400 modules with the exception of CPUs and send IMs Special case: Power supply modules cannot be used in conjunction with the IM 461-1 receive IM.
Structure of the UR1 and UR2
10
11
12
13
14 15
16
17
18
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
I/O bus 290 mm 190 mm Communication bus 40 mm 465 mm 482.5 mm Figure 2-2 Dimensions of the UR1 18-Slot or UR2 9-Slot Rack
I/O bus
Communication bus
240 mm 257.5 mm
Technical Specifications of the UR1 and UR2 Racks

Rack Number of single-width slots Dimensions W x H x D (in mm) Weight (in kg) Buses UR1 18 482.5 x 290 x 27.5 4.1 UR2 9 257.5 x 290 x 27.5 2.15
I/O bus and communication bus
2-3
Racks
2.3
The Rack UR2-H; (6ES7400-2JA00-0AA0)
Introduction
The UR2-H rack is used for assembling two central racks or expansion racks in one rack. The UR2-H rack essentially represents two electrically isolated UR2 racks on the same rack profile. The main area of application of the UR2-H is in the compact structure of redundant S7-400H systems (two devices or systems in one rack).
Suitable Modules for the UR2-H

You can use the following modules in the UR2-H rack: When the UR2-H is used as a central rack: All S7-400 modules with the exception of receive IMs When the UR2-H is used as an expansion rack: All S7-400 modules apart from CPUs, send IMs, the IM 463-2, and the adapter module Special case: Power supply modules cannot be used in conjunction with the IM 461-1 receive IM.
Structure of the UR2-H

Figure 2-3 shows the structure of the UR2-H rack with 2 x 9 slots.
System I
System II
290 mm 190 mm
40 mm 465 mm 482.5 mm Figure 2-3 Rack Dimensions
2-4
Racks
Caution Danger of damage to equipment. If you insert a power supply module in a slot that is not permitted for power supply modules, the module may be damaged. Slots 1 to 4 are permitted, whereby power supply modules starting from slot 1 must be inserted without leaving gaps. Make sure that power supply modules are only inserted in permitted slots. Take particular notice of the option of swapping modules in slot 1 on rack II and slot 9 on rack I.
Technical Specifications of the UR2-H Rack

Rack Number of single-width slots Dimensions W x H x D (in mm) Weight (in kg) Buses UR2-H 2x9 482.5 x 290 x 27.5 4.1 Segmented I/O bus, segmented communication bus
2-5
Racks
2.4
The Rack CR2; (6ES7401-2TA01-0AA0)
Introduction
The CR2 rack is used for assembling segmented central racks. The CR2 has both an I/O bus and a communication bus. The I/O bus is split into two local bus segments with 10 or 8 slots.
Suitable Modules for the CR2

You can use the following modules in the CR2 rack: All S7-400 modules with the exception of receive IMs
Structure of the CR2

Segment 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2
Segment 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
290 mm 190 mm
I/O bus Segment 1
I/O bus Segment 2
Communication bus 40 mm 465 mm 482.5 mm Figure 2-4 CR2 Rack
Technical Specifications of the CR2 Rack

Rack Number of single-width slots Dimensions W x H x D (in mm) Weight (in kg) Busses Only one power supply module required CR2 18 482.5 x 290 x 27.5 4.1 Segmented I/O bus, continuous communication bus
2-6
Racks
2.5
The Rack CR3; (6ES7401-1DA01-0AA0)
Introduction
The CR3 rack is used for the assembly of CRs in standard systems (not in fault-tolerant systems). The CR3 has an I/O bus and a communication bus.
Suitable Modules for CR 3

You can use the following modules in CR3: All S7-400 modules with the exception of receive IMs You can only use the CPU 414-4H and CPU 417-4H in stand-alone operation.
Structure of the CR3
190 mm
40 mm 115 mm 132 mm Figure 2-5 CR3 Rack
Technical Specifications of the CR3 Rack

Rack Associated programming package Number of single-width slots Dimensions W x H x D (in mm) Weight (in kg) Buses CR3 As of STEP 7 V 5.1; ServicePack 3 4 122.5 x 290 x 27.5 0.75 I/O bus and communication bus
2-7
Racks
2.6
The Racks ER1; (6ES7403-1TA01-0AA0) and ER2; (6ES7403-1JA01-0AA0)
Introduction
The ER1 and ER2 racks are used for assembling expansion racks. The ER1 and ER2 racks have only one I/O bus with the following restrictions: Interrupts from modules in the ER1 or ER2 have no effect since there are no interrupt lines provided. Modules in the ER1 or ER2 are not supplied with 24 V. Modules requiring a 24 V supply are not provided for use in the ER1 or ER2. Modules in the ER1 or ER2 are not backed up either by the battery in the power supply module or by the voltage supplied externally to the CPU or the receive IM (EXT.-BATT. socket). There is therefore no advantage in using backup batteries in the power supply modules in ER1 and ER2. Battery faults and backup voltage faults are not reported to the CPU. The battery monitoring function of a power supply module installed in the ER1 or ER2 should therefore always be switched off.
Suitable Modules for ER1 and ER2

You can use the following modules in the ER1 and ER2 racks: All power supply modules Receive IMs All signal modules provided the above-mentioned restrictions are observed. However: Power supply modules cannot be used in conjunction with the IM 461-1 receive IM.
Structure of ER1 and ER2
10
11
12
13
14 15
16
17
18
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
I/O bus 290 mm 190 mm
I/O bus
40 mm 465 mm 482.5 mm Figure 2-6 ER1 Rack with 18 Slots and ER2 Rack with 9 Slots 240 mm 257.5 mm
2-8
Racks
Technical Specifications of the ER1 and ER2 Racks

Rack Number of single-width slots Dimensions W x H x D (in mm) Weight (in kg) Busses ER1 18 482.5 x 290 x 27.5 2.5 3.8 as of version 03 Restricted I/O bus ER2 9 257.5 x 290 x 27.5 1.25 2.0 as of version 03 Restricted I/O bus
2-9
Racks
2-10
Power Supply Modules
3
Description Page 3-2 3-4 3-6 3-8 3-12 3-18 3-20
Chapter Overview
Section 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7
Common Characteristics of the Power Supply Modules Redundant Power Supply Modules Backup Battery (Option) Controls and Indicators Fault/Error Messages via LEDs Power Supply Module PS 407 4A; (6ES7407-0DA01-0AA0) Power Supply Modules PS 407 10A; (6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 407 10A R; (6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0) Power Supply Module PS 407 20A; (6ES7407-0RA01-0AA0) Power Supply Module PS 405 4A; (6ES7405-0DA01-0AA0) Power Supply Modules PS 405 10A; (6ES7405-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 405 10A R; (6ES7405-0KR00-0AA0) Power Supply Module PS 405 20A; (6ES7405-0RA01-0AA0)
3.8 3.9 3.10
3-22 3-24 3-26
3.11
3-28
3-1
3.1
Common Characteristics of the Power Supply Modules
Tasks of the Power Supply Modules

The power supply modules of the S7-400 supply the other modules in the rack with their operating voltages via the backplane bus. They do not provide load voltages for the signal modules.
Common Characteristics of the Power Supply Modules The power supply modules share certain common characteristics in addition to their special technical specifications. The most important common characteristics are: Encapsulated design for use in mounting racks of the S7-400 system Cooling via natural convection Plug-in connection of the supply voltage with AC - DC coding Protection class I (with protective conductor) in accordance with IEC 60536; VDE 0106, Part 1 Limitation of making current in accordance with NAMUR recommendation part 1 of August 1998 Short circuit-proof outputs Monitoring of both output voltages. If one of these voltages fails, the power supply module signals a fault to the CPU. Both output voltages (5 VDC and 24 VDC) share a common ground. Primary clocked Battery backup as option. The parameters set and the memory contents (RAM) are backed up via the backplane bus in the CPUs and programmable modules. In addition, the backup battery enables you to carry out a restart of the CPU. Both the power supply module and the backed up modules monitor the battery voltage. Operating and fault/error LEDs on the front plate. Warning A mains disconnecting device must be provided when installing AC power supply modules.
3-2
Switching the Line Voltage Off/On The power supply modules have a making-current limiter in accordance with NAMUR.
Power Supply Module in Invalid Slot If you insert the power supply module of a rack in an invalid slot, it will not power up. In this case, proceed as follows to start up the power supply module correctly: 1. Disconnect the power supply module from the mains (not just the standby switch). 2. Remove the power supply module. 3. Install the power supply module in slot 1. 4. Wait at least 1 minute and then switch the line voltage on again. Caution Damage can result. If you insert the power supply module in a slot that is not intended for power supply modules, the module may be damaged. Slots 1 to 4 are permissible as long as you start at slot 1 and leave no gaps. Make sure that power supply modules are only inserted in permissible slots.
3-3
3.2
Redundant Power Supply Modules
Order Numbers and Function

Table 3-1 Type PS 407 10A R PS 405 10A R Redundant power supply modules Order Number 6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0 6ES7405-0KR00-0AA0 Input Voltage 85 VAC to 264 VAC or 88 VDC to 300 VDC 19.2 VDC to 72 VDC Output Voltage 5 VDC/10 A and 24 VDC/1 A 5 VDC/10 A and 24 VDC/1 A See Section 3.7 3.10
Redundant Operation
If you use two power supply modules of type PS 407 10A R or PS 405 10A R, you can install a redundant power supply on a mounting rack. We recommend this if you want to increase the availability of your programmable controller, particularly if you are operating it on an unreliable power system.
Configuring a Redundant Power Supply

Redundant operation is possible with any of the S7 CPUs and racks described in this manual. STEP 7 as of V4.02 is also required. To set up a redundant power supply, insert a power supply module in slots 1 and 3 of the rack. You can then insert as many modules as can be supplied by a single power supply module. In other words, in redundant operation all the modules can only draw a total of 10 A.
3-4
Characteristics
The redundant power supply of an S7-400 has the following characteristics: The power supply module delivers a making current in accordance with NAMUR. Each of the power supply modules can take over the supply of power to the whole rack if the other one fails. There is no loss of operation. Each of the power supply modules can be exchanged while the system is in operation. No loss of power and no peak stress occurs with the effective voltages when the modules are removed or inserted. Each of the power supply modules monitors its function and sends a message if it fails. Neither of the power supply modules can generate an error which affects the output voltage of the other power supply module. A redundant battery concept (backup concept) is only provided when two backup batteries are used in each of the power supply modules. If only one battery is used in each module, only non-redundant backup is possible, since both batteries are being used at the same time. The failure of a power supply module is registered via a plug and remove interrupt (default STOP). If used in the second segment of the CR 2 is no message sent if the power supply module fails. If two power supply modules are inserted but only one is switched on, there is a power-up delay of up to one minute when the line voltage is switched on. Note The check box Startup if preset configuration not equal to actual configuration should be activated in the Properties dialog box of the CPU.
3-5
3.3
Backup Battery (Option)
Introduction
The power supply modules of the S7-400 have a battery compartment for one or two backup batteries. Use of these batteries is optional. Function of the Backup Batteries If backup batteries have been installed, the parameters set and the memory contents (RAM) will be backed up via the backplane bus in CPUs and programmable modules if the supply voltage fails. The battery voltage must be within the tolerance range. In addition, the backup battery enables you to carry out a restart of the CPU after power-on. Both the power supply module and the backed up modules monitor the battery voltage.
Power Supply Modules With Two Backup Batteries:

Some power supply modules contain a battery compartment for two batteries. If you use two batteries and set the switch to 2BATT, the power supply module defines one of the two batteries as the backup battery. This assignment remains in force until the battery is empty. When the backup battery is completely discharged, the system switches to the reserve battery which is then in turn used as the backup battery for the duration of its life. The status backup battery is also stored in the event of a power failure. Battery Type Only batteries approved by Siemens must be used (see Appendix C: Spare Parts) The batteries can form a passivation layer. Depassivation takes place when the batteries are inserted in the power supply module.
Technical Specifications of the Backup Battery

Backup Battery Order number Type Rated voltage Rated capacity 6ES7971-0BA00 1 x lithium AA 3.6 V 1.9 Ah
3-6
Backup Times The maximum backup time is based on the capacity of the backup batteries used and the backup current in the rack. The backup current is the sum of all individual currents of the inserted backed-up modules as well as the requirements of the power supply module when the power is switched off.
Example for the Calculation of Backup Times

The capacity of the batteries is listed in the technical specifications of the power supply. The typical and maximum backup current of the backed-up module is listed in the technical specifications of the module. The typical backup current of a CPU is an empirically determined value. The maximum backup current is a worst-case value that is calculated based on the corresponding manufacturer specifications for the memory blocks. The following technical specifications produce backup times for a CR with a PS 407 4A and a CPU 417-4 as the only backed-up module: Capacity of the backup battery: 1.9 Ah Maximum backup current (including own requirement at power off) of the power supply:100 A Typical backup current of the CPU 417-4: 600 A A rated capacity of less than 100% is to be assumed when calculating the backup time because the backup battery is also affected at power on by the regular depassivation. A battery capacity of 63% of the rated capacity produces the following values: Backup time = 1.9 Ah * 0.63 / (100 + 600) A = (1.197 / 700) * 1 000 000 = 1710 h This produces a maximum backup time of 71 days.
3-7
3.4
Controls and Indicators
Introduction
The power supply modules of the S7-400 have essentially the same controls and indicators.The main differences are: Power supply modules with a backup battery have an LED (BATTF) that indicates an empty, defective, or missing backup battery. Power supply modules with two redundant backup batteries have two LEDs (BATT1F and BATT2F) to indicate empty, defective or missing backup batterie Operator Controls and Indicators Figure 3-1 shows you an example of a power supply module (PS 407 20A) with two (redundant) backup batteries. The LEDs are at the top left of the module front plate.
PS 407 20A X 2 1 3 4 407-0RA00-0AA0 2 3
Fixing screws LEDs INTF,

BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, 5 VDC, 24 VDC 5 VDC, 24 VDC
INTF BAF BATTF BATTF
5 VDC 24 VDC
FMR
FMR pushbutton (Failure Message Reset) Standby switch (does not cut off mains)
BATT.1 +
BATT.2 +
Under cover
Battery compartment
BATT. INDIC. 2 BATT OFF 1 BATT
Switches BATT. INDIC.

2 BATT, OFF, 1 BATT
3-pin plug-in power connector Fixing screw
Figure 3-1
Controls and Indicators on the PS 407 20A Power Supply Module
3-8
Meaning of the LEDs

The meaning of the LEDs on the power supply modules is described in the tables below. Section 3.5 contains a list of the faults indicated by these LEDs and notes on how to acknowledge the faults.
INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC

Table 3-2 LED INTF 5 VDC 24 VDC INTF, DC 5V, DC 24 V LEDs Color red green green Meaning Lights up in the event of an internal fault Lights up as long as the 5 V voltage is within the tolerance limits Lights up as long as the 24 V voltage is within the tolerance limits
BAF, BATTF
Power supply modules with a backup battery have the following indicators:
Table 3-3 LED BAF BATTF BAF, BATTF LEDs Color Red Meaning Lights up if the battery voltage on the backplane bus is too low and the BATT INDIC switch is at the BATT position
Yellow Lights up if the battery is empty, if the polarity is reversed, or if the battery is missing, and the BATT INDIC switch is at the BATT position
BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F

Power supply modules with two backup batteries have the following indicators:
Table 3-4 LED BAF BATTF BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F LEDs Color Red Meaning Lights up if the battery voltage on the backplane bus is too low and the BATT INDIC switch is at the 1 BATT or 2 BATT position
Yellow Lights up if battery 1 is empty or if the polarity is reversed or if the battery is missing, and the BATT INDIC switch is at the 1 BATT or 2 BATT position Yellow Lights up if battery 2 is empty or if the polarity is reversed, or if the battery is missing, and the BATT INDIC switch is at the 2 BATT position
BATTF
3-9
Battery Voltage on the Backplane Bus

The battery voltage is either supplied by the backup battery or externally into the CPU or receive IM. In its normal state, the level of the battery voltage is between 2.7 V and 3.6 V. The battery voltage is monitored for the lower limit. Violation of the lower limit is indicated by the BAF LED and reported to the CPU. BAF lights up if the battery voltage on the backplane bus is too low. Possible causes of this include: Battery (batteries) empty or battery polarity has been reversed. External supply via CPU or receive IM is defective or supply from secondary power supply module is defective or missing. Short circuit or overload on the battery voltage. Note Due to internal capacities, if you remove the battery or switch off the external supply, some time may elapse before BAF, BATT1F, or BATT2F lights up.
3-10
Function of the Operator Controls

Table 3-5 Function of the operator controls of the power supply modules For acknowledging and resetting a fault indicator after correcting the fault Switches the output voltages (5 VDC/24 VDC) to 0 V by intervening in the control loop (no mains disconnection).
FMR momentarycontact pushbutton Standby switch

BATT INDIC switch
I : Output voltages at rated value : Output voltages 0 V
Used for setting LEDs and battery monitoring Where one battery can be used (PS 407 4A, PS 405 4A):
OFF: LEDs and monitor signals inactive BATT: BAF/BATTF LEDs and monitor signals active
Where two batteries can be used (PS 407 10A, PS 407 20A, PS 405 10A, PS 405 20A):
OFF: LEDs and monitor signals inactive 1 BATT: Only BAF/BATT1F LEDs (for battery 1) active. 2 BATT: BAF/BATT1F/BATT2F LEDs (for batteries 1 and 2) active.
Battery compartment Power connection For backup battery (batteries) 3-pin connector for line voltage connection (do not plug in or remove when power is on).
Cover
The battery compartment, battery selector switch, voltage selector switch and power connection are housed under one cover. The cover must remain closed during operation in order to protect these operator controls and to prevent static electricity from affecting the battery connections. If you have to carry out measurements on a module, you must discharge your body before you start the measurement by touching grounded metallic parts. Use grounded measuring devices only.
3-11
3.5
Fault/Error Messages via LEDs
Introduction
The power supply modules of the S7-400 indicate module faults and backup battery faults via LEDs on the front plate.
Overview of the Fault/Error Messages

Table 3-6 Error messages of the power supply modules Type of Fault/Error Module fault LEDs INTF 5 VDC 24 VDC Power supplies with 1 backup battery: BAF BATTF Power supplies with 2 backup batteries: BAF BATT1F BATT2F
Backup battery fault
INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC

The following table shows the faults indicated by the INTF, 5 VDC, and 24 VDC LEDs and lists how to remedy the faults. The status of the BAF, BATTF, BATT1F, and BATT2F LEDs is not relevant here.
Table 3-7 INTF, DC5V, DC24V LEDs
LED INTF DC5V DC24V D D D
Cause of Fault Standby switch in Line voltage missing Internal fault, power supply module defective Cutoff after overvoltage on 5 V or illegal external supply Power supply module operated in wrong slot Short circuit or overload on 5 V position
Remedy Set standby switch to the position Check line voltage Replace power supply module Disconnect from mains and reconnect after approximately 1 minute; if necessary, remove external supply Install the power supply module in the correct slot (slot 1) Switch off the power supply module, remove the source of the short circuit; after approximately 3 seconds, the power supply module can be switched on with the standby switch or via the power system.* Check if the supply is external; if not, replace power supply module Check load on the power supply module. Possibly remove modules
D H
H D*
D D
Overvoltage on 24 V Short circuit or overload on 5 V and 24 V
3-12
Table 3-7
INTF, DC5V, DC24V LEDs, continued
LED INTF DC5V DC24V H H D* H H/D ** D
Cause of Fault Short circuit or overload on 5 V If the standby switch is at the position, illegal external supply on 5 V If the standby switch is at the position, short-circuit or overload on 24 V
Remedy Check load on the power supply module. Possibly remove modules Remove all modules. Determine which module is faulty Check load on the power supply module. Possibly remove modules Press FMR momentary-contact pushbutton: Flashing light changes to constant light Check load on the power supply module. Possibly remove modules Press FMR momentary-contact pushbutton: Flashing light changes to constant light Check load on the power supply module. Possibly remove modules Press FMR momentary-contact pushbutton: Flashing light changes to constant light Check load on the power supply module. Possibly remove modules
Voltage restored after short circuit or overload on 5 V if faults occur in operation Dynamic overload on 5 V
Voltage restored after short-circuit or overload on 24 V if faults occur in operation Dynamic overload on 24 V
Voltage restored after short circuit or overload on 5 V and 24 V if faults occur in operation Dynamic overload on 5 V and 24 V
D = LED is dark; L = LED lights up; F = LED flashing; * If the power supply module does not start up again after a few seconds once the overload has been removed, remove power to the module for 5 minutes and then switch it on again. If the module stills does not start up, you must replace it. This applies to 6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0, release 3 and for 6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0, release 5. ** Depending on the short-circuit resistance If either the 5 VDC or 24 VDC LEDs remains dark after switching on, the system has not powered up. If either of the 5 VDC or 24 VDC LEDs of the PS 407 10AR remains dark for longer than 1 or 2 seconds after it is switched on, the power supply module will not start up.
3-13
The following power supply modules will switch off in the event of a short circuit or overload after 1 s to 3 s. The module will try to restart after no more than 3 s. If the error has been eliminated by then, the module will start up. This applies to the following modules:
PS 405 4A PS 405 10A PS 405 10A R PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0DA01-0AA0) (6ES7405-0KA01-0AA0) (6ES7405-0KR00-0AA0) (6ES7405-0RA01-0AA0) PS 407 4A PS 407 10A release 5 PS 407 10A R release 7 PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0DA01-0AA0) (6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0), (6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0), (6ES7407-0RA01-0AA0)
Overload at 24 V
In the event of overload at 24 V the output current is electronically limited to a value between 100% and 150% of the rated value. If the voltage then goes below the undervoltage threshold of 19.2 V (0/+ 5% corresponds to 19.2 V to 20.16 V), the modules respond as follows: In the case of power supply modules with 4 A/0.5 A output current, the 24 V voltage is disconnected and reconnected at a repeat rate of approx. 0.5 s to 1 s until there is an output voltage that exceeds the undervoltage threshold. In the case of power supply modules with 10 A/1 A or 20 A/1 A output current, the voltage depends on the load impedance, and the module runs in characteristic curve mode. After the overload has been eliminated, the voltage returns to the rated range and the green 24 V LED flashes. The CPU sets the EXTF LED (external fault) and saves the fault in the diagnostic buffer. You can trigger other responses, such as CPU STOP or a message to a control room, in OB 81 (power supply error). If OB 81 is not parameterized, the CPU continues as normal.
Overload at 5 V
In the event of an overload at 5V, the power supply modules with 10 A or 20 A output current can retain an output current of 16 A or 26 A for 300ms. The power supply modules with 4 A output current can retain an output current of 8 A for 300 ms. The CPU will then go to DEFECT afterwards. If the LED DC 5 V flashes on the power supply and is resettable with the FMR button, you will be able to perform a restart. The CPU will remain in STOP afterwards and will then require a memory reset.
3-14
BAF, BATTF
The following table applies to power supply modules with one battery if the BATT INDIC switch is in the BATT position. It shows the faults indicated and lists how to remedy the faults.
Table 3-8 BAF, BATTF; BATT INDIC LEDs on BATT Cause of Fault Remedy
BAF H
LED BATT F H
Battery empty or missing No backup voltage available Battery empty or missing
Insert new battery. Press FMR momentary-contact pushbutton Insert new battery. Press FMR momentary-contact pushbutton Depassivate battery (see Installation Manual, Chapter 7)
Battery has been stored for too long H D Battery in order No backup voltage available (short circuit) Battery in order
Fault after plugging in a module:

Plugged-in module defective
Fault after switching on: Remove all

modules and plug in individually
D = LED is dark; L = LED lights up;
3-15
BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F

The following table applies to power supply modules with two batteries if the BATT INDIC switch is in the 1BATT position. It shows the faults indicated and lists how to remedy the faults. Nothing is indicated about the condition of any second battery that may be in use.
Table 3-9 BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F; BATT INDIC LEDs on 1BATT LED BAF H BATT1F BATT2F H D Battery 1 empty or missing No backup voltage available Insert new battery in compartment 1. Press FMR momentary-contact pushbutton Insert new battery in compartment 1. Press FMR momentary-contact pushbutton Depassivate battery (see Installation Manual, Chapter 6) Cause of Fault Remedy
Battery 1 empty or missing
Battery has been stored for too long H D D Battery 1 in order No backup voltage available (short circuit)
Fault after plugging in a

module: Plugged-in module defective
Fault after switching on:

Remove all modules and plug in individually D D D Battery 1 in order
3-16
The following table applies to power supply modules with two batteries if the BATT INDIC switch is in the 2BATT position. It shows the faults indicated and lists how to remedy the faults.
Table 3-10 BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F; BATT INDIC LEDs on 2BATT LED BAF H BATT1F BATT2F H H Both batteries are empty or missing. No backup voltage available Both batteries empty or missing Insert new batteries in compartments 1 and 2 Press FMR momentary-contact pushbutton Insert new batteries in compartments 1 and 2 Press FMR momentary-contact pushbutton Insert new battery in compartment 1. Press FMR momentary-contact pushbutton Cause of Fault Remedy
Battery 1 empty or missing
No backup voltage available (short circuit or overload)


modules and plug in individually D H D Battery 1 empty or missing Insert new battery in compartment 1. Press FMR momentary-contact pushbutton Depassivate battery (see Installation Manual, Chapter 6) Insert new battery in compartment 2. Press FMR momentary-contact pushbutton
Battery has been stored for too long H D H Battery 2 empty or missing
No backup voltage available (short-circuit or overload)


modules and plug in individually D D H Battery 2 empty or missing Insert new battery in compartment 2. Press FMR momentary-contact pushbutton Depassivate battery (see Installation Manual, Chapter 6)
Battery has been stored for too long H D D Both batteries in order. No backup voltage available (short circuit) Both batteries in order.


modules and plug in individually
3-17
3.6
Power Supply Module PS 407 4A; (6ES7407-0DA01-0AA0)
Function
The PS 407 4A power supply module is designed for connecting to either an AC line voltage of 85 to 264 V or a DC line voltage of 88 to 300 V and supplies 5 VDC/4 A and 24 VDC/0.5 A on the secondary side.
Controls and Indicators of the PS 407 4 A

PS 407 4A X 2 1 3 4 407-0DA01-0AA0
Fixing screw LEDs INTF,

BAF, BATTF, DC 5 V, DC 24 V
INTF BAF BATTF
5 VDC 24 VDC
FMR
Under cover
Battery compartment
BATT. INDIC. BATT OFF

BATT, OFF
Figure 3-2
Power connection
An AC power connector is used for connecting the PS 407 4A to both an AC and DC supply.
3-18
Polarity Reversal of L+ and LThe polarity reversal of L+ and L- with supply voltages of between 88 VDC and 300 VDC has no effect on the function of the power supply. The connection should be made as described in the instructions in the Installation Manual, Chapter 6.
Technical Specifications of the PS 407 4 A

Dimensions, Weight, and Cable Cross-Sections Dimensions WxHxD (mm) Weight Cable cross-section 25x290x217 0.76 kg 3x1.5 mm 2 (litz wire with wire end ferrule with insulating collar; use only flexible sheath cable) 3 to 9 mm Input Rating Input voltage Output voltages Output Rating
Rated values Rated values
5.1 VDC /24 VDC 5 VDC: 4 A 24 VDC: 0.5 A Other Parameters
Output currents
Cable diameter
Protection class in accordance with IEC 60536 Overvoltage category
I, with protective grounding conductor II 2 Test Voltage 700 VDC (secondary <> PE) 2200 VDC (primary <> PE) >20 ms Complies with the NAMUR recommendation NE 21 of August 1998 at a repeat rate of 1 s 52 W 20 W Max. 100 A at power off 1 x Lithium AA, 3.6 V / 1.9 Ah Yes
Rated value Permitted range
120/240 VDC 120/240 VAC 88 to 300 VDC, 85 to 264 VAC (long-range input) 50 / 60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz 0.38 A 0.37 A 0.22 A 0.19 A < 3.5 mA In accordance with DIN VDE 0160, curve W2
Pollution severity Rated voltage Ue 0 < Ue 50 V 150 V < Ue 300 V Buffering of power failures:
System frequency
Rated value Permitted range At 120 VAC At 120 VDC At 240 VAC At 240 VDC
Rated input current
Power consumption 240 VDC Power loss Backup current Backup battery (option) Protective separation to IEC 61131-2
Leakage current Overvoltage resistance
3-19
3.7
Power Supply Modules PS 407 10A; (6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 407 10A R; (6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0)
Function
The power supply modules PS 407 10A (standard) and PS 407 10A R (redundancy-capable, see Section 3.2) are designed for connection to an AC line voltage of 85 to 264 V or DC line voltage of 88 to 300 V and supply 5 VDC/10 A and 24 VDC/1 A on the secondary side.
Controls and Displays of the PS 407 10A and thge PS 407 10A R
PS 407 10A X 2 1 3 4 407-0KR00-0AA0

BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, 5 VDC, 24 VDC
5 VDC 24 VDC
FMR
BATT.1 +
BATT.2 +
Under cover
Battery compartment

2 BATT, OFF, 1 BATT

Figure 3-3 Controls and Displays of the PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R
Power Connection
An AC connector is used for connecting the PS 407 10A and the PS 407 10A R to both an AC and a DC supply.
3-20
Technical Specifications of the PS 407 10A and the PS 407 10A R

Dimensions, Weight, and Cable Cross-Sections Dimensions WxHxD (mm) Weight Cable cross-section 50x290x217 1.36 kg 3 x 1.5 mm2 (litz wire with wire end ferrule with insulating collar; use only flexible sheath cable) 3 to 9 mm Input Rating Input voltage Output voltages Output Variables
Output currents
Cable diameter
I, with protective grounding conductor II 2 Test Voltage 700 VDC (secondary <> PE) 2300 VDC (primary <> PE) > 20 ms Complies with the NAMUR recommendation NE 21 of August 1998 at a repeat rate of 1 s 105 W* 29.7 W Max. 100 A at power off 2 x Lithium AA, 3.6 V / 1.9 Ah Yes
110/230 VDC 120/230 VAC 88 to 300 VDC, 85 to 264 VAC (long-range input)
System frequency
Rated value Permitted range At 120 VAC At 110 VDC At 230 VAC At 230 VDC At 230 VAC
50 / 60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz 1.2 A (0.9 A*) 1.2 A (1.0 A*) 0.6 A (0.5 A*) 0.6 A (0.5 A*) Peak value 230 A, half-value width 200 s Peak value 63 A*, half-value width 1 ms*
Rated input current
Power input Power loss Backup current Backup batteries (optional) Protective separation to IEC 61131-2
Starting current inrush
At 300 VDC
Peak value 230 A, half-value width 200 s Peak value 58 A*, half-value width 1 ms
Leakage current Overvoltage resistance
< 3.5 mA In accordance with DIN VDE 0160, curve W2
* PS 407 10A: * PS 407 10A R:
As of version 5 As of version 7
3-21
3.8
Power Supply Module PS 407 20A; (6ES7407-0RA01-0AA0)
Function
The PS 407 20 A power supply module is designed for connecting to either an AC line voltage of 85 to 264 VAC or a DC line voltage of 88 to 300 VDC and supplies 5 VDC/20 A and 24 VDC/1 A on the secondary side.

PS 407 20A X 2 1 3 4 407-0RA01-0AA0 2 3

5 VDC 24 VDC
FMR
BATT.1 +
BATT.2 +
Under cover
Battery compartment

2 BATT, OFF, 1 BATT
Figure 3-4
Power Connection
An AC power connector is used for connecting the PS 407 20A to both an AC and DC supply.
3-22

Dimensions, Weight, and Cable Cross-Sections Dimensions WxHxD (mm) Weight Cable cross-section 75x290x217 2.2 kg 3x1.5 mm 2 (litz wire with wire end ferrule with insulating collar; use only flexible sheath cable) 3 to 9 mm Input Rating Input voltage Output voltages Output Rating
Output currents
Cable diameter
I, with protective grounding conductor II 2 Test Voltage 700 VDC (secondary <> PE) 2300 VDC (primary <> PE) > 20 ms Complies with the NAMUR recommendation NE 21 of August 1998 at a repeat rate of 1 s 168 W 44 W Max. 100 A at power off 2 x Lithium AA, 3.6 V / 1.9 Ah Yes
110/230 VDC 120/230 VAC 88 to 300 VDC, 85 to 264 VAC (long-range input)
System frequency
Rated value Permitted range At 120 VAC / 110 VDC At 230 VAC / 230 VDC
50 / 60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz 1.5 A 0.8 A Peak value 88 A half-value width 1.1 ms < 3.5 mA In accordance with DIN VDE 0160, curve W2
Rated input current
Starting current inrush Leakage current Overvoltage resistance
3-23
3.9
Power Supply Module PS 405 4A; (6ES7405-0DA01-0AA0)
Function
The PS 405 4A power supply module is designed for connection to a DC line voltage of 19.2 to 72 VDC and supplies 5 VDC/4 A and 24 VDC/0.5 A on the secondary side.

PS 405 4A 1 X 3 2 4

BAF, BATTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC
405-0DA01-0AA0
INTF BAF BATTF
5 VDC 24 VDC
FMR
FMR pushbutton (Failure Message Reset) Standby switch

Under cover
Battery compartment
BATT. INDIC. BATT OFF

BATT, OFF
Figure 3-5
3-24

Dimensions, Weight, and Cable Cross-Sections Dimensions WxHxD (mm) Weight Cable cross-section 25x290x217 0.76 kg 3 x 1.5 mm2 (litz wire with wire end ferrule; use component conductor or flexible sheath cable) 3 to 9 mm Input Rating Input voltage Output voltages Output Rating
Output currents
Cable diameter
24/48/60 VDC Static: 19.2 VDC to 72 VDC Dynamic: 18.5 VDC to 75.5 VDC
Rated input current Overvoltage resistance
2 A/1 A/0.8 A In accordance with DIN VDE 0160, curve B2
Power consumption (24 VDC) Power loss Backup current Backup battery (option) Protective separation to IEC 61131-2
3-25
3.10
Power Supply Modules PS 405 10A; (6ES7405-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 405 10A R; (405-0KR00-0AA0)
Function
The power supply modules PS 405 10A (standard) and PS 405 10A R (redundancy-capable, see Section 3.2) are designed for connection to a DC line voltage of 19.2 VDC to 72 VDC and supply 5 VDC/10 A and 24 VDC/1 A on the secondary side.
Controls and Displays of the PS 405 10A and the PS 405 10A R
PS 405 10 A 1 X 3 2 4 2
405-0KA01-0AA0

5 VDC 24 VDC
FMR
BATT.1 +
BATT.2 +
Under cover
Battery compartment

2 BATT, OFF, 1 BATT
3-pin plug-in power connector
Fixing screw
Figure 3-6
Controls and Displays of the PS 405 10A and PS 405 10A R
3-26
Technical Specifications of the PS 405 10A and the PS 405 10A R

Dimensions, Weight, and Cable Cross-Sections Dimensions WxHxD (mm) Weight Cable cross-section 50x290x217 1.4 kg 3 x 1.5 mm2 (litz wire with wire end ferrule, use component conductor or flexible sheath cable) 3 to 9 mm Input Rating Input voltage Output voltages Output Rating
5.1 VDC/24 VDC 5 VDC: 10 A 24 VDC: 1.0 A Other Parameters
Output currents
Cable diameter
Pollution severity Rated voltage Ue 0 < Ue 50 V 150 < Ue 300 V Buffering of power failures:
Rated input current Starting current inrush Overvoltage resistance
4.3 A/2.1 A/1.7 A Peak value 18 A Half-value width 20 ms In accordance with DIN VDE 0160, curve B2
3-27
3.11
Power Supply Module PS 405 20A; (6ES7405-0RA01-0AA0)
Function
The PS 405 20A power supply module is designed for connection to a DC line voltage of 19.2 VDC to 72 VDC and supplies 5 VDC/20 A and 24 VDC/1 A on the secondary side.

PS 405 20A 1 X 2 2 3
3 4 405-0RA00-0AA0

5 VDC 24 VDC
FMR
BATT.1 +
BATT.2 +
Under cover
Battery compartment

2 BATT, OFF, 1 BATT
3-pin plug-in power connector Fixing screws
Figure 3-7
3-28

Dimensions, Weight, and Cable Cross-Sections Dimensions WxHxD (mm) Weight Cable cross-section 75x290x217 2.2 kg 3x1.5 mm2 (litz wire with wire end ferrule; use component conductor or flexible sheath cable) 3 to 9 mm Input Rating Input voltage Output voltages Output Rating
5.1 VDC/24 VDC 5 VDC: 20 A 24 VDC: 1.0 A Other Parameters
Output currents
Cable diameter
Rated input current Starting current inrush Overvoltage resistance
7.3 A/3.45 A/2.75 A Peak value 56 A half-value width 1.5 ms In accordance with DIN VDE 0160, curve B2
3-29
3-30
Digital Modules
Structure of the Chapter

The present chapter is subdivided into the following subjects: 1. Overview containing the modules that are available here and a description 2. Information that is generally valid in other words, relating to all digital modules (for example, parameter assignment and diagnostics) 3. Information that refers to specific modules (for example, characteristics, diagram of connections and block diagram, technical specifications and special characteristics of the module): a) for digital input modules b) for digital output modules
Additional Information
Appendix A describes the structure of the parameter records (data records 0, 1 and 128) in the system data. You must be familiar with this structure if you want to modify the parameters of the modules in the STEP 7 user program. Appendix B describes the structure of the diagnostic data (data records 0, 1) in the system data. You must be familiar with this structure if you want to evaluate the diagnostic data of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.
4-1
Digital Modules
Chapter Overview
Section 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.13 4.14 4.15 4.16 4.17 4.18 4.19 4.20 4.21 Module Overview Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module Digital Module Parameter Assignment Diagnostics of the Digital Modules Interrupts of the Digital Modules Input Characteristic Curve for Digital Inputs Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 32 x 24 VDC; (6ES7421-1BL01-0AA0) Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC; (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0) Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16 x120 VAC; (6ES7421-5EH00-0AA0) Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC; (6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0) Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16 x 120/230 VUC; (6ES7421-1FH00-0AA0) Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16 x 120/230 VUC; (6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0) Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 32 x 120 VUC; (6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0) Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 16 x 24 VDC/2 A; (6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0) Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A; (6ES7422-5EH10-0AB0) Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7422-1BL00-0AA0) Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0) Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/5 A; (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0) Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/2 A; (6ES7422-1FH00-0AA0) Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A; (6ES7422-5EH00-0AB0) Relay Output Module SM 422; DO 16 x 30/230 VUC/Rel. 5 A; (6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0) Description Page 4-3 4-5 4-6 4-9 4-13 4-15 4-17 4-20 4-28 4-31 4-36 4-38 4-41 4-44 4-47 4-52 4-55 4-61 4-64 4-68 4-72
4-2
Digital Modules
4.1
Module Overview
Introduction
The following tables summarize the most important characteristics of the digital modules. This overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module for your task.
Table 4-1 Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance
SM 421; DI 32 x 24 VDC (-1BL0x-) 32 DI; isolated in groups of 32 24 VDC Switches Two-wire proximity switches (BEROs) Programmable diagnostics Diagnostic Interrupt Hardware interrupt upon edge change Adjustable input delays Substitute value output Special Features No No No Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC (-7BH00-) 16 DI; isolated in groups of 8 24 VDC SM 421; DI 16 x 120 VAC (-5EH00-) 16 DI; isolated in groups of 1 120 VAC SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC (-7DH00-) 16 DI; isolated in groups of 1 24 VUC to 60 VUC SM 421; DI 16 x 120/230 VUC (-1FH00-) 16 DI; isolated in groups of 4 120 VAC/ 230 VDC SM 421; DI 16 x 120/230 VUC (-1FH20-) 16 DI; isolated in groups of 4 120/230 VUC SM 421; DI 32 x 120 VUC (-1EL00-) 32 DI; isolated in groups of 8 120 VAC/ VDC
Module Characteristics Number of inputs
Rated input voltage Suitable for...
No High packaging density
Yes Yes Quick and with interrupt capability
No Channelspecific isolation
Yes Interrupt capability with low, variable voltages
No For high, variable voltages
No For high, variable voltages Input characteristic curve to IEC 61131-2
No High packaging density
4-3
Digital Modules
Table 4-2
Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

SM 422; DO 16 x 24 VDC/2 A (-1BH1x) SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A (-5EH10) 16 DO; isolated and reverse polarity protection in groups of 8 1.5 A 20 to 125 VDC Yes Yes Yes For variable voltages SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/ 0.5 A (-1BL00) 32 DO; isolated in groups of 32 SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A (-7BL00) SM 422; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/5 A (-1FF00) 8 DO; isolated in groups of 1 SM 422; DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/2 A (-1FH00) 16 DO; isolated in groups of 4 SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A (-5EH00) 16 DO; isolated in groups of 1
Module
Characteristics Number of outputs
16 DO; isolated in groups of 8
32 DO; isolated in groups of 8
Output current Rated load voltage Programmable diagnostics Diagnostic Interrupt Substitute value output Special Features
2A 24 VDC No No No For high currents
0.5 A 24 VDC No No No High packaging density
0.5 A 24 VDC Yes Yes Yes Particularly quick and with interrupt capability
5A 120/ 230 VAC No No No For high currents with channelspecific isolation
2A 120/ 230 VAC No No No
2A 20 to 120 VAC Yes Yes Yes For variable currents with channelspecific isolation
Table 4-3
Relay Output Module: Characteristics at a Glance

Module SM 422; DO 16 x 30/230 VUC/Rel. 5 A (-1HH00) 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8 125 VDC 230 VAC
Characteristics
Number of Outputs Load Voltage
Special Features
4-4
Digital Modules
4.2
Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module
Introduction
The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other to commission digital modules successfully. The sequence of steps is a suggestion, but you can perform individual steps either earlier or later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install other modules or install, commission etc. other modules in between times.
Sequence of Steps
Table 4-4 Step 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module Procedure Select the module Install the module in the SIMATIC S7 network Assign parameters to module Commission configuration Refer To... Section 4.1 and specific module section from Section 4.7 Installation section in the manual S7-400 Programmable Controllers, Hardware and Installation Section 4.3 and, if necessary, the specific module section as of Section 4.7 Section on commissioning in the manual S7-400 Programmable Controllers, Hardware and Installation
If commissioning was not successful, Section 4.4 diagnose configuration
4-5
Digital Modules
4.3
Digital Module Parameter Assignment
Introduction
Digital modules can have different characteristics. You can set the characteristics of dome modules by means of parameter assignment.
Tools for Parameter Assignment

You assign parameters to digital modules in STEP 7. When you have set all the parameters, download the parameters from the programming device to the CPU. When there is a transition from STOP to RUN mode, the CPU transfers the parameters to the individual digital modules.
Static and dynamic parameters

The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters. Set the static parameters in STOP mode of the CPU, as described above. In addition, you can modify the dynamic parameters in the current user program in an S7 programmable controller by means of SFCs. Note, however, that after a change from RUN STOP, STOP RUN of the CPU, the parameters set in STEP 7 apply again. You will find a description of the parameter assignment of modules in the user program in Appendix A.
Configuration in RUN (CiR)

The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parametersCiR (Configuration in RUN) is a method you can use to modify your system or edit the parameters of individual modules. These changes are made while your system is in operation, that is, your CPU will stay in RUN over a period of max. two seconds while these changes are applied. For detailed information on this topic, refer to the Configuration in RUN by means of CiR manual. This manual is found, for example, as a file in PDF format on your included STEP 7 CD.
4-6
Digital Modules
4.3.1
Parameters of the Digital Input Modules

The parameterized digital input modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values listed in the table below, depending on functionality. Refer to the section on a particular digital module, starting from Section 4.7, to find out which subset it is capable of using. Dont forget that some digital modules have different time delays after parameter assignment. The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in STEP 7.
Table 4-5
Parameters of the Digital Input Modules Value Range Default2 Parameter Type Dynamic Scope
Parameter Enable Diagnostic interrupt1) Hardware interrupt1)
Yes/no Yes/no 1 to 4
No No
Module
Destination CPU for

interrupt Diagnostics Wire break No load voltage L+/sensor supply Trigger for hardware interrupt
Static
Module
Yes/no Yes/no
No No
Static
Channel
Rising (positive) edge Falling (negative) edge

Input delay
Yes/no Yes/no 0.1 ms (DC) 0.5 ms (DC) 3 ms (DC) 20 ms (DC/AC) Substitutea value (SV) Keep last value (KLV) Yes/no
No No 3 (DC)
Dynamic
Channel
Static
Channel
Reaction to error Substitute1

1)
SV No
Dynamic Dynamic
Module Channel
If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER-1/ER-2. 2) Only in the CC (central controller) is It possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings and without HWCONFIG support.
4-7
Digital Modules
4.3.2
Parameters of the Digital Output Modules

The parameterized digital output modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values listed in the table below, depending on the functionality. Refer to the section on the relevant digital module, starting from Section 4.16, to find out which subset it is capable of using. The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in STEP 7.
Table 4-6
Parameters of the Digital Output Modules Value Range Default2) Parameter Type Dynamic Static Dynamic Scope
Parameter Enable Diagnostic interrupt1)
Yes/no 1 to 4 Substitute a value (SV) Keep last value (KLV) Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no
No SV
Module Module Module
Destination CPU for

interrupt Reaction to CPU-STOP Diagnostics Wire break No load voltage L+ Short circuit to M Short circuit to L+ Fuse blown Substitute 1
1)
No No No No No No
Static
Channel
Dynamic
Channel
If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER-1/ ER-2. 2) Only in the CC (central controller) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings and without support from HWCONFIG.
4-8
Digital Modules
4.4
Diagnostics of the Digital Modules
Programmable and Non-Programmable Diagnostic Messages

In diagnostics, we make a distinction between programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages. You obtain programmable diagnostic messages only if you have enabled diagnostics by parameter assignment. You perform parameter assignment in the Diagnostics parameter block in STEP 7 (refer to Section 5.7). Non-programmable diagnostic messages are always made available by the digital module irrespective of diagnostics being enabled.
Actions Following Diagnostic Message in STEP 7

Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions: The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnostics of the digital module, forwarded to the CPU and can be read out by the user program. The fault LED on the digital module lights up. If you have parameterized Enable Diagnostic Interrupt in STEP 7, a diagnostic interrupt is triggered and OB 82 is called (refer to Section 4.5).
Reading Out Diagnostic Messages

You can read out detailed diagnostic messages by means of SFCs in the user program (refer to the Appendix Diagnostic Data of Signal Modules). You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7 in the module diagnosis (refer to the STEP 7 online help system).
Diagnostics Using the INTF and EXTF LEDs

Some digital modules indicate faults by means of their two fault LEDs INTF (internal fault) and EXTF (external fault). The LEDs go out when all the internal and external faults have been eliminated. Refer to the technical specifications of the modules, starting at Section 4.7, to find out which digital modules have these fault LEDs.
4-9
Digital Modules
Diagnostic Messages of the Digital Modules

The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the digital modules with diagnostics capability. You can find out which diagnostic message each module is capable of in the Appendix entitled Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules.
Table 4-7 Diagnostic Messages of the Digital Modules LED INTF/EXTF INTF EXTF INTF/EXTF EXTF EXTF INTF INTF INTF/EXTF INTF INTF INTF INTF EXTF EXTF EXTF INTF EXTF EXTF Scope of the Diagnosis Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel/channel group Channel/channel group Parameters Can Be Assigned No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Diagnostic Message Module problem Internal malfunction External malfunction Channel error present External auxiliary supply missing Front connector missing Module not parameterized. Wrong parameters Channel information available STOP mode Internal voltage failure EPROM error Hardware interrupt lost Parameter assignment error Short-circuit to M Short-circuit to L+ Wire break Fuse blown Sensor supply missing No load voltage L+
Note A prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostic messages is that you have assigned parameters to the digital module accordingly in STEP 7.
4-10
Digital Modules
Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures for Digital Modules

Table 4-8 Diagnostic Messages of the Digital Modules, Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures Possible Error Cause An error detected by the module has occurred The module has detected an error within the programmable controller The module has detected an error outside the programmable controller Indicates that only certain channels are faulty Voltage required to operate the module is missing (load voltage, sensor supply) Jumper between connections 1 and 2 in the front connector missing The module requires the information as to whether it should work with system default parameters or with your parameters One parameter or the combination of parameters is not plausible Channel error present; the module can supply additional channel information Module was not parameterized and the first module cycle has not been completed Module is defective Module is defective Supply missing voltage Remedy
Diagnostic Message Module malfunction Internal malfunction External malfunction There is a channel error No external auxiliary voltage No front connector Parameters have not been assigned to the module Wrong parameters Channel information available Operating mode STOP Internal voltage failure EPROM error
Install jumper Message queued after power-on until parameter transmission by the CPU has been completed; parameterize the module, as required Reassign module parameter -
If after rebooting the CPU all the input values are in the intermediate memory, this message is reset Replace module Replace module Change the interrupt handling in the CPU (change priority for interrupt OB; shorten interrupt program)
Hardware interrupt lost The module cannot send an interrupt, since the previous interrupt was not acknowledged; configuration error possible
Parameter assignment Incorrect parameters transferred to Reassign module parameter error the module (for example, impossible input delay); the corresponding channel is deactivated Short circuit to M Overload of output Short-circuit of output to M Short circuit to L+ Wire break Short circuit of output to L+ Lines interrupted No external sensor supply Channel not connected (open) Eliminate overload Check the wiring of the outputs Check the wiring of the outputs Close circuit Wire sensors with 10 kW to 18 kW Disable the Diagnostics Wire Break parameter for the channel in STEP 7 Connect channel
4-11
Digital Modules
Table 4-8
Diagnostic Messages of the Digital Modules, Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures, continued Possible Error Cause One or more fuses on the module has blown and caused this fault. Overload of sensor supply Short circuit of sensor supply to M Remedy Remove the overload and replace the fuse Eliminate overload Eliminate short circuit Feed in supply voltage L+ Replace module
Diagnostic Message Fuse blown No sensor supply
No load voltage L+
Power supply L+ to module missing Fuse in module is defective
4-12
Digital Modules
4.5
Interrupts of the Digital Modules
Introduction
This section describes the interrupt behavior of the digital modules. The following interrupts exist: Diagnostic Interrupt Hardware interrupt Note that not all digital modules have interrupt capability or they are only capable of a subset of the interrupts described here. Refer to the technical specifications of the modules, starting at Section 4.7, to find out which digital modules have interrupt capability. The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online help system for STEP 7, where they are described in greater detail.
Enabling Interrupts
The interrupts are not preset in other words, they are inhibited without appropriate parameter assignment. You enable the interrupts in STEP 7 (refer to Section 4.3).
Special Feature: The Module is Inserted in ER-1/ER-2

Note If you use the digital module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set the parameters for enabling all the interrupts to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER-1/ER-2.
Diagnostic Interrupt
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after troubleshooting) are reported by means of an interrupt. The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program and processes the diagnostic interrupt block (OB 82). In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more detailed diagnostic information from the module. The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.
4-13
Digital Modules
Hardware Interrupt
A digital input module can trigger a hardware interrupt for each channel at a rising or falling edge, or both, of a signal status change. You perform parameter assignment for each channel separately. It can be modified at any time (in RUN mode using the user program). Pending hardware interrupts trigger hardware interrupt processing in the CPU (OB 40 to OB 47). The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program or of the priority classes with low priority. In the user program of the hardware interrupt OB (OB 40 to OB 47) you can specify how the programmable controller is to respond to an edge change. When the hardware interrupt OB is exited, the hardware interrupt is acknowledged on the module. For each channel the digital input module can buffer an interrupt that has not been triggered. If no higher priority run-time levels are waiting to be processed, the buffered interrupts (of all modules) are serviced one after the other by the CPU according to the order in which they occurred.
Hardware Interrupt Lost

In an interrupt has been buffered for a channel and another interrupt occurs on that channel before it has been processed by the CPU, a diagnostic interrupt hardware interrupt lost is triggered. More interrupts on this channel are not acquired until processing of the interrupt buffered on this channel has been executed.
Interrupt-Triggering Channels
The interrupt-triggering channels are stored in the local data of the hardware interrupt OBs (in the start information of the corresponding OB). The start information is two words long (bits 0 to 31). The bit number is the channel number. Bits 16 to 31 are not assigned.
4-14
Digital Modules
4.6
Input Characteristic Curve for Digital Inputs
IEC 61131, Type 1 and Type 2

The IEC 61131 standard requires the following for the input current: In the case of type 2, an input current of y 2 mA already at + 5 V In the case of type 1, an input current of y 0.5 mA already at + 5 V
EN 60947-5-2, Two-Wire BEROs

The standard for BEROs (EN 60947-5-2) specifies that there can be a current of v 1.5 mA for BEROs in the 0 signal state. The input current of the module in the 0 signal state is decisive for the operation of two-wire BEROs. This must be in accordance with BERO requirements.
4-15
Digital Modules
Input Characteristic Curve for Digital Inputs

As long as the current flowing into the module remains v 1.5 mA, the module recognizes this as a 0 signal.
I E (mA) 7 6
Typ. switching threshold (9.5 V)
Resistance characteristic curve
I min to IEC 61131; type 2
BERO standard I v 1.5 mA
2 1.5 0.5
I min to IEC 61131; type 1
30 V
0 0
11 13 15 1 L+
24
30
L+ (V)
1 2-Wire BERO 0 I v 1.5 mA --> 0 signal PLC input resistance M Figure 4-1 Input Characteristic Curve for Digital Inputs
4-16
Digital Modules
4.7
Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 32 x 24 VDC; (6ES7421-1BL01-0AA0)
Characteristics
The digital input module SM 421; DI 32 x 24 VDC has the following features: 32 inputs, isolated in a group of 32 24 VDC rated input voltage Suitable for switches and two/three/four-wire proximity switches (BEROs, IEC 61131; type 1) The status LEDs indicate the process status.
4-17
Digital Modules
Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 32 x 24 VDC
Process
Module
L+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 M
Figure 4-2
4-18
Data register and bus control
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Digital Modules
Technical Specifications of the SM 421; DI 32 x 24 VDC

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 25 x 290 x 210 Approx. 500 g Data for Specific Module Number of inputs Length of cable 32 Max. 600 m Max. 1000 m Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Substitute value can be applied Green LED per channel None None No
Data for Selecting a Sensor Input voltage
Unshielded Shielded
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Power rated voltage of the electronics L+ Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously Isolation Not required 32
Rated value For signal 1 For signal 0 At signal 1 At 0 to 1 At 1 to 0
24 VDC 13 V to 30 V -30 V to 5 V 7 mA 1.2 ms to 4.8 ms 1.2 ms to 4.8 ms To IEC 61131; type 1 Possible Max. 1.5 mA
Input current Input delay Yes No 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels Between the different circuits
Input characteristic curve Connection of two-wire BEROs
Permitted potential difference
Permitted bias current
Insulation tested with Channels against backplane bus and load voltage L+ 500 VDC
Current consumption
From the backplane bus
Max. 20 mA Typ. 6 W
Power dissipation of the module
4-19
Digital Modules
4.8
Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC; (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)
Characteristics
The digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC has the following features: 16 inputs, isolated in 2 groups of 8 24 VDC rated input voltage Suitable for switches and two/three/four-wire proximity switches (BEROs, IEC 61131; type 2) 2 short-circuit-proof sensor supplies for 8 channels each External redundant power supply possible to supply sensors Sensor supply (Vs) O.K. status display Group error display for internal faults (INTF) and external faults (EXTF) Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable hardware interrupt Programmable input delays Parameterizable substitute values in the input range The status LEDs indicate the process status.
Note The spare parts of this module is compatible with SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V; (6ES7421-7BH00-0AB0). To be able to use the new function input delay 50 ms, you require STEP 7 as of V 5.2.
4-20
Digital Modules

1 2 1L+ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1M 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 M Front connector monitoring Monitoring of external auxiliary supply 1L+ Monitoring of internal voltage 1L+
INTF EXTF
1L+ 0 1 2 3
24 V
1Vs 4 5 6 7 1M 1M 2L+ 2L+ 0 1 2 3 1M
1M Short-circuit protection Monitoring of sensor supply 1Vs 1L+
2L+
Monitoring of external auxiliary supply 2L+ Monitoring of internal voltage 2L+
24 V
2Vs 4 5 6 7 2M 2M
2M Short-circuit protection Monitoring of sensor supply 2Vs
2L+
2M L+ 24 V
2M
Figure 4-3
Backplane bus interface
4-21
Digital Modules
Terminal Assignment Diagram for Redundant Supply of Sensors

The figure below shows how sensors can additionally be supplied by means of Vs with a redundant voltage source for example, via another module).
L+ Short-circuitproof driver Digital input module Vs M to the sensors
1 L+ 2 L+
Figure 4-4
Terminal Assignment Diagram for the Redundant Supply of Sensors of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC
Technical Specifications of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 25 290 210 Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated supply voltage of the electronics and sensor L+ 24 VDC Yes 16
Approx. 600 g Data for Specific Module
Reverse polarity protection
Number of inputs Length of cable
16
Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously Isolation
Unshielded input delay 0.1 ms 0.5 ms 3 ms Max. 20 m Max. 50 m Max. 600 m
Between channels and backplane bus Between channels and power supply of the electronics Between the channels In groups of
Yes No
Yes 2 75 VDC, 60 VAC
Shielded input delay 0.1 ms 0.5 ms 3 ms Max. 30 m Max. 70 m Max. 1000 m
Between the different circuits
Insulation tested with Channels against backplane bus and load voltage L+ Channel groups between themselves From the backplane bus From the power supply L+ 500 VDC
500 VDC
Current consumption Max. 130 mA Max. 120 mA Typ. 5 W
4-22
Digital Modules
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Green LED per channel Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned
Time, Frequency Internal preparation time 1) for
only status recognition Input delay of the channel groups 0.05 ms/0.05 ms Input delay of the channel groups 0.05 ms/0.1 ms or 0.1 ms/0.1 ms Input delay of the channel groups >= 0.5 ms max. 50 ms
Hardware interrupt Diagnostic Interrupt
max. 70 ms
Diagnostic functions Monitoring of the power supply voltage of the electronics Load voltage monitor Group error display For internal fault For external fault Red LED (INTF) Red LED (EXTF) None Yes Yes
max. 180 ms
Green LED per group
Status recognition and enable process interrupt Input delay of the channel groups 0.05 ms/0.05 ms 2) Input delay for the channel groups 0.05 ms/0.1 ms or 0.1 ms/0.1 ms Input delay of the channel groups >= 0.5 ms
max. 60 ms
Channel error display (F) Diagnostic information can be displayed
max. 80 ms
Monitoring for Wire break I < 1 mA Yes
max. 190 ms
Substitute value can be applied
Sensor Power Supply Outputs Number of outputs Output voltage 2 Min. L+(2.5 V) 120 mA 0 to 150 mA Possible Yes, electronic
Internal preparation time for diagnostics/diagnostic interrupt Input delay
max. 5 ms
with load Rated value Permitted range
Parameters can be assigned Rated value Input frequency (with a time delay of 0.1 ms)
Yes 0.1/0.5/3 ms < 2 kHz
Output current
Additional (redundant) supply Short-circuit protection
Values go into cycle and response times. Sensor Circuit Resistance circuit of the sensor 10 to 18 k for wire break monitoring 1) The filter times are added to the overall runtime of the selected input delay. 2) Substitute functionality; diagnostics and diagnostic interrupt are not to be selected.
Rated value For signal 1 For signal 0 At signal 1 At signal 0
24 VDC 11 V to 30 V -30 V to 5 V 6 mA to 12 mA < 6 mA To IEC 61131; type 2 Possible Max. 3 mA
Input current
4-23
Digital Modules
4.8.1
Assigning Parameters to the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC
Parameter Assignment
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital modules in Section 4.3.
Parameters of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC

You will find an overview of the parameters you can set and their default settings for the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC in the table below.
Table 4-9 Parameters of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC Value Range Default2) Parameter Type Dynamic Scope
Parameter Enable Diagnostic interrupt1) Hardware interrupt1)
No No
Module
Destination CPU for

interrupt Diagnostics Wire break No load voltage L+/sensor supply Trigger for hardware interrupt
Static
Module Channel Channel group
Yes/no Yes/no
No No
Static
Rising edge Falling edge

Input delay
Yes/no Yes/no 0.05 ms 0.1 ms 0.5 ms 3 ms Substitute a Value (SV) Keep Last Value (KLV) Yes/no
Dynamic
Channel
3 ms
Static
Channel group
Reaction to Error Enable substitute value 1

1)
SV No
Dynamic Dynamic
Module Channel
If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER-1/ER-2. 2) Only in the CC (central controller) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings.
Assignment of the Encoder Supplies to Channel Groups

The two encoder supplies of the module are used to supply two channel groups: inputs 0 to 7 and inputs 8 to 15. In these two channel groups, you parameterize the diagnostics for the encoder supply, too.
4-24
Digital Modules
Ensuring a Wire Break Check Is Carried Out

To ensure that a wire break check is carried out, you require an external sensor circuit using a resistor of 10 kW to 18 kW. The resistor should be connected parallel to the contact and should be arranged as closely as possible to the sensor. This additional resistor is not required in the following cases: If two-wire BEROs are used If you dont parameterize the Wire Break diagnosis
Setting the Input Delay for Channel Groups

You can only set the input delay for each group of channels. In other words, the setting for channel 0 applies to inputs 0 to 7 and the setting for channel 8 applies to inputs 8 to 15.
Note The parameters that are entered for the remaining channels (1 to 7 and 9 to 15) must be equal to the value 0 or 8, otherwise those channels will be reported as being incorrectly parameterized. Any hardware interrupts that have occurred in the meantime will be reported after acknowledgement.
Optimum Signal Propagation Delay

You can achieve the fastest signal propagation delay with the following settings: Both channel groups are parameterized with an input delay of 50 s All the diagnoses (load voltage error, wire break) are deactivated Diagnostic interrupt is not enabled
4-25
Digital Modules
4.8.2
Behavior of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC
Effect of Operating Mode and Supply Voltage on the Input Values

The input values of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 DC depend on the operating mode of the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module.
Table 4-10 How the Input Values Depend on the Operating Mode of the CPU and on the Supply Voltage L+ of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC CPU Operating Mode POWER ON RUN Power Supply L+ to Digital Module L+ exists L+ missing STOP L+ exists L+ missing POWER OFF * L+ exists L+ missing Input Value of Digital Module Process value 0 signal * Process value 0 signal*
Depends on the parameter assignment (see Table 4-9 )
Behavior upon Failure of the Supply Voltage

Failure of the supply voltage of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 DC is always indicated by the EXTF LED on the module. Furthermore, this information is made available on the module (entry in diagnosis). Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment.
Short-Circuit of Sensor Supply Vs

Irrespective of the parameter assignment, the corresponding Vs LED goes out if a short-circuit of the encoder supply Vs occurs.
4-26
Digital Modules
Effect of Errors and Parameter Assignment on the Input Values

The input values of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 DC are affected by certain errors and the parameter assignment of the module. The following table lists the effects on the input values. You will find more diagnostic messages of the module in the Appendix entitled Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules.
Table 4-11 How the Input Values Are Affected by Faults and by the Parameter Assignment of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC Diagnostic Message Diagnostics Parameter Cannot be disabled Reaction to Error Parameter Not relevant SV KLV Incorrect parameters (module/channel) STOP operating mode Internal voltage failure Cannot be disabled Cannot be disabled Cannot be disabled Not relevant SV KLV Not relevant SV KLV Sensor supply missing (also activated via No Load Voltage L+) Deactivated Activated SV KLV No load voltage L+ (for Deactivated each channel group) Activated Input Value of Digital Module
Module not parameterized No front connector
0 signal (all channels) Parameterized substitute value Last read, valid value 0 signal (module/all incorrectly parameterized channels) Process value (not updated) Parameterized substitute value Last read, valid value Current process value 0 signal Parameterized substitute value Last read, valid value 0 signal Parameterized substitute value Last read, valid value 0 signal, if the contact is connected via the sensor supply; process value for the external sensor supply Parameterized substitute value Last read, valid value
Hardware interrupt lost Cannot be disabled Wire break (for each channel) Deactivated Activated
SV KLV
4-27
Digital Modules
Behavior when the Input Delay Equals 0.1 ms and an Error Occurs
If you have parameterized the following: An input delay of 0.1 ms or 0.05 ms KLV or SV as the response to an error Substitute 1 In the event of a fault on a channel that has a 1 signal, the following could occur: An 0 signal may be briefly output If parameterized, a hardware interrupt may be generated This occurs before the last valid value or substitute value 1 is output.
4.9
Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16 x 120 VAC; (6ES7421-5EH00-0AA0)
Characteristics
The SM 421; DI 16 x 120 VAC has the following features: 16 inputs, isolated 120 VAC rated input voltage Suitable for switches and two-wire proximity switches (BEROs, IEC 61131; type 2)
4-28
Digital Modules
Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x 120 VAC
Process 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Module
Byte 0
0 1N 1 2N 2 3N 3 4N
Adaptation Adaptation Adaptation Adaptation
4 5N 5 6N 7N 7 8N 6
Adaptation Adaptation Adaptation Adaptation Data register and bus control
Byte 1
0 9N 1 10N 2 11N 3 12N
4 13N 5 14N 6 15N 7 16N
Figure 4-5 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x 120 VDC
4-29
Digital Modules
Technical Specifications of the SM 421; DI 16 x 120 VAC

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 25 x 290 x 210 Approx. 650 g Data for Specific Module Number of inputs Length of cable 16 600 m 1000 m Input voltage Sensor Selection Data
Rated value For signal 1 For signal 0 Frequency range
120 V 72 to 132 VAC 0 to 20 V 47 to 63 Hz
Input current At signal 1 At signal 0 At 0 to 1 At 1 to 0 6 to 20 mA 0 to 4 mA 2 to 15 ms 5 to 25 ms To IEC 61131; type 2 Possible Max. 4 A
Unshielded Shielded
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously Isolation 16
Input delay
Input characteristic curve Yes Yes 1 Connection of two-wire BEROs
Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of
Between Minternal and the inputs Between the inputs of the different groups
120 VAC 250 VAC 1500 VAC Max. 0.1 A Typ. 3.0 W
Insulation tested with Current consumption
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LED per channel None None
4-30
Digital Modules
4.10
Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC; (6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0)
Characteristics
The SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC is characterized by the following features: 16 inputs, individually isolated Rated input voltage 24 VUC to 60 VUC Suitable for switches and two-wire proximity switches (BEROs) Suitable as active high and active low input Group error display for internal faults (INTF) and external faults (EXTF) Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable hardware interrupt Programmable input delays The status LEDs indicate the process status.
4-31
Digital Modules
Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC

Process Front connector jumper L N L N L N L N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 INTF EXTF 0 1N 1 2N 2 3N 3 4N
Adaptation Adaptation Adaptation Adaptation Input Diagnostics Input Diagnostics Input Diagnostics Input Diagnostics
Module
Adaptation
L N L N L N L N
0 9N 1 10 N 2 11 N 3 12 N
Input Diagnostics Input Diagnostics Input Diagnostics Input Diagnostics
L N L N L N L N
4 13 N 5 14 N 6 15 N 7 16 N
Figure 4-6
4-32
L N L N L N L N
4 5N 5 6N 6 7N 7 8N
Adaptation Adaptation Adaptation
Digital Modules
Technical Specifications of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight Number of inputs Length of cable Unshielded input delay 0.5 ms 3 ms 10 / 20 ms 25 x 290 x 210 Approx. 600 g Data for Specific Module 16
Channel error display (F) Diagnostic information can be displayed Wire break
None Possible
Monitoring for I > 0.7 mA No Sensor Selection Data Input voltage Rated value 24 VUC to 60 VUC 15 to 72 VDC 15 VDC to -72 VDC 15 to 60 VAC 6 VDC to +6 VDC 0 VAC to 5 VAC 47 DC/AC to 63 Hz Typ. 4 mA to 10 mA Similar to IEC 61131 1) Possible Max. 0.5 mA to 2 mA2) Substitute value can be applied
Max. 100 m Max. 600 m Max. 600 m 1000 m 16
For signal 1
Shielded line length
For signal 0
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Frequency range Input current At signal 1 Input characteristic curve Connection of two-wire BEROs Permitted bias current Internal preparation time for
Yes Yes 1 75 VDC, 60 VAC
Between the channels In groups of
Permitted potential difference Between the different circuits Insulation tested with
Time, Frequency
Only hardware interrupt enable Enable hardware and diagnostic interrupts Parameters can be assigned Rated value
Max. 450 ms Max. 2 ms
Channels against backplane bus and load voltage L+ Channels among one another
1500 VAC
Input delay 1500 VAC Yes 0.5/3/10/20 ms Sensor Circuit Resistance circuit of the sensor for wire break monitoring
Current consumption From the backplane bus Power dissipation of the module Status display Interrupts Hardware interrupt
Max.150 mA Typ. 8 W
Values go into cycle and response times.
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Green LED per channel Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Red LED (INTF) Red LED (EXTF)

1)
Rated voltage 24 V (15 V to 35 V) Rated voltage 48 V (30 V to 60 V) Rated voltage 60 V (50 V to 72V)
18 k 39 k 56 k
Diagnostic functions
Group error display For internal fault For external fault
IEC 61131 does not specify any data for UC modules. The values have been adapted as much as possible to IEC 61131. 2) Minimum closed-circuit current is required for wire break monitoring.
4-33
Digital Modules
4.10.1
Assigning Parameters to the SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC
Parameters of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC

The following table contains an overview of the parameters you can set and their default settings for the SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC.
Table 4-12 Parameters of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC Parameter Enable Diagnostic interrupt1) Hardware interrupt1) Value Range Default2) Parameter Type Dynamic Static Static Scope
Yes/no Yes/no 1 to 4 Yes/no
No No No
Module Module Channel
Destination CPU for interrupt

Diagnostics Wire break Trigger for hardware interrupt
Rising (positive) edge Falling (negative) edge

Input delay3)
Yes/no Yes/no
Dynamic Static
Channel Channel group
0.5 ms (DC) 3 ms 3 ms (DC) (DC) 20 ms (DC/AC)
1)
If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER-1/ER-2. 2) Only in the CC (central controller) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings. 3) If you assign 0.5 ms , then you should not parameterize a diagnosis because the internal processing time for diagnostic functions can be > 0.5 ms.
Ensuring a Wire Break Check Is Carried Out

To ensure that a wire break check is carried out, you require an external sensor circuit using a resistor of 18 to 56 kW. The resistor should be connected parallel to the contact and should be arranged as closely as possible to the sensor. This additional resistor is not required in the following cases: If two-wire BEROs are used If you dont parameterize the Wire Break diagnosis
4-34
Digital Modules
Setting the Input Delay for Channel Groups

You can only set the input delay for each group of channels. In other words, the setting for channel 0 applies to inputs 0 to 7 and the setting for channel 8 applies to inputs 8 to 15.
Note The parameters that are entered for the remaining channels (1 to 7 and 9 to 15) must be equal to the value 0 or 8, otherwise those channels will be reported as being incorrectly parameterized. Any hardware interrupts that have occurred in the meantime will be reported after acknowledgement.
Optimum Signal Propagation Delays

You can achieve the fastest signal propagation delay with the following settings: Both channel groups are parameterized with an input delay of 0.5 ms The Diagnostics parameter is disabled The Diagnostic Interrupt parameter is disabled
Circuit as for active high or active low input
DI_x Channel x of the DI_xN

U_s
DI 421 16 x 24/60 VUC
Active high L+ L+
Active low
1
U_s U_s
0
0V
0V
U_s
0 1
1
L+
L+
Input threshold
Figure 4-7 Circuit as for Active High or Active Low Input
4-35
Digital Modules
4.11
Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16 x 120/230 VUC; (6ES7 421-1FH00-0AA0)
Characteristics
The SM 421; DI 16 x 120/230 VUC is characterized by the following features: 16 inputs, isolated Rated input voltage 120/230 VUC Suitable for switches and two-wire proximity switches
4-36
Digital Modules
Process
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Module
0 1 Data register and bus control 2 3
1N 4 5 6 7
2N
0 1 2 3
3N 4 5 6 7 4N
Figure 4-8
4-37
Digital Modules
Technical Specifications of the SM 421; DI 16

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 25 x 290 x 210 Approx. 650 g Data for Specific Module Number of inputs Length of cable 16
120/230 VUC
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions
Green LED per channel None None
Unshielded Shielded
600 m 1000 m
Rated value For signal 1 For signal 0 Frequency range At signal 1 At signal 0 At 0 to 1 At 1 to 0
120/230 VUC 79 to 264 VAC 80 to 264 VDC 0 VUC to 40 VUC 47 to 63 Hz 2 mA to 5 mA 0 to 1 mA 5 to 25 ms 5 to 25 ms To IEC 61131; type 1 Possible Max. 1 mA
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously 16 at 120 V 8 at 240 V 16 with fan subassembly Isolation
Input current
Yes Yes 4
Input delay
230 VAC 500 VAC 4000 VAC Max. 100 mA Typ. 3.5 W
Insulation resistance Current consumption
4.12
Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16 x 120/230 VUC; (6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0)
Characteristics
The SM 421; DI 16 x 120/230 VUC is characterized by the following features: 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 4 Rated input voltage 120/230 VUC Input characteristic curve to IEC 61131; type 2 Suitable for switches and two-wire proximity switches (BEROs) The status LEDs indicate the process status.
4-38
Digital Modules

Process Module
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
0 1 Data register and bus control 2 3 1N 4 5 6 7 2N 0 1 2 3 3N 4 5 6 7 4N
Figure 4-9
4-39
Digital Modules
Technical Specifications of the SM 421; DI 16 x 120/230 VUC

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 25 x 290 x 210 Approx. 650 g Data for Specific Module Number of inputs Length of cable 16 600 m 1000 m Input voltage Data for Selecting a Sensor
Rated value For signal 1
120/230 VUC 74 to 264 VAC 80 to 264 VDC 80 to 264 VDC 0 to 40 VAC 40 to +40 VDC 47 to 63 Hz Typ. 10 mA AC Typ. 1.8 mA DC Typ. 14 mA AC Typ. 2 mA DC
For signal 0
Unshielded Shielded
Frequency range Input current
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Power rated voltage of the electronics L+ Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously Isolation None
At signal 1 (120 V) At signal 1 (230 V)
16
Yes Yes 4
At signal 0
0 to 6 mA AC 0 to 2 mA DC Max. 20 ms AC Max. 15 ms DC Max. 30 ms AC Max. 25 ms DC To IEC 61131; type 2 Possible Max. 5 mA AC
Input delay At 0 to 1 At 1 to 0
250 VAC Input characteristic curve 500 VAC Connection of two-wire BEROs 4000 VAC Max. 80 mA Typ. 12 W
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Substitute value can be applied Green LED per channel None None No
4-40
Digital Modules
4.13
Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 32 x 120 VUC; (6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0)
Characteristics
The SM 421; DI 32 x 120 VUC is characterized by the following features: 32 inputs, isolated Rated input voltage 120 VUC Suitable for switches and two-wire proximity switches
4-41
Digital Modules
Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 32 x 120 VUC
Process
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Module
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1N 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2N Data register and bus control Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3N
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4N
Figure 4-10
Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 32 x 120 VUC
4-42
Digital Modules
Technical Specifications of the SM 421; DI 32 x 120 VUC

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Weight 25 x 290 x 210 Approx. 600 g Data for Specific Module Number of inputs Length of cable 32 Input voltage 600 m 1000 m Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LED per channel None None
Data for Selecting a Sensor
Unshielded Shielded
Rated value For signal 1 For signal 0 Frequency range At signal 1 At signal 0 At 0 to 1 At 1 to 0
120 VUC 79 to 132 VAC 80 VDC to 132 VDC 0 to 20 V 47 to 63 Hz 2 mA to 5 mA 0 to 1 mA 5 to 25 ms 5 to 25 ms To IEC 61131; type 1 Possible Max.1 mA
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ 79 to 132 VAC 80 to 132 VDC Yes 32
Input current
Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously Isolation
Input delay Yes Yes 8
120 VAC 250 VAC 1500 VAC Max. 200 mA Typ. 6.5 W
4-43
Digital Modules
4.14
Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 16 x 24 VDC/2 A; (6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0)
Characteristics
The digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x 24 VDC/2 A has the following features. 16 outputs, isolated in two groups of 8 2 A output current 24 VDC rated load voltage The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is not inserted.
A Note about Commissioning

The following technical feature applies to the digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x 24 VDC/2 A with the order number 6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0 but not to the digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x 24 VDC/2 A with the order number 6ES7422-1BH10-0AA0: To commission the module, it is no longer necessary to apply load voltage (1L+ and 3L+, for example,) to each group of 8 outputs. The module is fully operative even if only one group is supplied with L+. Note It is no longer possible to switch off all the outputs by disconnecting a single L+ supply as might have been the case with the previous module (6ES7422-1BH10-0AA0)L+.
4-44
Digital Modules
Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 16
24 VDC/2 A
Process
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Module
1L+ 0 1 2 3 2L+ 2L+ 4 5 6 7 1M 3L+ 3L+ 0 1 2 3 Data register and bus control
1st supply group
2nd supply group
3rd supply group
4th supply group
5th supply group
6th supply group
7th supply group
4L+ 4L+ 4 LED control 5 6 7 2M 2M
8th supply group
Figure 4-11
Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 16
24 VDC/2 A
4-45
Digital Modules
Technical Specifications of the SM 422; DO 16 x 24 VDC/2 A

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 25 x 290 x 210 Approx. 600 g Data for Specific Module Number of outputs Length of cable 16 Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage
At signal 1
Min. L+ (-0,5 V)
Output current At signal 1 Rated value Permitted range 2A 5 mA to 2.4 A Max. 0.5 mA
Unshielded Shielded
600 m 1000 m
At signal 0 (leakage current)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Power rated voltage of the electronics L+ Rated load voltage L+ Aggregate current of the outputs (two outputs per supply group 1)) Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Isolation Max. 3 A Max. 2 A 24 VDC 24 VDC
Output delay (for resistive load)
From 0 to 1 At 1 to 0
Max. 1 ms Max. 1 ms 24 W to 4 kW Max. 10 W
Load resistor range Lamp load Parallel connection of 2 outputs
For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance
Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible
Yes
Triggering a digital input Yes 8 Switch rate
For resistive load For inductive load to IEC 947-51, DC 13 For lamp load
100 Hz 0.2 Hz at 1 A 0.1 Hz at 2A Max. 10 Hz Max. -30 V Electronically cyclic2) 2.8 A to 6 A
75 VDC / 60 VAC
Insulation tested with
Limit (internal) of the inductive circuit interruption voltage up to 500 VDC Short-circuit protection of output1) 500 VDC
Channels against backplane bus and load voltage L+ Between the outputs of the different groups
Threshold on
1) A supply group always consists of two adjacent Max. 160 mA Max. 30 mA Typ. 5 W channels starting with channel 0. Channels 0 and 1, 2 and 3 and so on up to 14 and 15 therefore form one supply group. 2) Following a short circuit, reclosing under a full load is not guaranteed. To prevent this, you can do one of the following things:
Current consumption From the backplane bus Power supply and load voltage L+ (no load)
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LED per channel None None
Change the signal at the output Interrupt the load voltage of the module Briefly disconnect the load from the output
4-46
Digital Modules
4.15
Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A; (6ES7422-5EH10-0AB0)
Characteristics
The SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A has the following features: 16 outputs, each channel is fused; reverse polarity protection and isolated in groups of 8 1.5 A output current Rated load voltage 20 to 125 VDC Group error display for internal faults (INTF) and external faults (EXTF) Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable substitute value output
4-47
Digital Modules
Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A

Process 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Module
Byte 0
0 1 Data register and bus control Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01 LED control 2 3
L1+ L1+ 4 5 6 7 M1
Byte 1
0 1 2 3
L2+ L2+ 4 5 6 7 M2 M2
Figure 4-12
Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A
4-48
Digital Modules
Technical Specifications of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight Number of outputs Length of cable 25 x 290 x 210 Approx. 800 g Data for Specific Module 16 Max. 600 m Max. 1000 m Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage
At signal 1 At signal 1 Rated value Permitted range Permitted surge current
Min. L+ (1,0 V)
Output current 1.5 A 10 mA to 1.5 A Max. 3 A (for 10 ms) Max. 0.5 mA
Unshielded Shielded
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L1 Reverse polarity protection Total current of the outputs 1) Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C With fan sub assembly Max. 16 A 21 A Max. 8 A Isolation 14 A 20 VDC to 138 VDC Yes, with fuse
At signal 0 (leakage current) From 0 to 1 At 1 to 0
Output delay (for resistive load) Max. 2 ms Max. 13 ms
Parallel connection of 2 outputs For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance Possible (only outputs of the same group) Possible (only outputs of the same group) Possible Max. 10 Hz Max. 0.5 Hz Electronically protected2) Typ. 04 A to 5 A Fuse, 8 A/250 V, quick blow
Yes Triggering a digital input Yes 8 250 VAC 1500 VAC Max. 700 mA Max. 2 mA Typ. 10 W Switch rate
Permitted potential difference Between the outputs of the different groups
For resistive load For inductive load to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13
Short-circuit protection of output
Threshold on
From the backplane bus From load voltage L + (without load)
Replacement fuses
Power dissipation of the module Status display Interrupts
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Green LED per channel Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Red LED (INTF) Red LED (EXTF) Yes Yes, programmable
1) To achieve maximum performance capability, distribute the high-current load between the two groups. 2) To reset a deactivated output, first set the output signal to 0 and then to 1. If output signal 1 is written to a deactivated output and the short circuit remains, additional interrupts are generated (provided the diagnostic interrupt parameter was set).
Diagnostic information readable
4-49
Digital Modules
Note If the power supply is switched on by means of a mechanical contact, a voltage pulse may occur at the outputs. The transient pulse lasts a maximum of 0.5 ms.
Changing Fuses
Warning This can result in injury. If you change a fuse without removing the front connector of the module, you could be injured by an electric shock. Consequently, always remove the front connector before you change the fuse.
4-50
Digital Modules
4.15.1
Assigning Parameters to the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A
Parameters of the SM 421; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A

You will find an overview of the parameters you can set and their default settings for the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A in the following table.
Table 4-13 Parameters of the SM 422; DO 1 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A Parameter Enable Diagnostic interrupt1) Value Range Default2) Parameter Type Dynamic Static Dynamic Scope
Yes/no 1 to 4 Substitute a value (SV) Keep last value (KLV)
No SV
Destination CPU for

interrupt Reaction to CPU-STOP Diagnostics No load voltage L+ Short circuit to M
Yes/no Yes/no
No Static No
Channel group Channel
Enable substitute value 1

1)
Yes/no
No
Dynamic
Channel
Assigning the No Load Voltage L+ Diagnosis to Channel Groups

You can only set the No Load Voltage L+ diagnosis separately for each channel group. In other words, the setting for channel 0 applies to inputs 0 to 7, and the setting for channel 8 applies to inputs 8 to 15.
4-51
Digital Modules
4.16
Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7422-1BL00-0AA0)
Characteristics
The SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A has the following features: 32 outputs, isolated in a group of 32 Power is supplied to 8 channels in groups. A supply group always consists of eight adjacent channels starting with channel 0. Channels 0 to 7, 8 to 15, 16 to 23 and 24 to 32 therefore form one supply group Each of these supply groups can be switched off separately by isolating L+, however you have to take note of the common ground connection. 0.5 A output current 24 VDC rated load voltage The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is not inserted.
4-52
Digital Modules
Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Process
1L+ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 M
Module
2L+
2L+ 2L+ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3L+ 3L+ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3L+
4L+
4L+ 4L+ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 M
L+
Figure 4-13
LED control
1L+ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-53
Digital Modules
Technical Specifications of the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 25 x 290 x 210 Approx. 600 g Data for Specific Module Number of outputs Length of cable 32 Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LED per channel None None
Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage
600 m 1000 m
At signal 1
Min. L+ (-0,3 V)
Unshielded Shielded
Output current
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Power rated voltage of the electronics L+ Rated load voltage L+ Aggregate current of the outputs (per supply group1) of 8 outputs) Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Isolation Max. 4 A Max. 2 A 24 VDC 24 VDC
At signal 1 Rated value Permitted range 0.5 A 5 mA to 0.6 A Max. 0.3 mA
Max. 1 ms Max. 1 ms 48 W to 4 kW Max. 5 W
Load resistor range Yes Lamp load Parallel connection of 2 outputs
Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels
No
Permitted potential difference Between the different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC
For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs a load of the same group) To increase performance Possible (only outputs of the same group) Possible
Channels against backplane bus and load voltage L+ Load voltage L+ against backplane bus
500 VDC
Triggering a digital input Switch rate
500 VDC
For resistive load For inductive load to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13 For lamp load
Max. 100 Hz Max. 2 Hz at 0.3 A Max. 0.5 Hz at 0.5 A Max. 10 Hz Typ. 27 V
Current consumption From the backplane bus Power supply and load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 200 mA Max. 30 mA Typ. 4 W
Limit (internal) of the inductive circuit interruption voltage up to Short-circuit protection of the output
Electronically cyclic Typ. 0.7 A to 1.5 A
1) A
Threshold on
supply group always consists of eight adjacent channels starting with channel 0. Channels 0 to 7, 8 to 15, 16 to 23 and 24 to 32 therefore form one supply group.
4-54
Digital Modules
4.17
Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0)
Characteristics
The digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A has the following features: 32 outputs, fused and isolated in groups of 8 0.5 A output current 24 VDC rated load voltage Group error display for internal faults (INTF) and external faults (EXTF) Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable substitute value output The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is not inserted.
4-55
Digital Modules

Module
1L+ monitoring Monitoring of internal voltage Control
Channel
Process
1L+ INTF EXTF 1L+ Control 0 1 Diagnostics Output status 2 3 4 5 6 7 1M 2L+ 1M 2L+ 2L+ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2M 2M 2M 3L+ 3L+ 3L+ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3M 3M 3M 4L+ 4L+ 4L+ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4M 4M 4M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1M 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 L+ 24 V 4L+
+
1L+
status
LED
2L+
3L+
+
Figure 4-14
4-56
Digital Modules
Technical Specifications of the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 25 x 290 x 210 Approx. 600 g Data for Specific Module Number of outputs Length of cable 32
Group error display For internal fault For external fault Red LED (INTF) Red LED (EXTF) Yes
Monitoring for
Unshielded Shielded
600 m 1000 m
Short circuit Wire break
> 1 A (typ.) < 0.15 mA Yes
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Power rated voltage of the electronics L+ Rated load voltage L+ Total current of the outputs (per group) Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Isolation Max. 4 A Max. 2 A 24 VDC 24 VDC
At signal 1
Min. L + ( 0.8 V)
Output current At signal 1 Rated value Permitted range 0.5 A 5 mA to 0.6 A Max. 0.5 mA 48 W to 4 kW
Yes Yes 8
Load resistor range Parallel connection of 2 outputs
75 VDC, 60 VAC
Possible (only outputs of the same group) Possible (only outputs of the same group) Possible
Triggering a digital input 500 VDC Switch rate
Channels against backplane bus and load voltage L+ Between the outputs of the different groups
500 VDC
Max. 100 Hz Max. 2 Hz Max. 2 Hz Typ. L + ( 45 V) Electronically cyclic Typ. 0.75 A to 1.5 A
Current consumption From the backplane bus Power supply and load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 200 mA Max. 120 mA Typ. 8 W
Limit (internal) of the inductive circuit interruption voltage up to Short-circuit protection of the output
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Green LED per channel
Threshold on
Diagnostic Interrupt Hardware interrupt
Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned
Monitoring of the load voltage
Yes
4-57
Digital Modules
Time, Frequency Internal preparation time between backplane bus and input of the output driver1) Up to hardware release 03
independent of enable diagnostics/diagnostic interrupt/ substitute value
max. 100 ms
Up to hardware release 04
without enable diagnostics/ diagnostic interrupt/ substitute value with enable diagnostics/ diagnostic interrupt/ substitute value overall runtime on the module (< 100 ms for resistive load)
max. 60 ms max. 100 ms
1) The switching time of the output driver is added to the
4-58
Digital Modules
4.17.1
Assigning Parameters to the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A
Parameters of the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

You will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings for the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A in the table below.
Table 4-14 Parameters of the SM 422; DO 3 x 24 VDC/0.5 A (6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0) Parameter Enable Diagnostic interrupt1) Value Range Default2) Parameter Type Dynamic Static Dynamic Scope
Yes/no 1 to 4 Substitute a value (SV) Keep last value (KLV)
No SV
Destination CPU for

interrupt Reaction to CPU-STOP Diagnostics Wire break No load voltage L+/sensor supply Short circuit to M Short circuit to L+ Substitute 1
1)
Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no
No no Static No No No Dynamic
Channel Channel group Channel Channel Channel
4-59
Digital Modules
4.17.2
Behavior of the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A
Effect of Operating Mode and Supply Voltage on the Output Values

The output values of the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A depend on the operating mode of the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module.
Table 4-15 Dependence of the Output Values on the Operating Mode of the CPU and on the Supply Voltage L+ of the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A CPU Operating Mode POWER ON RUN STOP Power Supply L+ to Digital Module L+ exists L+ missing L+ exists L+ missing POWER OFF L+ exists L+ missing Output Value of Digital Module CPU value 0 signal Substitute value/last value (0 signal preset) 0 signal 0 signal 0 signal
Behavior in the Event of Failure of the Supply Voltage

The failure of the supply voltage of the SM 422; DO 32 x 24VDC/0.5 A is always indicated by the EXTF LED on the module. Furthermore, this information is made available on the module (entry in diagnosis). Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment (see Section 4.17.1).
4-60
Digital Modules
4.18
Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/5 A; (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)
Characteristics
The SM 422; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/5 A has the following features: 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 1 Output current 5 A 120/230 VAC rated load voltage The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is not inserted.
4-61
Digital Modules
Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/5 A
Process
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 INFT EXTF 0 1L F100 1N
Module
1 2L F200 2N Data register and bus control Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01 LED control 2 3L F300 3N
3 4L F400 4N
4 5L F500 5N
5 6L F600 6N
6 7L F700 7N
7 8L F800 8N
Figure 4-15
4-62
Digital Modules
Technical Specifications of the SM 422; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/5 A

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 25 x 290 x 210 Approx. 800 g Data for Specific Module Number of outputs Length of cable 8 Output current Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage
At signal 1
At maximum current min. L1 (1.5 Vrms) At maximum current min. L1 (10.7 Vrms)
Unshielded Shielded
600 m 1000 m
At signal 1 Rated value Permitted range Permitted surge current (per group) 5A 10 mA to 5 A Max. 50 A per cycle Max. 3.5 mA
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L1 Permitted frequency range Total current of the outputs With fan subassembly Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Isolation Max. 16 A Max. 8 A 24 A 20 A 79 to 264 VAC 47 to 63 Hz
Not more than 1 AC scan cycle Not more than 1 AC scan cycle 10 mA Max. 55 V Max. size 5 to NEMA Max. 100 W
Yes
Minimum load current Zero cross inhibit voltage Size of the motor starter Lamp load Parallel connection of 2 outputs
Yes 1
Between the outputs of the different groups
500 VAC 4000 VAC
For redundant triggering of a load
Possible (only outputs connected to the same load) Possible
Triggering a digital input Max. 250 mA Max. 1.5 mA Typ. 16 W Switch rate
Max. 10 Hz Max. 0.5 Hz 1 Hz Fuse, 8 A, 250 V (per output) Min. 100 A Max. 100 ms Fuse, 8 A, quick-acting 194-1800-0 SP001.1013 217.008
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LED per channel None Parameters cannot be assigned
Short-circuit protection of the output Min. current required for fuse to blow Max. response time Wickmann Schurter Littelfuse
Replacement fuses
Group error display For internal fault For external fault Red LED (INTF) failed fuse Red LED (EXTF) failed load voltage
4-63
Digital Modules
Changing Fuses
4.19
Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/2 A; (6ES7422-1FH00-0AA0)
Characteristics
The SM 422; DO 1 x 120/230 VAC/2 A has the following features: 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 4 2 A output current 120/230 VAC rated load voltage The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is not inserted.
4-64
Digital Modules

Process
16 digital outputs (4 chassis grounds) Byte 0
Module
Byte 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
INTF EXTF 0 1 2 3 1L F1 1N 4 5 6 7 2L F2 2N 0 1 2 3 3L 3N 4 5 6 7 4L F4 4N LED control Data register and bus control
F3
Figure 4-16
4-65
Digital Modules
Technical Specifications of the SM 422; DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/2 A

Dimensions and Weight DimensionsW x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 25 x 290 x 210 Approx. 800 g Data for Specific Module Number of outputs Length of cable 16 600 m 1000 m Output current Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage
At signal 1
At maximum current min. L1 (1.3 Vrms) At minimum current min. L1 (18.1 Vrms)
Unshielded Shielded
At signal 1 Rated value Permitted range Permitted surge current (per group) 2A 10 mA to 2 A Max. 50 A per cycle Max. 2.6 mA
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L1 Permitted frequency range Total current of the outputs (per group) With fan subassembly Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Isolation Max. 4 A Max. 2 A Yes Yes 4 6A 5A 79 to 264 VAC 47 to 63 Hz
Output delay (for resistive load) From 0 to 1 At 1 to 0 Max. 1 ms Not more than 1 AC scan cycle 10 mA Non-zero cross outputs Max. size 5 to NEMA Max. 50 W
Minimum load current Zero cross inhibit voltage Size of the motor starter Lamp load Parallel connection of 2 outputs
500 VAC 4000 VAC
For redundant triggering of a load
Possible (only outputs connected to the same load) Possible
Triggering a digital input Max. 400 mA 1.5 mA Typ. 16 W Switch rate
For resistive load For inductive load, to IEC 947-5-1, AC 15 For lamp load
Max. 10 Hz Max. 0.5 Hz 1 Hz Fuse, 8 A, 250 V (per group) Min. 100 A Max. 100 ms Fuse, 8 A, quick-acting 194-1800-0 SP001.1013 217.008
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LED per channel None Parameters cannot be assigned
Short-circuit protection of the output Min. current required for fuse to blow Max. response time Wickmann Schurter Littelfuse
Replacement fuses
Group error display For internal fault For external fault Red LED (INTF) failed fuse Red LED (EXTF) failed load voltage
4-66
Digital Modules
Changing Fuses
4-67
Digital Modules
4.20
Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A; (6ES7422-5EH00-0AB0)
Characteristics
The SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A has the following features: 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 1 2 A output current Rated load voltage 20 VAC to 120 VAC Group error display for internal faults (INTF) and external faults (EXTF) Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable substitute value output
4-68
Digital Modules
Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A

Process 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 INTF EXTF 0 1L1 1 2L1 2 3L1 3 4L1
t
Module
Byte 0
Byte 1
0 9L1 1 10L1 2 11L1 3 12L1
Figure 4-17 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A
LED control
4 13L1 5 14L1 6 15L1 7 16L1
4 5L1 5 6L1 6 7L1 7 8L1
4-69
Digital Modules
Technical Specifications of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 25 x 290 x 210 Approx. 800 g Data for Specific Module Number of outputs Length of cable 16 Max. 600 m Max. 1000 m
Possible Yes, programmable
At signal 1
L1 (1.5 Vrms)
Output current At signal 1 Rated value Permitted range Permitted surge current (per group) 2A 100 mA to 2 A Max. 20 A/2 cycles Max. 2.5 mA at 30 V Max. 4.5 mA at 132 V
Unshielded Shielded
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ 20 to 132 VAC 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Permitted frequency range
Total current of the outputs With fan subassembly Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Isolation Max. 16 A Max. 7 A Yes Yes 1 120 VAC 250 VAC 1500 VDC Max. 600 mA Max. 0 mA Typ. 20 W 24 A 16 A
1 ms 1 AC cycle Non-zero cross outputs Max. size 5 to NEMA Max. 50 W
Zero cross inhibit voltage Size of the motor starter Lamp load Parallel connection of 2 outputs
Permitted potential difference Between Minternal and the outputs Between the outputs of the different groups
Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible
Max. 10 Hz Max. 0.5 Hz 1 Hz Fuse 8A/125 V 2AG (per output) Min. 40 A Typ. 33 ms Fuse, 8 A, quick-acting 225.008
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Green LED per channel
Short-circuit protection of the output Min. current required for fuse to blow Max. response time Littelfuse
Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned
Replacement fuses
Group error display For internal fault For external fault Red LED (INTF) Red LED (EXTF)
4-70
Digital Modules
Changing Fuses
4.20.1
Assigning Parameters to the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A
Parameters of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A

You will find an overview of the parameters you can set and their default settings for the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A in the following table.
Table 4-16 Parameters of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A Parameter Enable Diagnostic interrupt1) Value Range Default2) Parameter Type Dynamic Static Dynamic Scope
Yes/no 1 to 4 Substitute a value (SV) Keep last value (KLV) Yes/no Yes/no
No SV
Destination CPU for

interrupt Reaction to CPU STOP Diagnostics Fuse blown Enable substitute value 1
1)
No No
Static Dynamic
Channel Channel
4-71
Digital Modules
4.21
Relay Output Module SM 422; DO 16 x 30/230 VUC/Rel. 5 A; (6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0)
Characteristics
The SM 422; DO 16 x 30/230 VUC/Rel. 5 A has the following features: 16 outputs, isolated in 8 groups of 2 Output current 5 A Rated load voltage 230 VAC/ 125 VDC The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is not inserted.
4-72
Digital Modules
Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x 30/230 VUC/Rel. 5 A

Process
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Module
0 1 1L
4 5 3L
6 7 4L
0 1 5L
2 3 6L
4 5 7L
6 7 8L
Figure 4-18
Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x 30/230 VUC/Rel. 5 A
LED control
2 3 2L
4-73
Digital Modules
Technical Specifications of the SM 422; DO 16 x 30/230 VUC/Rel. 5 A

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 25 x 290 x 210 Approx. 700 g Data for Specific Module Number of outputs Length of cable 16 Max. 600 m Max. 1000 m 30 VDC 60 VDC 125 VDC 230 VAC 10 A 10 A 5.0 A 1.2 A 0.2 A 5.0 A Data for Selecting an Actuator Continuous thermal current Minimum load current External fuse for relay outputs Max. 5 A 10 mA Fuse, 6 A, quick-acting
Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts
For resistive load Voltage Current No. of switching cyc. (typ.) 0.18 mill 0.1 mill 0.1 mill 0.18 mill
Unshielded Shielded
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Total current of the outputs (per group) With fan subassembly Up to 40 oC Up to 60 oC Isolation Max. 10 A Max. 5 A Yes
For inductive load to IEC 947-5-1 13 DC/15 AC Voltage Current No. of switching cyc. (typ.) 0.1 mill 0.1 mill
30 VDC Yes 2 (t=7 ms max.) 230 VAC (pf=0.4) Size of the motor starter 500 VAC 4000 VAC Max. 1 A Typ. 4.5 W Lamp load Contact protection (internal)
5.0 A 5.0 A
Permitted potential differences:
Max. size 5 to NEMA Max. 60 W None
Connecting two outputs in parallel
For redundant actuation of a load To increase performance
Possible (only outputs with identical load voltage) Not possible Possible Max. 20 Hz Max. 10 Hz 1 Hz
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupt Diagnostic functions Green LED per channel None None Relay Features Relay response times
Mechanical For resistive load For inductive load to IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC/15 AC For lamp load
Power up Power down
Max. 10 ms Typ. 5.5 ms Max. 5 ms Typ. 3 ms Typ. 0.5 ms
1 Hz
Debouncing time
4-74
Digital Modules
Note Use a suppressor circuit in environments with high humidity and where sparks might occur at the relay contacts. This will increase the life of the relay contacts. To do this, connect an RC element or a varistor parallel to the relay contacts or to the load. The dimensions depend on the size of the load (see Chapter 4 of the installation manual).
4-75
Digital Modules
4-76
Analog Modules
Structure of the Chapter

The present chapter is broken down into the following subjects: 1. Overview containing the modules that are available here and a description 2. Information that is generally available in other words, affects all analog modules (such as parameter assignment and diagnostics) 3. Information that refers to specific modules (for example, characteristics, diagram of connections and block diagram, technical specifications and special characteristics of the module): a) For analog input modules b) For analog output modules
STEP 7 Blocks for Analog Functions

You can use blocks FC 105 and FC 106 to read and output analog values in STEP 7. You will find the FCs in the standard library of STEP 7 in the subdirectory called S5-S7 Converting Blocks (for a description refer to the STEP 7 online help system for the FCs).
Additional Information
Appendix A describes the structure of the parameter records (data records 0 and 1) in the system data. You must be familiar with this structure if you want to modify the parameters of the modules in the STEP 7 user program. Appendix B describes the structure of the diagnostic data (data records 0, 1) in the system data. You must be familiar with this structure if you want to evaluate the diagnostic data of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.
5-1
Analog Modules
Chapter Overview
Section 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.10 5.11 5.12 5.13 5.14 5.15 5.16 5.17 5.18 5.19 5.20 5.21 5.22 5.23 5.24 5.25 Module Overview Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Modules Analog Value Representation Setting the Measuring Method and Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Channels Behavior of the Analog Modules Conversion, Cycle, Setting and Response Time of Analog Modules Analog Module Parameter Assignment Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs Connecting Voltage Sensors Connecting Current Sensors Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors Connecting Thermocouples Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs Connecting Loads/Actuators to Voltage Outputs Connecting Loads/Actuators to Current Outputs Diagnostics of the Analog Modules Analog Module Interrupts Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit; (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0) Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit; (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0) Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit; (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0) Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit; (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0) Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit; (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0) Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit; (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0) Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit; (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0) Analog Output Module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit; (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0) Description Page 5-3 5-5 5-6 5-27 5-30 5-34 5-38 5-42 5-45 5-46 5-49 5-52 5-58 5-59 5-61 5-62 5-66 5-68 5-74 5-88 5-97 5-105 5-120 5-129 5-141
5-2
Analog Modules
5.1
Module Overview
Introduction
The following tables summarize the most important characteristics of the analog modules. This overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module for your task.
Table 5-1 Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance
Module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (-1KF00-) 8 AI U-/I measurem ent 4 AI for resistance measurement 13 bits Voltage Current Resistors SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (-1KF10-) 8 AI for U/I measurement 4 AI for resistance/ temperature measurement 14 bits Voltage Current Resistors Temperature Integrating SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (-1KF20-) 8 AI for U/I measurement 4 AI for resistance measurement 14 bits Voltage Current Resistors SM 431; AI 13 x 16 Bit (-0HH0-) 16 inputs SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (-7QH00-) 16 AI for U/ I/temperature measurement 8 AI for resistance measurement 16 bits Voltage Current Resistors Temperature Integrating SM 431; AI 8 x RTD 16 Bit (-7KF10-) 8 inputs SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (-7KF00-) 8 inputs
Characteristics Number of Inputs
Resolution Measuring Method
13 bits Voltage Current
16 bits Resistors
16 bits Voltage Current Temperature Integrating
Measuring Principle
Integrating
Instantaneous value encoding No No No No
Integrating
Integrating
Programmable Diagnostics Diagnostic Interrupt Limit value Monitoring Hardware Interrupt upon Limit Violation Hardware Interrupt at End of Cycle Potential Relationships Max. Permissible Common Mode Voltage
No No No No
No No No No
No No No No
Yes Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable
Yes Yes Adjustable Adjustable
Yes Yes Adjustable Adjustable
No
No
No
No
Adjustable
No
No
Analog section isolated from CPU Between the channels or between the reference potential of the connected sensors and MANA: 30 VAC Between the channels or between the channel and central ground point: 120 VAC Between the channels or between the reference potential of the connected sensors and MANA: 8 VAC
Nonisolated Between the channels or between the reference potential of the connected sensor and central ground point: 2 VDC/AC
Analog section isolated from CPU Between the channels or between the channel and central ground point: 120 VAC Between channel and central ground point: 120 VAC Between the channels or between the channel and central ground point: 120 VAC
5-3
Analog Modules
Table 5-1
Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance, continued

Module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (-1KF00-) No SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (-1KF10-) 24 VDC (only with current, 2-DMU) Suitable for temperature measurement Temperature sensor types can be configured Linearization of the sensor characteristic curves Smoothing of the measured values SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (-1KF20-) 24 VDC (only with current, 2-DMU) Rapid A/D change, suitable for highly dynamic processes Smoothing of the measured values SM 431; AI 13 x 16 Bit (-0HH0-) 24 VDC (only with current, 2-DMU) SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (-7QH00-) 24 VDC (only with current, 2-DMU) Suitable for temperature measurement Temperature sensor types can be configured Linearization of the sensor characteristic curves Smoothing of the measured values SM 431; AI 8 x RTD 16 Bit (-7KF10-) No SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (-7KF00-) No
Characteristics Ext. Power Supply Necessary
Special Features
Resistance thermometer can be configured Linearization of the sensor characteristic curves Smoothing of the measured values
Internal measuring resistor Field connection with internal reference temperature (included with the module) Smoothing of the measured values
2-DMU
Two-wire transmitter
Table 5-2
Analog Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance Module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (-1HF00-) 8 outputs 13 bits Channel by channel:
Characteristics Number of outputs Resolution Output type
Voltage Current
Programmable diagnostics Diagnostic Interrupt Substitute value output Potential relationships No No No Analog section isolated from:
CPU The load voltage

Max. permissible common mode voltage Special Features Between the channels and the channels against MANA 3 VDC
5-4
Analog Modules
5.2
Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Modules
Introduction
The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other to commission analog modules successfully. The sequence of steps is a suggestion, but you can perform individual steps either earlier or later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install other modules or install, commission etc. other modules in between times.
Sequence of Steps
Table 5-3 Step 1. 2. Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module Procedure Select the module Refer To... Section 5.1 and specific module section from Section 5.18
With some analog input modules: set Section 5.4 the measuring method and measuring range by means of the measuring range module Install the module in the SIMATIC S7 network Assign parameters to module Connect measuring sensor or loads to module Commission configuration Installation section in the manual S7-400 Programmable Controllers, Hardware and Installation Section 5.7 Sections 5.8 to 5.15 Commissioning section in the manual S7-400 Programmable Controllers, Hardware and Installation
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
If commissioning was not successful, Section 5.16 diagnose configuration
5-5
Analog Modules
5.3
Analog Value Representation
Introduction
This section describes the analog values for all the measuring ranges and output ranges which you can use with the analog modules.
Converting Analog Values

Analog input modules convert the analog process signal into digital form. Analog output modules convert the digital output value into an analog signal.
Analog Value Representation with 16-Bit Resolution

The digitized analog value is the same for both input and output values having the same nominal range. The analog values are represented as a fixed-point number in twos complement. The resulting assignment is as follows:
Bit Value of bits
15 215
14 214
13 213
12 212
11 211
10 210
9 29
8 28
7 27
6 26
5 25
4 24
3 23
2 22
1 21
0 20
Bit 15 Can Be Interpreted as a Sign

The sign of the analog value is always contained in bit number 15: 0 ) 1 *
Resolution Less than 16 Bits

If the resolution of an analog module has fewer than 16 bits, the analog value is stored left-justified on the module. The lower-order bit positions not used are padded with zeros (0).
5-6
Analog Modules
Example
In the following example you can see how the positions not padded with 0 are written for low resolution.
Table 5-4 Example: Bit Pattern of a 16-Bit and a 13-Bit Analog Value Analog Value 15 0 0 14 1 1 13 0 0 12 0 0 11 0 0 10 1 1 9 1 1 8 0 0 7 0 0 6 1 1 5 1 1 4 1 1 3 0 0 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
Resolution Bit 16-bit analog value 13-bit analog value
5.3.1
Analog Value Representation for Analog Input Channels
Introduction
The tables in this chapter contain the measured value representations for the various measuring ranges of the analog input modules. The values in the tables apply to all modules with the corresponding measuring ranges.
Notes for Readers of the Tables

Tables 5-6 to 5-8 contain the binary representation of the measured values. Since the binary representation of the measured values is always the same, starting at 5-9 these tables only contain the measured values and the units.
Measured-Value Resolution
The resolution of the analog values can differ depending on the analog module and its parameter assignment. With resolutions < 16 bit, the bits marked with x are set to 0. Note: This resolution doesnt apply to temperature values. The changed temperature values are the result of recalculation in the analog module (see Tables 5-16 to 5-30).
5-7
Analog Modules
Table 5-5
Possible Resolutions of the Analog Values Units Decimal 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Hexadecimal 80H 40H 20H 10H 8H 4H 2H 1H Analog Value High-Order Byte 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Low-Order Byte 1xxxxxxx 01xxxxxx 001xxxxx 0001xxxx 00001xxx 000001xx 0000001x 00000001
Resolution in Bits 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
5-8
Analog Modules
Binary Representation of the Input Ranges

The input ranges shown in Tables 5-6 to 5-8 are defined in twos complement representation:
Table 5-6 Units
Bipolar Input Ranges Measured Value in % u118.515 117.589 uw100.004 100.000 0.003617 0.000 0.003617 100.000 v100.004 117.593 v117.596 Data Word
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Range
32767 32511 27649 27648 1 0 1 27648 27649 32512 32768
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
Overflow Over range
Rated range
Under range Underflow
Table 5-7 Units
Unipolar Input Ranges Measured Value in % w118.515 117.589 w100.004 100.000 0.003617 0.000 0.003617 17.593 v17.596 Data Word
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Range
32767 32511 27649 27648 1 0 1 4864 32768
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
Overflow Overrange
Rated range
Underrange
Underflow
5-9
Analog Modules
Table 5-8 Units
Life-Zero Input Ranges Measured Value in % Data Word

215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Range
w32767 w118.515 32511 27649 27648 1 0 1 4864 117.589 w100.004 100.000 0.003617 0.000 0.003617 17.593
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0
Overflow Overrange Rated range
Underrange
In the event of wire break, the module reports 7FFFH
Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges

Table 5-9 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges 10 V to 1 V System Dec. 118.515% 32767 117.593% 32512 117.589% 32511 27649 100.000% 27648 75.000% 20736 0.003617% 1 0% 0 1 75.00% 20736 100.000% 27648 27649 117.593% 32512 117.596% 32513 118.519% 32768 Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF AF00 9400 93FF 8100 80FF 8000 11.851 V 5.926 V 2.963 V 1.185 V 11.759 V 5.879 V 2.940 V 1.176 V Underflow 7.5 V 10 V 3.75 V 5 V 1.875 V 2.5 V 0.75 V 1 V Underrange 10 V 7.5 V 361.7 mV 0V 5V 3.75 V 180.8 m V 0V 2.5 V 1.875 V 90.4 mV 0V 1V 0.75 V 36.17 mV 0V Rated range 11.759 V 5.879 V 2.940 V 1.176 V Overrange 10 V 11.851 V Voltage Measuring Range 5V 5.926 V 2.5 V 2.963 V 1V 1.185 V Overflow
5-10
Analog Modules
Table 5-10 Analog Value Representation in the Voltage Measuring Ranges 500 mV to 25 mV System Dec.
118.515% 117.593% 117.589% 32767 32512 32511 27649 100.000% 75% 0.003617% 0% 27648 20736 1 0 1 75.00% 100.000% 20736 27648 27649 117.593% 117.596% 118.519% 32512 32513 32768
Voltage Measuring Range Hex.

7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF AF00 9400 93FF 8100 80FF 8000 592.6 mV 296.3 mV 94.8 mV 59.3 mV 29.6 mV 587.9 mV 294.0 mV 94.1 mV 58.8 mV 29.4 mV Underflow 375 mV 500 mV 187.54 mV 250 mV 60 mV 80 mV 37.5 mV 50 mV 18.75 mV 25 mV Underrange 500 mV 375 mV 18.08 mV 0 mV 250 mV 187.54 mV 9.04 mV 0 mV 80 mV 60 mV 2.89 mV 0 mV 50 mV 37.5 mV 1.81 mV 0 mV 25 mV 18.75 mV 904.2 nV 0 mV Rated range 587.9 mV 294.0 mV 94.1 mV 58.8 mV 29.4 mV Overrange
500 mV
592.6 mV
250 mV
296.3 mV
80 mV
94.8 mV
50 mV
59.3 mV
25 mV
29.6 mV Overflow
Table 5-11 Analog Value Representation in the Voltage Measuring Ranges 1 to 5 V and 0 to 10 V System Dec. 118.515% 32767 117.593% 32512 117.589% 32511 27649 100.000% 27648 75% 20736 0.003617% 1 0% 0 1 17.593% 4864 4865 v17.596% 32768 Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF ED00 ECFF 8000 0.296 V Negative values not possible 5V 3.75 V 1 V + 144.7 mV 1V 10 V 7.5 V 0 V + 361.7 mV 0V Underrange Rated range 5.704 V 11.759 V Overrange 1 to 5 V 5.741 V Voltage Measuring Range 0 to 10 V 11.852 V Overflow
Underflow
5-11
Analog Modules
Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges

Table 5-12 Analog Value Representation in the Current Measuring Ranges 20 mA to 3.2 mA System Dec. 118.515% 117.593% 117.589% 32767 32512 32511 27649 100.000% 75% 0.003617% 0% 27648 20736 1 0 1 75% 100.000% 20736 27648 27649 117.593% 117.596% 118.519% 32512 32513 32768 Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF AF00 9400 93FF 8100 80FF 8000 23.70 mA 11.85 mA 5.93 mA 3.79 mA 23.52mA 11.76mA 5.88 mA 3.76 mA Underflow 15 mA 20 mA 7.5 mA 10 mA 3.75 mA 5 mA 2.4 mA 3.2 mA Underrange 20 mA 15 mA 723.4 nA 0 mA 10 mA 7.5 mA 361.7 nA 0 mA 5 mA 3.75 mA 180.8 nA 0 mA 3.2 mA 2.4 mA 115.7 nA 0 mA Rated range 23.52 mA 11.76 mA 5.88 mA 3.76 mA Overrange 20 mA 23.70 mA Current Measuring Range 10 mA 11.85 mA 5 mA 5.93 mA 3.2 mA 3.79 mA Overflow
Table 5-13 Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges 0 to 20 mA System Dec. 118.515% 32767 117.593% 32512 117.589% 32511 27649 100.000% 27648 75% 20736 0.003617% 1 0% 0 1 17.593% 4864 4865 v 17.596% 32768 Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF ED00 ECFF 8000 3.52 mA Underflow 20 mA 15 mA 723.4 nA 0 mA Underrange Rated range 23.52 mA Overrange 0 to 20 mA 23.70 mA Overflow Current Measuring Range
5-12
Analog Modules
Table 5-14 Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges 4 to 20 mA System Dec. 118.515% 32767 117.593% 32512 117.589% 32511 27649 100.000% 27648 75% 20736 0.003617% 1 0% 0 1 17.593% 4864 v 17.596% 32767 Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF ED00 1.185 mA Underflow 7FFF 20 mA 16 mA 4 mA + 578.7 nA 4 mA Underrange Rated range 22.81 mA Overrange 4 to 20 mA 22.96 mA Overflow Current Measuring Range
Analog Value Representation for Resistance-Type Sensors

Table 5-15 Analog Value Representation for Resistance-Type Sensors from 48 W to 6 kW System Dec. 118.515% 32767 117.593% 32512 117.589% 32511 27649 100.000% 27648 75% 20736 0.003617% 1 0% 0 Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 48 W 36 W 1.74mW 0W 150 W 112.5 W 5.43mW 0W 300 W 225W 0W 600 W 450 W 0W 6 kW 4.5 kW 0W Underrange Rated range 56.44W 176.38 W 352.77 W 705.53 W 7.06 kW Overrange 48 W 56.89 W Resistance-Type Sensor Range 150 W 177.77W 300 W 600 W 6 kW Overflow
355.54 W 711.09 W 7.11 kW
10.85mW 21.70mW 217.0mW
(negative values physically not possible)
5-13
Analog Modules
Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Pt x00 Standard

Table 5-16 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Pt 100, 200, 500,1000
Pt x00 Standard in 5C (1 Digit = 0.15C) > 1000.0 1000.0 : 850.1 850.0 : 200.0 200.1 : 243.0 < 243.0 Units Decimal 32767 10000 : 8501 8500 : 2000 2001 : 2430 32768 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 2710H : 2135H 2134H : F830H F82FH : F682H 8000H Pt x00 Standard in 5F (1 Digit = 0.1 5F) > 1832.0 1832.0 : 1562.1 1562.0 : 328.0 328.1 : 405.4 < 405.4 Units Decimal 32767 18320 : 15621 15620 : 3280 3281 : 4054 32768 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 4790H : 3D05H 3D04H : F330H F32FH : F02AH 8000H Pt x00 Standard in K (1 Digit = 0.1 K) > 1273.2 1273.2 : 1123.3 1123.2 : 73.2 73.1 : 30.2 < 30.2 Units Decimal 32767 12732 : 11233 11232 : 732 731 : 302 32768 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 31BCH : 2BE1H 2BE0H : 2DCH 2DBH : 12EH 8000H Underflow Underrange Rated range Overrange Range
Overflow
Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Pt x00 Climatic

Table 5-17 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Pt 100, 200, 500,1000
Pt x00 Climatic in 5C (1 Digit = 0.015C) > 155.00 155.00 : 130.01 130.00 : 120.00 120.01 : 145.00 < 145.00 Units Decimal 32767 15500 : 13001 13000 : 12000 12001 : 14500 32768 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 3C8CH : 32C9H 32C8H : D120H D11FH : C75CH 8000H Pt x00 Climatic in 5F (1 Digit = 0.01 5F) > 311.00 311.00 : 266.01 266.00 : 184.00 184.01 : 229.00 < 229.00 Units Decimal 32767 31100 : 26601 26600 : 18400 18401 : 22900 32768 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 797CH : 67E9H 67E8H : B820H B81FH : A68CH 8000H Underflow Underrange Rated range Overrange Overflow Range
5-14
Analog Modules
Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Ni x00 Standard

Table 5-18 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Ni100, 120, 200, 500, 1000
Ni x00 Standard in 5C (1 Digit = 0.15C) > 295.0 295.0 : 250.1 250.0 : 60.0 60.1 : 105.0 < 105.0 Units Decimal 32767 2950 : 2501 2500 : 600 601 : 1050 32768 Hexadecimal 7FFFH B86H : 9C5H 9C4H : FDA8H FDA7H : FBE6H 8000H Ni x00 Standard in 5F (1 Digit = 0.1 5F) > 563.0 563.0 : 482.1 482.0 : 76.0 76.1 : 157.0 < 157.0 Units Decimal 32767 5630 : 4821 4820 : 760 761 : 1570 32768 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 15FEH : 12D5H 12D4H : FD08H FD07H : F9DEH 8000H Ni x00 Standard in K (1 Digit = 0.1 K) > 568.2 568.2 : 523.3 523.2 : 213.2 213.1 : 168.2 < 168.2 Units Decimal 32767 5682 : 5233 5232 : 2132 2131 : 1682 32768 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 1632H : 1471H 1470H : 854H 853H : 692H 8000H Underflow Underrange Rated range Overrange Range
Overflow
Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Ni x00 Climatic

Table 5-19 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000
Ni x00 Climatic in 5C (1 Digit = 0.015C) > 295.00 295.00 : 250.01 250.00 : 60.00 60.01 : 105.00 < 105.00 Units Decimal 32767 29500 : 25001 25000 : 6000 6001 : 10500 32768 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 733CH : 61A9H 61A8H : E890H E88FH : D6FCH 8000H Ni x00 Climatic in 5F (1 Digit = 0.01 5F) > 325.11 327.66 : 280.01 280.00 : 76.00 76.01 : 157.00 < 157.00 Units Decimal 32767 32766 : 28001 28000 : 7600 7601 : 15700 32768 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 7FFEH : 6D61H 6D60H : E250H E24FH : C2ACH 8000H Underflow Underrange Rated range Overrange Overflow Range
5-15
Analog Modules
Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Cu 10 Standard

Table 5-20 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Cu 10
Cu 10 Standard in 5C (1 Digit = 0.015C) > 312.0 312.0 : 260.1 260.0 : 200.0 200.1 : 240.0 < 240.0 Units Decimal 32767 3120 : 2601 2600 : 2000 2001 : 2400 32768 Hexadecimal 7FFFH C30H : A29H A28H : F830H F82FH : F6A0H 8000H Cu 10 Standard in 5F (1 Digit = 0.01 5F) > 593.6 593.6 : 500.1 500.0 : 328.0 328.1 : 400.0 < 400.0 Units Decimal 32767 5936 : 5001 5000 : 3280 3281 : 4000 32768 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 1730H : 12D5H 1389H : F330H F32FH : F060H 8000H Cu 10 Standard in K (1 Digit = 0.01 K) > 585.2 585.2 : 533.3 533.2 : 73.2 73.1 : 33.2 < 33.2 Units Decimal 32767 5852 : 5333 5332 : 732 731 : 332 32768 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 16DCH : 14D5H 14D4H : 2DCH 2DBH : 14CH 8000H Underflow Underrange Rated range Overrange Range
Overflow
Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Cu 10 Climatic

Table 5-21 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Cu 10
Cu 10 Climatic in 5C (1 Digit = 0.015C) > 180.00 180.00 : 150.01 150.00 : 50.00 50.01 : 60.00 < 60.00 Units Decimal 32767 18000 : 15001 15000 : 5000 5001 : 6000 32768 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 4650H : 3A99H 3A98H : EC78H EC77H : E890H 8000H Cu 10 Climatic in 5F (1 Digit = 0.01 5F) > 325.11 327.66 : 280.01 280.00 : 58.00 58.01 : 76.00 < 76.00 Units Decimal 32767 32766 : 28001 28000 : 5800 5801 : 7600 32768 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 7FFEH : 6D61AH 6D60H : E958H E957H : E250H 8000H Underflow Underrange Rated range Overrange Overflow Range
5-16
Analog Modules
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type B

Table 5-22 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type B
Units Type B in 5C Decimal 32767 20700 : 18210 18200 : 0 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 50DCH : 4722H 4718H : 0000H : FB50H 8000H Type B in 5F Units Decimal 3276.6 32766 : 27866 27865 : 320 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 7FFEH : 6CDAH 6CD9H : FEC0H : F8D0H 8000H Type B in K Units Decimal 32767 23432 : 20942 20932 : 2732 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 5B88H : 51CEH 51C4H : 0AACH : 05FCH 8000H Underflow Underrange Rated range Overrange Range
> 2070.0 2070.0 : 1821.0 1820.0 : 0,0
> 3276.6 3276.6 : 2786.6 2786.5 : 32.0
> 2343.2 2343.2 : 2094.2 2093.2 : 273.2
Overflow
: 120.0 < 120.0
: 1200 32768
: 184.0 < 184.0
: 1840 32768
: 153.2 < 153.2
: 1532 32768
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type E

Table 5-23 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type E
Units Type E in 5C Decimal Hexadecimal 7FFFH 2EE0H : 2711H 2710H : F574H < F574H Type E in 5F Units Decimal Hexadecimal 7FFFH 55A0H : 47A2H 4790H : EE44H <EE44H Type E in K Units Decimal 32767 14732 : 12742 12732 : 0 <0 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 398CH : 31C6H 31BCH : 0000H <0000H Underflow Rated range Overrange Range
> 1200.0 1200.0 : 1000.1 1000.0 : 270.0 < 270.0
32767 12000 : 10001 10000 : 2700 < 2700
> 2192,0 2192.0 : 1833.8 1832.0 : 454.0 < 454.0
32767 21920 : 18338 18320 : 4540 < 4540
> 1473.2 1473.2 : 1274.2 1273.2 : 0 <0
Overflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (for example, polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative range (for example, incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module reports an underflow... ...if F0C4H is violated and outputs 8000H ...if FB70H is violated and outputs 8000H ...if E5D4H is violated and outputs 8000H
5-17
Analog Modules
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type J

Table 5-24 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type J
Units Type J in 5C > 1450.0 1450.0 : 1201.0 1200.0 : 210.0 < 210.0 Decimal 32767 14500 : 12010 12000 : 2100 < 2100 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 38A4H : 2EEAH 2EE0H : F7CCH <F7CCH Type J in 5F > 2642.0 2642.0 : 2193.8 2192.0 : 346.0 < 346.0 Units Decimal 32767 26420 : 21938 21920 : 3460 < 3460 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 6734H : 55B2H 55A0H : F27CH <F27CH Type J in K > 1723.2 1723.2 : 1474.2 1473.2 : 63.2 < 63.2 Units Decimal 32767 17232 : 14742 14732 : 632 < 632 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 4350H : 3996H 398CH : 0278H < 0278H Underflow Rated range Overrange Range Overflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (for example, polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative range (for example incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module reports an underflow... ...if F31CH is violated and outputs 8000H ...if EA0CH is violated and outputs 8000H ...if FDC8H is violated and outputs 8000H
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type K

Table 5-25 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type K
Units Type K in 5C > 1622.0 1622.0 : 1373.0 1372.0 : 270.0 < 270.0 Decimal 32767 16220 : 13730 13720 : 2700 < 2700 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 3F5CH : 35A2H 3598H : F574H < F574H Type K in 5F > 2951.6 2951.6 : 2503.4 2501.6 : 454.0 < 454.0 Units Decimal 32767 29516 : 25034 25061 : 4540 < 4540 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 734CH : 61CAH 61B8H : EE44H <EE44H Type K in K > 1895.2 1895.2 : 1646.2 1645.2 : 0 <0 Units Decimal 32767 18952 : 16462 16452 : 0 <0 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 4A08H : 404EH 4044H : 0000H < 0000H Underflow Rated range Overrange Range Overflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (for example, polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative range (for example, incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module reports an underflow... ...if F0C4H is violated and outputs 8000H ...if E5D4H is violated and outputs 8000H ...if FB70H is violated and outputs 8000H
5-18
Analog Modules
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type L

Table 5-26 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type L
Units Type L in 5C Decimal Hexadecimal 7FFFH 2CECH : 2332H 2328H : F830H < F830H Type L in 5F Units Decimal Hexadecimal 7FFFH 521CH : 409AH 4088H : F330H <F330H Type L in K Units Decimal 32767 14232 : 11742 11732 : 732 < 732 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 3798H : 2DDEH 2DD4H : 02DCH <02DCH Underflow Rated range Overrange Range
> 1150.0 1150.0 : 901.0 900.0 : 200.0 < 200.0
32767 11500 : 9010 9000 : 2000 < 2000
> 2102.0 2102.0 : 1653.8 1652.0 : 328.0 < 328.0
32767 21020 : 16538 16520 : 3280 < 3280
> 1423.2 1423.2 : 1174.2 1173.2 : 73.2 < 73.2
Overflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (for example, polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative range (for example, incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module reports an underflow... ...if F380H is violated and outputs 8000H ...if EAC0H is violated and outputs 8000H ...if FE2CH is violated and outputs 8000H
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type N

Table 5-27 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type N
Units Type N in 5C > 1550.0 1550.0 : 1300.1 1300.0 : 270.0 < 270.0 Decimal 32767 15500 : 13001 13000 : 2700 < 2700 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 3C8CH : 32C9H 32C8H : F574H < F574H Type N in 5F > 2822.0 2822.0 : 2373.8 2372.0 : 454.0 < 454.0 Units Decimal 32767 28220 : 23738 23720 : 4540 < 4540 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 6E3CH : 5CBAH 5CA8H : EE44H <EE44H Type N in K > 1823.2 1823.2 : 1574.2 1573.2 : 0 <0 Units Decimal 32767 18232 : 15742 15732 : 0 <0 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 4738H : 3D7EH 3D74H : 0000H < 0000H Underflow Rated range Range Overflow Overrang e
5-19
Analog Modules
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Types R, S

Table 5-28 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Types R, S
Units Types R, S in 5C Decimal 32767 20190 : 17770 17690 : 500 510 : 1700 32768 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 4EDEH : 4524H 451AH : FE0CH FE02H : F95CH 8000H Types R, S in 5F > 3276.6 3276.6 : 3218.0 3216.2 : 58.0 59.8 : 274.0 < 274.0 Units Decimal 32767 32766 : 32180 32162 : 580 598 : 2740 32768 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 7FFEH : 7DB4H 7DA2H : FDBCH FDAAH : F54CH 8000H Types R, S in K > 2292.2 2292.2 : 2043.2 2042.2 : 223.2 222.2 : 103.2 < 103-2 Units Decimal 32767 22922 : 20432 20422 : 2232 2222 : 1032 < 1032 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 598AH : 4FD0H 4FC6H : 08B8H 08AEH : 0408H 8000H Underflow Underrange Rated range Overrange Range
> 2019.0 2019.0 : 1770.0 1769.0 : 50.0 51.0 : 170.0 < 170.0
Overflow
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type T

Table 5-29 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type T
Units Type T in 5C Decimal Hexadecimal 7FFFH 1518H : 0FAAH 0FA0H : F574H H 752.0 : 454.0 < 454.0 7520 : 4540 < 4540 1D60H : EE44H <EE44H 673.2 : 3.2 < 3.2 6732 : 32 < 32 1AACH : 0020H < 0020H Underflow Rated range Type T in 5F Units Decimal Hexadecimal 7FFFH 2738H Type T in K Units Decimal 32767 8132 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 1FC4H Overrange Range
> 540.0 540.0 : 401.0 400.0 : 270.0 < 270.0
32767 5400 : 4010 4000 : 2700 < 2700
> 1004.0 1004.0
32767 10040
> 813.2 813.2
Overflow
5-20
Analog Modules
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type U

Table 5-30 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type U
Units Type U in 5C Decimal Hexadecimal 7FFFH 2134H : 177AH 1770H : F830H H Type U in 5F Units Decimal Hexadecimal 7FFFH 2738.0
H
Units Type U in K Decimal 32767 11232 : 8742 8732 : 732 < 732 Hexadecimal 7FFFH 2BE0H : 2226H 221CH : 02DCH <02DCH Underflow Rated range Overrange Range
> 850.0 850.0 : 601.0 600.0 : 200.0 < 200.0
32767 8500 : 6010 6000 W : 2000 < 2000
> 1562.0 1562.0 : 1113.8 1112.0 : 328.0 < 328.0
32767 15620 : 11138 11120 : 3280 < 3280
> 1123.2 1123.2 : 874.2 873.2 : 73.2 < 73.2
Overflow
: 2B82H 2B70H : F330H H
In the case of incorrect wiring (for example, polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative range (for example, incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module reports an underflow... ...if F380H is violated and outputs 8000H ...if EAC0H is violated and outputs 8000H ...if FE2CH is violated and outputs 8000H
5-21
Analog Modules
5.3.2
Analog Value Representation for Analog Output Channels
Introduction
The tables in this chapter contain the analog value representation for output channels of the analog output modules. The values in the tables apply to all modules with the corresponding output ranges.
Notes on How to Read the Tables

Tables 5-31 to 5-33 contain the binary representation of the output values. Since the binary representation of the output values is always the same, starting at 5-34 these tables only contain the output ranges and the units.
Binary Representation of the Output Ranges

The output ranges shown in Tables 5-31 to 5-33 are defined in twos complement representation:
Table 5-31 Bipolar Output Ranges Units Output Value in % Data Word
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Range
w32512 0% 32511 117.589 27649 w100.004 27648 100.000 1 0.003617 0 0.000
0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 x
x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 x
x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 x
x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 x
x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 x
x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 x
x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 x
x 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 x
Overflow Overrange
1 0.003617 1 27648 100.000 27649 v100.004 32512 117.593 v32513 0% 1 1 1 1
Rated range
Under range Underflow
5-22
Analog Modules
Table 5-32 Unipolar Output Ranges Units Output Value in % Data Word
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Range
w32512 0% 32511 117.589 27649 w100.004 27648 100.000 1 0.003617 0 0.000 1 0.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 1
1 1 1 1 0 0 1
1 1 1 1 0 0 1
1 1 0 0 0 0 1
1 1 1 1 0 0 1
1 1 1 1 0 0 1
1 1 0 0 0 0 1
1 0 0 0 0 0 1
x 1 0 0 0 0 1
x 1 0 0 0 0 1
x 1 0 0 0 0 1
x 1 0 0 0 0 1
x 1 0 0 0 0 1
x 1 0 0 0 0 1
x 1 0 0 0 0 1
x 1 1 0 1 0 1
Overflow Overrange
Rated range
32512
Limited to rated range lower limit of 0 V and 0 mA Underflow
v32513 0%
5-23
Analog Modules
Table 5-33 Life-Zero Output Ranges Units Output Value in % Data Word
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Range
w 32512 0 % 32511 117.589 27649 w100.004 27648 100.000 1 0.003617 0 0.000 1 0.003617 6912 25.000 6913
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
x 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Overflow Overrange Rated range
Underrange Limited to overrange lower limit 0V and 0 mA Underflow
25.000 32512 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
v32513 25%
5-24
Analog Modules
Analog Value Representation in Voltage Output Ranges

Table 5-34 Analog Value Representation in Output Range # V 10 System Dec. 118.5149% 32767 32512 117.589% 32511 27649 100% 27648 75% 20736 0.003617% 1 0% 0 1 75% 20736 100% 27648 27649 117.593% 32512 32513 118.519% 32768 Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF AF00 9400 93FF 8100 80FF 8000 11.76 V Underflow, off circuit and deenergized 0.00 V 10 V 7.5 V 361.7 V 0V 361.7 V 7.5 V 10 V Underrange Rated range 11.76 V Overrange # V 10 0.00 V Overflow, off circuit and deenergized Voltage Output Range
Table 5-35 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 to 10 V and 1 to 5 V System Dec. 118.5149% 32767 32512 117.589% 32511 27649 100% 27648 75% 20736 0.003617% 1 0% 0 1 25% 6912 6913 117.593% 32512 32513 118.519% 32768 Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF E500 E4FF 8100 80FF 8000 0.00 V 0.00 V 0V Not possible. The output value is limited to 0 V. Underflow, off circuit and deenergized 11.76 V 10 V 7.5 V 361.7V 0V 5.70 V 5V 3.75 V 1V+144.7V Rated range 1V Underrange 0 to 10 V 0.00 V Voltage Output Range 1 to 5 V 0.00 V Overflow, off circuit and deenergized Overrange
5-25
Analog Modules
Analog Value Representation in Current Output Ranges

Table 5-36 Analog Value Representation in Output Range # mA 20 System Dec. 118.5149% 32767 32512 117.589% 32511 27649 100% 27648 75% 20736 0.003617% 1 0% 0 1 75% 20736 100% 27648 27649 117.593% 32512 32513 118.519% 32768 Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF AF00 9400 93FF 8100 80FF 8000 0.00 mA 23.52 mA Underflow, off circuit and deenergized 20 mA 15 mA 723.4 nA 0 mA 723.4 mA 15 mA 20 mA Underrange Rated range 23.52 mA Overrange 20 mA 0.00 mA Overflow, off circuit and deenergized Current Output Range
Table 5-37 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 and 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA System Dec. 118.5149% 32767 32512 117.589% 32511 27649 100% 27648 75% 20736 0.003617% 1 0% 0 1 25% 6912 6913 117.593% 32512 32513 118.519% 32768 Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF E500 E4FF 8100 80FF 8000 0.00 mA 0.00 mA 0 mA Not possible. The output value is limited to 0 mA. Underflow, off circuit and deenergized 20 mA 15 mA 723.4 nA 0 mA 20 mA 15 mA 4mA+578.7 nA 4 mA Underrange Rated range 23.52 mA 22.81 mA 0 to 20 mA 0.00 mA Current Output Range 4 to 20 mA: 0.00 mA Overflow, off circuit and deenergized Overrange
5-26
Analog Modules
5.4
Setting the Measuring Method and Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Channels
Two Procedures
There are two procedures for setting the measuring method and the measuring ranges of the analog input channels of the analog modules: With a measuring range module and STEP 7 By wiring the analog input channel and STEP 7 Which of these two methods is used for the individual analog modules depends on the module and is described in detail in the specific module sections. The procedure for setting the measuring method and measuring range of the module in STEP 7 is described in Section 5.7. The following section describes how you set the measuring method and the measuring range by means of measuring range modules.
Setting the Measuring Method and the Measuring Ranges with Measuring Range Modules
If the analog modules have measuring range modules, they are supplied with the measuring range modules plugged in. If necessary, the measuring range modules must be replugged to change the measuring method and the measuring range.
Attention Make sure that the measuring range modules are on the side of the analog input module. Before installing the analog input module, therefore, check whether the measuring range modules have to be set to another measuring method and another measuring range.
Possible Settings for the Measuring Range Modules

The measuring range modules can be set to the following positions: A, B, C and D. Which measuring range module positions you must select for the individual measuring methods and measuring ranges is described in detail in the specific module section. The settings for the various types of measurement and measuring ranges are also printed on the analog module.
5-27
Analog Modules
Replugging Measuring Range Modules

If you want to replug a measuring range module, perform the following steps: 1. Use a screwdriver to ease the measuring range module out of the analog input module.
Figure 5-1
Levering the Measuring Range Module out of the Analog Input Module
5-28
Analog Modules
2. Insert the measuring range module (correctly positioned (1) into the analog input module. The measuring range selected is the one that points to marker point on module (2).
Figure 5-2
Inserting the Measuring Range Module into the Analog Input Module
Perform the same steps for all other measuring range modules. The next step is to install the module. Caution This can result in damage. If you have not set the measuring range modules correctly, the module may be destroyed. Make sure that the measuring range module is in the correct position before connecting a sensor to the module.
5-29
Analog Modules
5.5
Behavior of the Analog Modules
Introduction
In this section, you will find information on: How the analog input and output values depend on the operating modes of the CPU and the supply voltage of the analog module The behavior of the analog modules depending on where the analog values lie within the value range The effect of errors on analog modules with diagnostics capability The effect of the operational limit of the analog module on the analog input and output value, as illustrated by an example
5.5.1
Effect of Supply Voltage and Operating Mode

The input and output values of the analog modules depend on the operating mode of the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module.
Table 5-38 Dependencies of the Analog Input/Output Values on the Operating Mode of the CPU and the Supply Voltage L+ CPU Operating Mode POWER RUN ON Supply Voltage L+ at Analog Module L+ present Output Value of the Analog Output Module CPU values Until the first conversion... Input Value of the Analog Input Module* Measured value 7FFFH until the first conversion following power-up or after parameter assignment of the module has been completed
after power-up has been

completed, a signal of 0 mA or 0 V is output.
after parameter
assignment has been completed, the previous value is output. L+ missing POWER STOP ON L+ present 0 mA/0 V Substitute value/last value (default values: 0 mA/0 V)
Measured value 7FFFH until the first conversion following power-up or after parameter assignment of the module has been completed
L+ missing
0 mA/0 V
POWER OFF *
L+ present L+ missing L+ only required with 2-wire transmitters
0 mA/0 V 0 mA/0 V
5-30
Analog Modules
Behavior on Failure of the Supply Voltage

Failure of the load power supply L+ of the diagnostics-capable analog module is indicated in the case of configured two-wire transmitters by the EXTF LED on the module. Furthermore, this information is made available on the module (entry in diagnostic buffer). Triggering of a diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment (see Section 5.7).
5.5.2
Effect of Range of Values of the Analog Values
Effect of Errors on Analog Modules with Diagnostics Capability

Any errors that occur can lead to a diagnostics entry and a diagnostic interrupt with analog modules with diagnostics capability and corresponding parameter assignment. You will find the errors that might be involved in Section 5.16.
Effect of Range of Values on the Analog Input Module

The behavior of the analog modules depends on where the input values lie within the range of values.
Table 5-39 Behavior of the Analog Input Modules as a Function of the Position of the Analog Value Within the Range of Values Measured Value In Rated range Overrange/ underrange Overflow Underflow Beyond the programmed limit
1)
Input Value Measured value Measured value 7FFFH 8000H Measured value
LED (EXTF) Flashes1) Flashes1)
Diagnostics Entered1) Entered1)
Interrupt Diagnostic interrupt1) Diagnostic interrupt1) Hardware interrupt1)
Only for modules with diagnostics capability and depending on parameter assignment
5-31
Analog Modules
Effect of Range of Values on the Analog Output Module

The behavior of the analog modules depends on where the output values lie within the value range.
Table 5-40 Behavior of the Analog Output Modules as a Function of the Position of the Analog Value Within the Range of Values Process Value Lies Within Rated range Overrange/und errange Overflow Underflow Output Value CPU value CPU value 0 signal 0 signal LED (EXTF) Diagnostics Interrupt
5.5.3
Effect of Operational Limit and Basic Error Limit
Operational Limit
The operational limit is the measuring error or output error of the analog module over the entire temperature range authorized for the module, referred to the rated range of the module.
Basic Error Limit

The basic error limit is the operational limit at 25C, referred to the rated range of the module.
Note The percentage details of operational and basic error limits in the technical specifications of the module always refer to the highest possible input and output value in the rated range of the module. In the measurement range " 10 V this would be the 10 V
5-32
Analog Modules
Example of Determination of the Output Error of a Module

An analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit is being used for voltage output. The output range "10 V is used. The module is operating at an ambient temperature of 30C. The operational limit thus applies. The technical specifications of the module state: Operational limit for voltage output: "0.5% An output error, therefore, of "0.05 V ("0.5% of 10 V) over the whole rated range of the module must be expected. This means that with an actual voltage of, say, 1 V, a value in the range from 0.95 V to 1.05 V is output by the module. The relative error is "5% in this case. The figure below shows for the example how the relative error becomes increasingly less the more the output value approximates to the end of the rated range of 10 V.
"0.05 V ( "5%) "0.05 V ( "0.625%) "0.05 V ( "0.5%*) Output Value 10 V * Operational limit
1 V Figure 5-3
0V 1V
8V
Example of the Relative Error of an Analog Output Module
5-33
Analog Modules
5.6
Conversion, Cycle, Setting and Response Time of Analog Modules
Conversion Time of Analog Input Channels

The conversion time consists of a basic conversion time and additional processing times of the module for: Resistance test Wire-break monitoring The basic conversion time depends directly on the conversion method of the analog input channel (integrating method, instantaneous value conversion). In the case of integrating conversion methods, the integration time has a direct influence on the conversion time. The integration time depends on the interference frequency suppression that you set in STEP 7 (refer to Section 5.7). To find out the basic conversion times and additional processing times of the different analog modules, refer to the technical specifications of the module concerned, starting at Section 5.18.
Scan Time of Analog Input Channels

Analog-to-digital conversion and the transfer of the digitized measured values to the memory and/or to the bus backplane are performed sequentially in other words, the analog input channels are converted one after the other. The scan time in other words, the time elapsing until an analog input value is again converted, is the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog input channels of the analog input module. The following figure illustrates the components of the scan time for an n-channel analog module.
Conversion time, channel 1 Conversion time, channel 2
Cycle time
Conversion time, channel n
Figure 5-4
Scan Time of an Analog Input or Output Module
5-34
Analog Modules
Basic Execution Time of the Analog Input Channels

The basic execution time corresponds to the cycle time for all the enabled channels.
Setting the Smoothing of Analog Values

You can set the smoothing of the analog values in STEP 7 for some analog input modules.
Using Smoothing
Smoothing of analog values ensures a stable analog signal for further processing. It makes sense to smooth the analog values with slow variations of measured values for example, with temperature measurements.
Smoothing Principle
The measured values are smoothed by digital filtering. Smoothing is accomplished by the module calculating average values from a defined number of converted (digitized) analog values. The user assigns parameters to smoothing at not more than four levels (none, low, average, high). The level determines the number of analog signals used for averaging. The higher the smoothing level chosen, the more stable is the smoothed analog value and the longer it takes until the smoothed analog signal is applied after a step response (refer to the following example).
5-35
Analog Modules
Example
The following figure shows the number of module cycles for a step response after which the smoothed analog value is approximately 100% applied, as a function of the smoothing that has been set. The figure applies to every change of signal at the analog input.
Signal variation in percent 100
Step response for any analog input signal
63 50
0 Smoothing: low: average: high:
50
100
150
200 Module cycles
Figure 5-5
Example of the Influence of Smoothing on the Step Response
Additional Information on Smoothing

Refer to the specific section on the analog input module (from Section 5.18) to determine whether smoothing can be set for the specific module and for any special features that have to be taken into account.
Conversion Time of the Analog Output Channels

The conversion time of the analog output channels comprises the transfer of the digitized output values from the internal memory and the digital-to-analog conversion.
Scan Time of Analog Output Channels

The analog output channels are converted sequentially in other words, the analog output channels are converted one after the other. The scan time in other words, the time elapsing until an analog output value is again converted is the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog output channels (refer to 5-4).
5-36
Analog Modules
Basic Execution Time of the Analog Output Channels

The basic execution time corresponds to the cycle time for all the enabled channels.
Tip
You should disable any analog channels that are not being used to reduce the scan time in STEP 7.
Overview of the Settling Time and Response Time of the Analog Output Modules
tA tE tZ t1 tA = response time tZ = cycle time corresponds to n tE = settling time t1 = new output value is present t2 = output value transferred and converted t3 = specified output value reached Figure 5-6 Settling and Response Times of the Analog Output Channels conversion time (n = activated channels) t2 t3
Settling Time
The settling time (t2 to t3) in other words, the time elapsing from application the converted value until the specified value is reached at the analog output is load-dependent. A distinction is made between resistive, capacitive and inductive loads. For the settling times of the different analog output modules as a function of load refer to the technical specifications of the module concerned, starting at Section 5.18.
Response Time
The response time (t1 to t3) in other words, the time elapsing from application of the digital output values in the internal memory until the specified value is reached at the analog output in a worst case scenario is the sum of the scan time and the settling time. You have a worst case situation if, shortly prior to the transfer of a new output value, the analog channel has been converted and is not converted again until all other channels are converted (cycle time).
5-37
Analog Modules
5.7
Analog Module Parameter Assignment
Introduction
Analog modules can have different characteristics. You can set the characteristics of the modules by means of parameter assignment.
Tools for Parameter Assignment

You assign parameters to analog modules with STEP 7. When you have set all the parameters, download the parameters from the programming device to the CPU. When there is a transition from STOP to RUN mode, the CPU transfers the parameters to the individual analog modules. In addition, if necessary you must place the measuring range modules of the module in the necessary position (refer to Section 5.4).
Static and Dynamic Parameters

The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters. Set the static parameters in STOP mode of the CPU, as described above. You can similarly modify the dynamic parameters in the current user program by means of SFCs. Note, however, that after a change from RUN STOP, STOP RUN of the CPU, the parameters set in STEP 7 apply again. You will find a description of the parameter assignment of modules in the user program in Appendix A.
Configuration in RUN (CiR)

You can use this method to modify the system or the configuraion of specific modules while the system is in RUN. That is, the CPU stays in RUN upt o a maximum period of 2.5 seconds. For further information on this topic, refer to the Configuration in RUN by means of CiR manual. This manual is included in PDF format on the STEP 7 CD.
5-38
Analog Modules
5.7.1
Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

The analog input modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values listed in the table below, depending on the functionality. Refer to the section on the module concerned, starting from Section 5.18, to find out which subset the module is capable of using. The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in STEP 7.
Table 5-41 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules Parameter Enable Diagnostic interrupt1) Value Range Default2) Parameter Type Scope
Hardware interrupt1) Destination CPU for

interrupt Trigger for hardware interrupt
No No
Dynamic
Module
Static
Module
End of scan cycle

reached at input
Yes/no Constraint possible due to measuring range
No
Static
Channel
High limit Low limit

Diagnostics Wire break Reference channel error Underflow Overflow Short circuit to M
32511 to 32512 32512 to 32511
Dynamic
Channel
No No No No No
Static
Channel
5-39
Analog Modules
Table 5-41 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules, continued Parameter Measurement Measuring type Value Range Default2) Parameter Type Scope
Disabled U Voltage 4DMU Current (four-wire transmitter) 2DMU Current (two-wire transmitter) R-4L Resistance (four-conductor connection) R-3L Resistance three-conductor connection RTD-4L Thermal resistor (linear, four-conductor connection) RTD-3L Thermal resistor (linear, three-conductor connection) TC-L Thermocouple (linear) For the settable measuring ranges of the input channels, please refer to the individual module description. 273.15 to 327.67 oC Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit; Kelvins Platinum (Pt) 0.00385 W/W/C 0.003916 W/W/C 0.003902 W/W/C 0.003920 W/W/C Nickel (Ni) 0.00618 W/W/C 0.00672 W/W/C 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz; none
Static
Channel
Measuring range Reference

temperature
"10 V
0 oC Degrees Celsius 0.00385
Dynamic Static
Module Module
Temperature unit Temperature

coefficient for temperature measurement with thermal resistor (RTD)
Static 50 or 60 Hz None
Channel
Interference
frequency suppression
Smoothing
None Low Average High None Internal RTD on channel 0 Reference temperature value dynamic
Reference junction
None
1)
If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER-1/ER-2. 2) Only in the CC (central controller) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings.
5-40
Analog Modules
5.7.2
Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

The analog output modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values listed in the table below, depending on the functionality. Refer to the section on the module concerned, starting from Section 5.18, to find out which subset the module is capable of using. The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in STEP 7.
Table 5-42 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules Parameter Output Type of output Value Range Default1) Parameter Type Scope
Disabled Voltage Current
U Static Channel
Output range
For the settable measuring ranges of the "10 V output channels, please refer to the individual module description.
1)
Only in the CC (central controller) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings.
5-41
Analog Modules
5.8
Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs
Introduction
You can connect different sensors to the analog input modules depending on the measuring method; voltage and current sensors, and resistors. This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the connection options for sensors described in the sections that follow.
Cables for Analog Signals

To reduce electrical interference, you should use twisted-pair shielded cables for the analog signals. The shield of the analog signal cables should be grounded at both cable ends. If there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding current can flow over the shield, which leads to an interference of the analog signals. In such a case, you should ground the shield at one end of the cable only.
Non-Isolated Analog Input Modules

In the case of the non-isolated analog input modules there is an electrical connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground. You use non-isolated analog modules if there are few or no potential differences between the measuring sensors and chassis ground.
Isolated Analog Input Modules

With the isolated analog input modules there is no electrical connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground. You use isolated analog input modules if a potential difference UISO can occur between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground. By means of an equipotential bonding conductor between the MANA terminal and chassis ground, make sure that UISO does not exceed the permitted value.
Limited Potential Difference UCM

Only a limited potential difference UCM (common mode voltage) may occur amongst the M measuring lines of the input channels and between the leads and the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA. In order to prevent the permissible value from being exceeded, you must take different actions, described below, depending on the potential connection of the sensors.
5-42
Analog Modules
Abbreviations and Mnemonics Used in the Figures Below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings: M +: M : MANA: UCM: UISO: Measuring line (positive) Measuring line (negative) Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit Potential difference between inputs and reference potential of the MANA measuring circuit Potential difference between MANA and chassis ground
Connection of Isolated Measuring Sensors

The isolated sensors are not connected with the local ground potential (local ground). They can be operated free of potential. With isolated sensors, potential differences might arise between the different sensors. These potential differences can arise as a result of interference or the local distribution of the sensors. To ensure that the permissible value for UCM is not exceeded during use in heavily EMC-affected environments, connect M to MANA in modules with an MANA connection.
M+ M Isolated sensors Connection required for modules with MANA M+ M
MANA UISO Chassis ground
Figure 5-7
Connecting Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI
Note Do not connect M to MANA when connecting two-wire transmitters for current measurement and when connecting resistance-type sensors. This also applies to inputs which are not used.
Non-Isolated Sensors
The non-isolated sensors are connected with the local ground potential (local ground). When using non-isolated sensors, you must connect MANA to chassis ground.
5-43
Analog Modules
Connecting Non-Isolated Sensors

Caused by local conditions or interference, potential differences UCM (static or dynamic) can occur between the locally distributed individual measuring points. If the potential difference UCM exceeds the permissible value, you must provide equipotential bonding conductors between the measuring points.
Non-isolated sensors
M+ M M+ M
UCM
MANA Equipotential bonding conductor UISO Chassis ground Figure 5-8 Connecting Non-Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI
Note Do not use non-isolated two-wire transmitters and non-isolated resistance sensors!
5-44
Analog Modules
5.9
Connecting Voltage Sensors
Note The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below. In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 5.8 with its generally applicable information on connecting sensors.
Abbreviations and Mnemonics Used in the Figure Below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figure below have the following meanings: M +: M: MANA: Measuring line (positive) Measuring line (negative) Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
Connection of Voltage Sensors
+ +
U U
M+ M M+ M
MANA*
* Connection required in the case of modules with MANA Figure 5-9 Connecting Voltage Sensors to an AI
5-45
Analog Modules
5.10
Connecting Current Sensors
Note The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below. In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 5.8 with its generally applicable information for connecting sensors.

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings: M +: M : MANA: M: L +: UH: MI+: MV+: Measuring line (positive) Measuring line (negative) Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit Ground terminal Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage Auxiliary supply Current measuring line (positive) Voltage measuring line (positive)
Supply Voltage of the Sensors

The two-wire transmitter receives its short-circuit-proof power supply via the terminals of the analog input module. This transmitter then converts the measured variable into a current. Because the two-wire transmitter is supplied by the module, you must not ground the M cables. Four-wire transmitters require a separate supply voltage UH (auxiliary supply).
5-46
Analog Modules
Connecting Two-Wire Transmitters

+24 V
Sensor, for example, pressure gauge P P
Two-wire
transmitter
L+
Two-wire
transmitter
+ +
M+ MM+ M-
MANA M
* Connection required in the case of modules with MANA Figure 5-10 Connecting Two-Wire Transmitters to an Isolated AI
SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit: Connecting Two-Wire Transmitters

Because the supply voltage for the two-wire transmitters is not fed by the SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit, you must supply the sensors separately with 24 V.
+24 V
Sensor, for example, pressure gauge P P
Two-wire
transmitter
Two-wire
transmitter
+ +
MV+ MI+ MI+ M MV+ MI+ MI+ M
MANA
Figure 5-11
Connecting Two-Wire Transmitters to an SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit
5-47
Analog Modules
Connecting Four-Wire Transmitters
Sensor, for example, pressure gauge
P P Four-wire transmitter
+ +
M+ M M+ M
UH
* *
MANA
* Connection required in the case of modules with MANA Figure 5-12 Connecting Four-Wire Transmitters to an AI
SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit: Connecting Four-Wire Transmitters

To ensure that the permissible value for UCM is not exceeded, you must connect the M cables to MANA.
Sensor, for example, pressure gauge P P Four-wire transmitter
+ +
MV+ MI+ MI+ M MV+ MI+ MI+ M
UH
M
Figure 5-13
Connecting Four-Wire Transmitters to an SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit
5-48
Analog Modules
5.11
Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings: IC+: IC : M+: M : Constant-current lead (positive) Constant-current lead (negative) Measuring line (positive) Measuring line (negative)
Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors

The resistance thermometers/resistors are wired in a four-conductor, three-conductor or two-conductor connection. With four-conductor and three-conductor connections, the module supplies a constant current via terminals IC + and IC so that the potential drop occurring on the measuring cables is compensated. It is important that the connected constant current cables are directly connected to the resistance thermometer/resistor. Measurements with four-conductor or three-conductor connections supply a more precise measuring result due to compensation than measurements with a two-conductor connection.
5-49
Analog Modules
Four-Conductor Connection of a Resistance Thermometer

The voltage generated at the resistance thermometer is measured via the M+ and M terminals. When you connect, watch out for the polarity of the connected cable (connect IC + and M+ as well as IC and M to the resistance thermometer). Make sure that the connected cables IC + and M+ and SO and SE+ and cables IC and M and AGND and SE are connected directly on the resistance thermometer.
IC
M+ M IC+ IC
SE+ SE SO AGND
Figure 5-14
Four-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers on an AI
5-50
Analog Modules
Three-Conductor Connection of a Resistance Thermometer

During three-conductor connection to modules with 4 terminals per resistance thermometer, you must set up a jumper between M and IC and SE and AGND (see Figure 5-15). The module compensates in this circuit for the effect of the line resistance between the module and the resistance thermometer/resistor. Make sure that the connected cables IC + and M+ and the cables SO and SE+ are directly connected to the resistance thermometer. To get an accurate measurement, make sure that the connected cables M+, IC + and IC and the cables SE+, SO and AGND are the same length and have the same cross-section.
IC
M+ M IC+ IC
SE+ SE SO AGND
Figure 5-15
Three-Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an AI
Two-Conductor Connection of a Resistance Thermometer

With a two-conductor connection, you must insert jumpers on the module between M+ and IC+ and between M and IC. Note: Cable resistance is also measured.
M+ M IC+ IC
Figure 5-16
Two-Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an AI
5-51
Analog Modules
5.12
Connecting Thermocouples
Design of Thermocouples
A thermocouple consists of a pair of sensors and the necessary installation and connecting parts. The thermocouple consists of two wires of dissimilar metals or metal alloys soldered or welded together at the ends. There are different types of thermocouple, depending on the composition of the material used for example, K, J, N thermocouples. The measuring principle of all thermocouples is the same, irrespective of their type.
Measuring junction Thermocouple with positive or negative limbs Connecting point Compensating leads Reference junction Leads
Measurement input ## C
Figure 5-17
Design of Thermocouples
Principle of Operation of Thermocouples

If the measuring point is subjected to a temperature different from that of the free ends of the thermocouple (point of connection), a voltage, the thermo emf, occurs at the free ends. The magnitude of the thermo-e.m.f. generated depends on the difference between the temperature at the measuring junction and the temperature at the free ends, as well as on the material combination used for the thermocouple. Since a thermocouple always measures a temperature difference, the free ends must be kept at a known temperature at a reference junction in order to determine the temperature of the measuring junction. The thermocouples can be extended from their point of connection to the reference junction by means of compensating wires. These compensating wires consist of the same material as the thermocouple wires. The supply leads are copper wire. Note: Make sure these wires are connected with the correct polarity, otherwise there will be considerable measuring errors.
5-52
Analog Modules
Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature

There are several options for you to choose from for acquiring the reference junction temperature in order to obtain an absolute temperature value from the difference in temperature between the reference junction and measuring point. You can use internal or external compensation, depending on where you want the reference junction to be. The last column of the following table lists the feature you must set for the Reference Junction parameter in STEP 7. The reference temperature value is a separate parameter in STEP 7.
Table 5-43 Options for Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature Option No compensation (refer to Figure 5-18 for connection) Internal compensation (refer to Figure 5-18 for connection) External compensation with a compensating box in leads of an individual thermocouple (see Figure 5-19 for connection) Explanation When you want to acquire only the difference in temperature between the measuring point and the reference junction If you employ internal compensation, the internal temperature of the module is used for comparison purposes. You have already acquired and compensated the reference junction temperature using a compensating box, which you have looped into an individual thermocouple. No further processing is necessary owing to the module. External compensation with a resistance thermometer to obtain the reference junction temperature (recommended method) (see Figure 5-20 for connection) External compensation with a resistance thermometer when thermocouples with the same reference junction are divided amongst several modules (see Figure 5-20 for connection) Constant reference junction temperature (thermometer, ice bath; see Figure 5-18 for connection) You can acquire the reference temperature by means of a resistance thermometer (pt 100) and have it calculated by the module for any thermocouple. Use a resistance thermometer on a module that measures the reference junction temperature. Read in the climatic temperature value to the CPU and transfer the value to the other modules using SFC55. If the reference junction temperature is constant and known, you can specify this value in parameter assignment in STEP 7. RTD on Channel 0 Ref. Junction None
Internal
None
RTD on Channel 0
Reference temperature value
Theory of Operation of Internal Compensation

With internal compensation, you can establish the reference point across the terminals of the analog input modules. In this case, you must run the compensating lines right up to the analog module. The internal temperature sensor acquires the temperature of the module and supplies a compensation voltage. Note that internal compensation is not as accurate as external compensation.
5-53
Analog Modules
Theory of Operation of External Compensation with Compensating Box

If you employ external compensation, the temperature of the reference junction of the thermocouples is taken into account via a compensating box, for example. The compensating box contains a bridge circuit calibrated for a definite reference junction temperature. The reference junction is formed by the connections for the ends of the thermocouples compensating leads. If the actual temperature deviates from the compensating temperature, the temperature-sensitive bridge resistance changes. This results in a positive or negative compensating voltage, which is added to the thermo-e.m.f.

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings: M +: M : IC+: IC: Measuring line (positive) Measuring line (negative) Constant-current lead (positive) Constant-current lead (negative)
5-54
Analog Modules
Connection of Thermocouples without Compensation or Using the Reference Temperature Value

Connect the thermocouples to the inputs of the module, either directly or by means of compensating lines. Each channel can use a thermocouple type supported by the analog module independently of the other channels.
M+ M M+ M
Compensating leads (same material as thermocouple)
Figure 5-18
Connection of Thermocouples without Compensation or Using the Reference Temperature Value to an Isolated AI
Connecting the Compensating Box

The compensating box is looped in in the leads of each thermocouple. The compensating box must have an isolated supply. The power supply must have adequate filtering, for example by means of a grounded shielding winding. Each channel can use a thermocouple type supported by the analog module independently of the other channels. Each channel requires its own compensating box.
Note Use compensating boxes with a reference junction temperature of 0 _C for analog input modules.
5-55
Analog Modules
Recommended Compensating Box

We recommend you to use a comparison point (with integrated power supply unit) from Siemens as a compensating box. You will find the necessary ordering data in the table below.
Table 5-44 Ordering Data of the Comparison Point Recommended Compensating Box Reference junction with integrated power supply unit, for rail mounting Auxiliary power 230 VAC 110 VAC 24 VAC 24 VDC Connection to thermocouple Fe-CuNi Fe/Cu Ni Ni Cr/Ni Type L Type J Type K Order Number M72166-VVVVV
B 1 B 2 B 3 B 1 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 0
Pt 10% Rh/Pt Type S Pt 13% Rh/Pt Type R Cu-CuNi Cu/Cu Ni Reference temperature 0 _C Type U Type T
Connecting to the Comparison Point (Order No. M72166-xxx00)
Compensating leads (same material as thermocouple) +

Auxiliary power
+
M+ M M+ M
Output (Cu wires)
Figure 5-19
Connection of a Thermocouple with Reference Junction (Order No. M72166-xxx00) to an Isolated AI
5-56
Analog Modules
Connecting Thermocouples and Resistance Thermometers

Connect the resistance thermometer to channel 0 of the module. Make sure that you parameterize the RTD on Channel 0 reference junction in STEP 7 for each channel that has a thermocouple connected to it. If all thermocouples connected to the inputs of the module have the same comparison point, you compensate as follows:
RTD on Channel 0
M+
Equalizing line (same material as thermocouple)
M I C+ I C M+ M M+ M
Reference junction
Incoming line (Cu)
Figure 5-20
Connection of Thermocouples of the Same Type with External Compensation by Means of a Resistance Thermometer, Connected to Channel 0
5-57
Analog Modules
5.13
Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs
Introduction
You can use the analog output modules to supply loads and actuators with current and voltage. This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the connection options for loads and actuators described in the sections that follow.
Cables for Analog Signals

For the analog signals, you should use shielded and twisted pair cables. The cables QV and S+ and M and S, respectively, are to be twisted together. This reduces the interference. Ground the screen of the analog cables at both ends of the cables. If there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding current, which can flow over the shield, can cause interference of the analog signals. In such a case, you should ground the shield at one end of the cable only.
Isolated Analog Output Modules

With the isolated analog output modules there is no electrical connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground. You must use isolated analog output modules if a potential difference UISO can occur between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground. By means of an equipotential bonding conductor between the MANA terminal and chassis ground, make sure that UISO does not exceed the permitted value.
5-58
Analog Modules
5.14
Connecting Loads/Actuators to Voltage Outputs
Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output

Connecting loads to a voltage output is possible both in a four-conductor and a two-conductor connection.
Note The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the analog output module, are not drawn in the figures shown below. In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 5.13 with its generally applicable information for connecting loads and actuators.

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings: QV: S +: S : MANA: RL: L +: M: UISO: Analog output voltage Detector lead (positive) Detector lead (negative) Reference potential of analog circuit Load impedance Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage Ground terminal Potential difference between MANA and chassis ground
Four-Conductor Connection of Loads to a Voltage Output

A high accuracy at the load can be achieved through the four-conductor connection. You must therefore connect the sensor leads (S and S+) directly to the load. The voltage is thus measured and corrected directly at the load. Problems or a voltage drop can result in a potential difference between the sensor lead S and the reference circuit of the analog circuit MANA. This potential difference (UCM) must not exceed the permissible value. If the permissible potential difference is exceeded, the accuracy of the analog signal is impaired.
5-59
Analog Modules
L+ QV S+ S MANA
+24 V
RL
UISO 0V
Chassis ground Figure 5-21 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated AO over a Four-Conductor Connection
Two-Conductor Connection of Loads to a Voltage Output

In the case of a two-conductor connection, connect QV to S+ and MANA to S on the front connector. However, this will not produce the accuracy of a four-conductor connection. Connect the load to terminals QV and to the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA of the module.
L+ QV S+ S MANA
+24 V
RL
UISO 0V
Chassis ground Figure 5-22 Two-Conductor Connection of Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated AO
5-60
Analog Modules
5.15
Connecting Loads/Actuators to Current Outputs
Note The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the analog output module, are not drawn in the figures shown below. In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 5.13 with its generally applicable information for connecting loads/actuators.
Abbreviations and Mnemonics Used in the Figure Below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figure below have the following meanings: QI: MANA: RL: L +: M: UISO: Analog output current Reference potential of analog circuit Load impedance Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage Ground terminal Potential difference between MANA and chassis ground
Connecting Loads to a Current Output

You must connect loads to QI and the reference point of the analog circuit MANA of a current output.
L+ QI
+24 V
RL
MANA
UISO
M
0V Chassis ground
Figure 5-23
Connecting Loads to a Current Output of an Isolated AO
5-61
Analog Modules
5.16
Diagnostics of the Analog Modules
Programmable and Non-Programmable Diagnostic Messages

In diagnostics, we make a distinction between programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages. You obtain programmable diagnostic messages only if you have enabled diagnostics by parameter assignment. You perform parameter assignment in the Diagnostics parameter block in STEP 7 (refer to Section 5.7). Non-programmable diagnostic messages are always made available by the analog module irrespective of diagnostics being enabled.
Actions Following Diagnostic Messages in STEP 7

Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions: The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnosis of the analog module, forwarded to the CPU and can be read out by the user program. The error LED on the analog module lights. If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts in STEP 7, a diagnostic interrupt is triggered and OB 82 is called (refer to Section 4.5).
Reading out Diagnostic Messages

You can read out detailed diagnostic messages by means of SFCs in the user program (refer to the Appendix Diagnostic Data of Signal Modules). You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7 in the module diagnosis (refer to the STEP 7 online help system).
Diagnostic Message in the Measured Value of Analog Input Modules

Every analog input module supplies the measured value 7FFFH irrespective of the parameter assignment when an error is detected. This measured value means either Overflow, Malfunction or a channel is disabled.
Diagnostic Message via the INTF and EXTF LEDs

Some analog input modules indicate faults by means of their two fault LEDs INTF (internal fault) and EXTF (external fault). The LEDs go out when all the internal and external faults have been eliminated. Refer to the technical specifications of the modules, starting at Section 5.18, to find out which analog input modules have these fault LEDs.
5-62
Analog Modules
Diagnostic Messages of the Analog Input Modules

The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the analog input modules with diagnostics capability. You can find out which diagnostic messages are possible with which modules in the Appendix entitled Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules.
Table 5-45 Diagnostic Messages of the Analog Input Modules Diagnostic Message Module problem Internal malfunction External malfunction Channel error present External auxiliary supply missing Front connector missing Module not configured. Wrong parameters Channel information available Coding key incorrect or missing Thermocouple connection fault STOP operating mode EPROM error RAM error ADC/DAC error Hardware interrupt lost Configuring/parameter assignment error Short-circuit to M Wire break Reference channel error Underflow Overflow User connection not wired Open conductor in + direction Open conductor in direction Run time calibration error Underrange or overrange Open conductor in the current source User calibration doesnt correspond to the parameter assignment LED INTF/EXTF INTF EXTF INTF/EXTF EXTF EXTF INTF INTF INTF/EXTF INTF EXTF INTF INTF INTF INTF INTF EXTF EXTF EXTF EXTF EXTF EXTF EXTF EXTF EXTF EXTF EXTF EXTF Diagnostics Effective for Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Parameters Can Be Assigned No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No
5-63
Analog Modules
Note A prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostic messages is that you must have assigned parameters to the analog module accordingly in STEP 7.
Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures for Analog Input Modules

Table 5-46 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules, Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures Diagnostics Message Module malfunction Internal malfunction External malfunction There is a channel error No external auxiliary voltage No front connector Parameters have not been assigned to the module Wrong parameters Possible Error Cause An error detected by the module has occurred The module has detected an error within the programmable controller The module has detected an error outside the programmable controller Indicates that only certain channels are faulty Load voltage to supply the 2-wire transmitter is missing on terminals L+ and M Jumper between connections 1 and 2 in the front connector missing The module requires the information as to whether it should work with system default parameters or with your parameters A parameter or combination of parameters is incorrect; impermissible measurement range, for example Channel error present; the module can supply additional channel information One or more measuring range modules is missing or incorrectly inserted Module not configured and the first module cycle not completed The module is defective Feed supply L+ Remedy
Install jumper Message queued after power-on until parameter transmission by the CPU has been completed; parameterize the module, as required Reassign module parameter
Channel information available Measuring range module incorrect/missing STOP operating mode
Insert the measuring range modules on the module according to the parameter assignment of the type of measurement and the measurement range If a reboot of the CPU all the digitized analog values are in the intermediate memory, this message is reset Replace module
EPROM error RAM error ADC/DAC error
5-64
Analog Modules
Table 5-46 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules, Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures, continued Diagnostics Message Possible Error Cause Remedy Change interrupt handling in the CPU (change priority for interrupt OB; shorten interrupt program) Check measuring range module Reassign module parameter Eliminate short circuit
Hardware interrupt lost The module cannot send an interrupt, since the previous interrupt was not acknowledged; configuration error possible Configuring/parameter assignment error Short circuit to M Illegal parameters transferred to module A short circuit to the M potential has occurred on the sensor supply of two-wire transmitters Resistance too high in the sensor connection Open circuit between module and sensor Channel not connected (open)
Wire break
Use different type of sensor or connection, e.g. use conductors with a larger cross-sectional core area Close circuit Disable channel (Measuring Type parameter) Connect channel
Reference channel error
The reference junction connected at channel 0 is faulty due to a wire break, for example The reference temperature value transferred is not within the value range
Check terminals
Reparameterize the reference temperature
Underflow
Input value violates underrange, error may be caused: Wrong measuring range selected With the measuring ranges 4 to 20 mA and 1 to 5 V, if necessary by polarity reversal of sensor connection Configure other measuring range Check terminals
Overflow Run time calibration error
Input value overflows overrange A wiring fault has occurred on a channel during the calibration cycle
Configure other measuring range Eliminate the wiring fault (fault remains until the next calibration; in other words, a maximum 6 minutes or until there is a STOP-RUN transition of the CPU)
5-65
Analog Modules
5.17
Analog Module Interrupts
Introduction
In this Section, the interrupt behavior of the analog modules is described. The following interrupts exist: Diagnostic Interrupt Hardware interrupt Note that not all analog modules have interrupt capability or they are only capable of a subset of the interrupts described here Refer to the technical specifications of the modules, starting at Section 5.18, to find out which analog modules have interrupt capability. The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online help system for STEP 7, where they are described in greater detail.
Enabling Interrupts
The interrupts are not preset in other words, they are inhibited without appropriate parameter assignment. You enable interrupts in STEP 7 (refer to Section 5.7).
Special Feature: The Module is Inserted in ER-1/ER-2

Note If you use the analog module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set the parameters for the input of all the interrupts to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER-1/ER-2.
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after troubleshooting) are reported by means of an interrupt. The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program and processes the diagnostic interrupt block (OB 82). In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more detailed diagnostic information from the module. The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.
5-66
Analog Modules
Hardware Interrupt with Trigger Upper or Lower Limit Exceeded

Define a working range by setting parameters for an upper and lower limit value. If the process signal (for example, the temperature) leaves this working range, the module triggers a hardware interrupt, provided the interrupt is enabled. The CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the hardware interrupt block (OB 40). In the user program of OB 40, you can set how the programmable controller is required to react to a limit value being surpassed or not being reached. When OB 40 is exited, the hardware interrupt is acknowledged on the module.
Note Note that a hardware interrupt is not triggered if you have set the upper limit above the overrange or the lower limit below the underrange.
Structure of the Start Information Tag OB40_POINT_ADDR of OB 40

The limit values exceeded by the different channels are entered in the start information of OB 40 in the tag OB40_POINT_ADDR. The following figure shows the assignment to the bits of local data double word 8.
LB 8 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 1 1
LB 9 .1 .0 17 16 1 1
LB 11 1 0 Bit no. LD 8
Value falls below lower limit for channel 0 Value falls below lower limit for channel 1 Value exceeds upper limit for channel 0 Value exceeds upper limit for channel 1 Figure 5-24 Start Information of OB 40: Which Event Triggered the Hardware Interrupt at the Limit Value
Hardware Interrupt on Trigger Reached End of Scan Cycle

By parameterizing the hardware interrupt a the end of the scan cycle, you have the option of synchronizing a process with the scan cycle of the analog input module. A scan cycle includes the conversion of the measured values of all enabled channels of the analog input module. The module processes the channels one after the other. After all the measured values have been converted, the module of the CPU reports by means of an interrupt that there are new measured values on all channels. You can use the interrupt to load the currently converted analog values.
5-67
Analog Modules
5.18
Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit; (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)
Characteristics
The analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit has the following features: 8 inputs for voltage/current measurement 4 inputs for resistance measurement Various measurement ranges, can be adjusted in parallel 13-bit resolution Analog section isolated from CPU The maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels and between the reference potential of the connected sensors and MANA is 30 VAC
5-68
Analog Modules
Block Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit
MV0+ MI0+ MI0+ M0 CH0 Suppressor circuit, current jumpering D Bus S7-400
CH7
CH7
F_CON M ANA
Front connector monitoring
+5V +5V 0V 5V 0V Bus S7-400 Bus S7-400
Figure 5-25
Warning The module can be damaged. The shunt of an input channel can be destroyed if you inadvertently connect a voltage sensor to the M /MI+ terminals of a channel. Make sure that the front connector wiring corresponds to the following terminal assignment diagram.
Bus control
CH1
CH1
5-69
Analog Modules
Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit

Voltage measurement
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Current measurement
Resistance measurement
MV0+
V
CH0 M0 MV1+ CH1

A
Word 0
MV0+ MI0+ CH0 MI0+ M0 MV1+ MI1+ CH1 MI1+ M1 MV2+ MI2+ CH2 MI2+ M2 MV3+ MI3+ CH3 MI3+ M3
M0+
M0 IC0+ CH0 Word 0
Word 2
M1 MV2+ CH2 M2 MV3+ CH3 M3 Word 6 Word 4
IC0 M1+
M1 CH2 IC1+ Word 4
IC1
MANA
M ANA MV4+ MV4+ MI4+ CH4 MI4+ M4 MV5+ MI5+ CH5 MI5+ M5 MV6+ MI6+ CH6 MI6+ M6 MV7+ MI7+ MI7+ CH7 M7 M2+
CH4 M4 MV5+
Word 8
M2 IC2+ CH4 Word 8
CH5 M5 MV6+ CH6 M6 MV7+ CH7 M7
Word 10
IC2 M3+
Word 12
M3 IC3+ CH6 Word 12
Word 14
IC3
Figure 5-26
5-70
Analog Modules
Technical Specifications of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight Number of inputs 25 x 290 x 210 Approx. 500 g Data for Specific Module 8 4 max. 200 m Not required Typ. 1.67 mA Suppression of Interference, Limits of Error Interference voltage suppression for f = nx (f1 "1%), (f1 = interference frequency) n = 1, 2, ...
Common-mode interference (UCM < 30 V) Series-mode interference (peak value of interference < rated value of input range)
> 100 dB
For resistance-type sensor Shielded
> 40 dB
Length of cable Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ Constant measured current for resistance-type sensor Isolation
Crosstalk between the inputs
> 50 dB
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range)
Voltage input "1V " 10 V 1 V to 5 V " 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA " 1.0% " 0.6% " 0.7% " 1.0% " 1.0% " 1.25%
Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels Between inputs and MANA (UCM) Between the inputs (ECM) Between MANA and Minternal (UISO) Between bus and analog section Between bus and chassis ground Between analog section and chassis ground From the backplane bus
Yes No 30 VAC 30 VAC 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Current input
Resistance measurement 0 to 500 W; four conductor measurement (in the range of 600W)
Insulation tested with 2120 VDC 500 VDC 2120 VDC
Basic error (operational limit at 25 5C, referred to input range)
Voltage input "1V " 10 V 1 V to 5 V " 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA " 0.7% " 0.4% " 0.5% " 0.7% " 0.7% " 0.8%
Current consumption Max. 350 mA Typ. 1.8 W Power dissipation of the module Measuring principle Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per channel)
Current input
Analog Value Generation Integrative (Does not go into the response time) Yes
Resistance measurement 0 to 500 W; four conductor measurement (in the range of 600W) In the resistance measurement range In all the other measurement ranges
Temperature error with reference to the input range
" 0.02% K " 0.007% K " 0.05% K " 0.1%
Parameters can be assigned Interference voltage suppression f1 in Hz Integration time in milliseconds Basic conversion time in ms Resolution including sign
60/50 16.7/20 23/25 13/13 Bit Not possible 184/200
Linearity error (with reference to the input range) Repeat accuracy (in the steady state at 25 C, referred to the input range)
Smoothing of the measured values Basic execution time of the module, in ms (all channels enabled)
5-71
Analog Modules
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Interrupts Diagnostic functions Substitute value can be applied Input range (rated values)/input resistance None None No
Connection of the signal sensors
For measuring voltage For measuring current As two-wire transmitter As four-wire transmitter With two-conductor terminal With three-conductor terminal With four-conductor terminal
Possible Possible; with external transmitter supply Possible
Data for Selecting a Sensor
Voltage
" 1 V/200 kW " 10 V/200 kW 1 V to 5 V/200 kW
For measuring resistance Possible; cable resistance is also measured Possible
Current Resistors
" 20 mA/80 W 4 mA to 20 mA/80 W 0 to 600 W; of use up to 500 W 40 mA continuous
Maximum input current for current input (destruction limit)
5.18.1
Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit

You set the mode of operation of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit in STEP 7.
Parameters
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 5.7. An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below.
Table 5-47 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 Parameter Measurement Measuring method 13 Bit Default1) Parameter Type Scope
Value Range
Disabled U Voltage 4DMU Current (4-wire transmitter) 2DMU Current (2-wire transmitter) R-4L Resistance (four-conductor connection) Refer to Section 5.18.2 for the measuring ranges of the input channels that you can set. 60 Hz; 50 Hz
Static "10 V
Channel
Measuring
range
Interference
suppression
1)
50 Hz
5-72
Analog Modules
5.18.2
Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit
Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels: Voltage measurement Current measurement Resistance test You perform the setting with the Measuring Type parameter in STEP 7.
Wiring for Resistance Measurement

The following conditions apply when measuring the resistance with the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit:
Table 5-48 Channels for Resistance Measurement of the SM 431; AI 8 Measuring Type Parameter Resistance (four-conductor connection) Permissible for Channel n 0, 2, 4 or 6 13 Bit
Condition You must disable the# Measuring Type parameter for channels n+1 (1, 3, 5, 7). The reason: The connections of channel n+1 are used to supply the resistance that is connected to channel n.
Unused Channels
Unused channels can be left open. You can improve the noise immunity of the module in a measuring environment with serious interference by short-circuiting the channels and connecting to MANA. Disable the Measuring Type parameter for unused channels. In this way you shorten the scan time of the module.
5-73
Analog Modules
Measuring Ranges
You set the measuring ranges by means of the Measuring Range parameter in STEP 7.
Table 5-49 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit Method Selected U: Voltage Measuring Range # V 1 1 to 5 V # V 10 Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the voltage measuring range You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the current measuring range You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the current measuring range You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the resistance measuring range
2DMU: Current (two-wire 4 to 20 mA transmitter) 4DMU: Current (four-wire transmitter) R-4L: Resistance (four-conductor connection) 4 to 20 mA " 20 mA 600 W
Default Settings
The default measuring method of the module is Voltage, at a range of " 10 V. You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 bit in STEP 7.
5.19
Characteristics
The analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit has the following features: 8 inputs for voltage/current measurement 4 inputs for resistance and temperature measurement Various measuring ranges, adjustable in parallel 14-bit resolution Particularly suitable for measuring temperatures Parameter can be assigned to temperature sensor types Linearization of the sensor characteristic curves Supply voltage 24 VDC required only for the connection of 2-wire transmitters Analog section isolated from CPU The maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels and between the channel and the central ground point is120 VAC
5-74
Analog Modules

CH0 CH1 Meas. range module 0
D Bus S7-400 Bus control ENABLE +5V 0V
A MULTIPLEXER OPTO RELAY + 5V + 15V 0V 15V
CH6 CH7
Meas. range module 3
L+ M
Bus S7-400 Bus S7-400
Figure 5-27 Block Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit
5-75
Analog Modules

Thermocouples Voltage measurement Current measurement Resistance measurement Resistance thermometer
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
L+
L+ M0+ M0 M0+ M0 CH0 Word 0
CH0
Word 0
M1+ M1
CH1
Word 2
IC0+ IC0
M2+ M2
CH2
Word 4
M1+ M1 CH2 Word 4
M3+ M3
CH3
Word 6
IC1+ IC1
M4+ M4
CH4
Word 8
M2+ M2 CH4 Word 8
M5+ M5
CH5
Word 10
IC2+ IC2
Tr
M6+ M6
CH6
Word 12
M3+ M3 CH6 Word 12
Tr
M7+ M7
CH7
Word 14
IC3+ IC3
Figure 5-28
5-76
Analog Modules

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 25 x 290 x 210 Current consumption
From the backplane bus From the backplane bus L+
Approx. 500 g Data for Specific Module Number of inputs 8
Max. 600 mA Max. 200 mA (with 8 connected, fully controlled two-wire transmitters) Typ. 3.5 W
For resistance-type sensor Length of cable Shielded in the 80 mV input range and with thermocouples
4 Max. 200 m Max. 50 m
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC (required only for the supply of two-wire transmitters)
Analog Value Generation Measuring principle Integrative Integration time/conversion (Does not go into the time/resolution (per channel) response time)
Parameters can be assigned Interference voltage suppression f1 in Hz Integration time in milliseconds Basic conversion time in ms Additional conversion time for measuring resistance in ms Additional conversion time for open-circuit monitoring in ms Additional conversion time for measuring resistance in ms Resolution including sign
Yes 60/50 16.7/20 20.1/23.5 40.2/47
Yes
Power supply of the transmitters Supply current
max. 50 mA Yes Typ. 1.67 mA
Short-circuit proof
Constant measured current for resistance-type sensor Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Yes
4.3/4.3
No Yes
5.5/5.5
Between the channels
Between channels and load voltage L+ Permitted potential difference Between inputs and MANA (UCM) Between the inputs (ECM) Between MANA and Minternal (UISO) Between bus and L+/M Between bus and analog section Between bus and chassis ground Between analog section and L+/M Between analog section and chassis ground Between L+/M and chassis ground
14/14 bit 16/16 bit Parameters can be assigned in 4 stages 161/188
120 VAC 120 VAC 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Smoothing activated Smoothing of the measured values Basic execution time of the module, in ms (all channels enabled)
Insulation tested with 2120 VDC 2120 VDC 500 VDC 707 VDC 2120 VDC 2120 VDC
5-77
Analog Modules
Suppression of Interference, Limits of Error Interference voltage suppression for f = nx (f1 "1%), (f1 = interference frequency) n = 1, 2, ...
Thermocouples TC type B TC type R TC type S TC type T TC type E TC type J TC type K TC type U TC type L TC type N " 14.8 K " 9.4 K " 10.6 K " 2.2 K " 4,0 K " 5.2 K " 7.6 K " 3.5 K " 5.1 K " 5.5 K
Common-mode interference (UCM < 120 Vss) Series-mode interference (peak value of interference < rated value of input range)
> 100 dB
> 40 dB
>70 dB
Voltage input " 80 mV " 250 mV " 500 mV "1V " 2.5 V "5V 1 V to 5 V " 10 V 0 ... 20 mA " 20 mA
" 0.38% " 0.35% " 0.35% " 0.35% " 0.35% " 0.35% " 0.35% " 0.35% " 0.35% " 0.35% " 0.35% " 0.35%
Resistance thermocouples, four-conductor standard measuring range Pt 100 " 4.6 K Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000 " 5.7 K " 4.6 K " 3.7 K " 0.9 K " 0.9 K " 0.5 K " 0.5 K " 0.5 K " 0.5 K " 0.9 K " 0.9 K
Current input
Climatic measuring range Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000
4 mA to 20 mA Resistance test 0 to 48 W; four-conductor measurement 0 to 150 W, four-conductor measurement 0 to 300 W, four-conductor measurement 0 to 600 W; four-conductor measurement 0 to 5000 W; four-conductor measurement (in the range of 6000 W) 0 to 300 W; three-conductor measurement 0 to 600 W; three-conductor measurement 0 to 5000 ; three-conductor measurement (in the range of 6000 W)
Resistance thermocouples, three-conductor standard measuring range Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000 Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000 " 5.2 K " 8.2 K " 6.5 K " 5.2 K " 1.3 K " 1.3 K " 0.7 K " 0.7 K " 0.7 K " 0.7 K " 1.3 K " 1.3 K
" 0.35%
" 0.35%
" 0.35%
Climatic measuring range " 0.35%
" 0.5%
" 0.5%
" 0.5%
5-78
Analog Modules
Basic error (operational limit at 25 C, referred to input range)
Resistance thermocouples, four-conductor standard measuring range Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000 " 2.0 K " 2.5 K " 2.0 K " 1.6 K " 0.4 K " 0.4 K " 0.2 K " 0.2 K " 0.2 K " 0.2 K " 0.4 K " 0.4 K
Voltage input " 80 mV " 250 mV " 500 mV "1V " 2.5 V "5V 1 V to 5 V " 10 V " 0.17% " 0.15% " 0.15% " 0.15% " 0.15% " 0.15% " 0.15% " 0.15% " 0.15% " 0.15% " 0.15% " 0.15%
Current input 0 mA to 20 mA " 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA Resistance test 0 to 48 W; four-conductor measurement 0 to 150 W, four-conductor measurement 0 to 300 W, four-conductor measurement 0 to 600 W; four-conductor measurement 0 to 5000 W; four-conductor measurement (in the range of 6000 W) 0 to 300 W; three-conductor measurement 0 to 600 W; three-conductor measurement 0 to 5000 ; three-conductor measurement (in the range of 6000 W) TC type B TC type R TC type S TC type T TC type E TC type J TC type K TC type U TC type L TC type N
Resistance thermocouples, three-conductor standard measuring range Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000 Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000 " 3.1 K " 4.9 K " 3.9 K " 3.1 K " 0.8 K " 0.8 K " 0.4 K " 0.4 K " 0.4 K " 0.4 K " 0.8 K " 0.8 K " 0.004% K " 0.01% K " 0.1%
" 0.15%
" 0.15%
" 0.15%
Climatic measuring range
" 0.15%
" 0.3%
Temperature error (with reference to the input range) Linearity error (with reference to the input range) Repeat accuracy (in the steady state at 25 C, referred to the input range)
" 0.3%
" 0.3%
Thermocouples " 8.2 K " 5.2 K " 5.9 K " 1.2 K " 1.8 K " 2.3 K " 3.4 K " 1.8 K " 2.3 K " 2.9 K
5-79
Analog Modules
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Interrupts Diagnostic functions None None
Connection of the sensor
For measuring voltage For measuring current As two-wire transmitter As four-wire transmitter
Possible Possible Possible
Substitute value can be applied No Data for Selecting a Sensor Input range (rated values)/Input resistance
Voltage
" 80 mV/1 MW " 250 mV/1 MW " 500 mV/1 MW " 1 V/1 MW " 2.5 V/1 MW " 5 V/1 MW 1 to 5 V/1 MW " 10 V/1 MW 0 to 20 mA/50 W " 20 mA/50 W 4 to 20 mA/50 W 0 to 48 W/1 MW 0 to 150 W/1 MW 0 to 300 W/1 MW 0 to 600 W/1 MW 0 to 6000 W/1 MW (can be used up to 5000 W) TC type B/1 MW TC type R/1 MW TC type S/1 MW TC type T/1 MW TC type E/1 MW TC type J/1 MW TC type K/1 MW TC type U/1 MW TC type L/1 MW TC type N/1 MW
For measuring resistance With two-conductor terminal With three-conductor terminal With four-conductor terminal
Possible; cable resistance is also measured Possible Possible Max. 750 W Parameters can be assigned Types B, R, S, T, E, J, K, U, L, N Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000, Ni 100, Ni 1000 Yes, programmable No Possible
Current
Load of the two-wire transmitter
Characteristic linearization
Resistors
For thermocouples For resistance thermometers
Thermocouples
Temperature compensation Internal temperature compensation
External temperature compensation with compensating box External temperature compensation with Pt 100 Compensation for definable reference junction temperature
Possible Possible
Resistance thermometer
Pt 100/1 MW Pt 200/1 MW Pt 500/1 MW Pt 1000/1 MW Ni 100/1 MW Ni 1000/1 MW
Unit for temperature measurement
Degrees Celsius
Maximum input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) Maximum input current for current input (destruction limit)
Max. 18 V continuous 75 V for 1 ms (cycle factor 1 : 20) 40 mA continuous
5-80
Analog Modules
5.19.1

You set the mode of operation of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit by means of measuring range modules on the module and in STEP 7.
Measuring Range Module

A measuring range module of the module matches two channels and one resistance channel to each type of sensor. If necessary, the measuring range modules must be replugged to change the measuring method and the measuring range. The steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in Section 5.4. The corresponding table in Section 5.19.2 tells you which assignment you have to select for which measuring method and measuring range. In addition, the necessary settings are embossed on the module.
Parameter
Table 5-50 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit Parameter Diagnostics Wire break Measurement Measuring type Value Range Default1) Parameter Type Static Scope
Yes/no
No
Channel
Disabled U Voltage 4DMU Current (four-wire transmitter) U 2DMU Current (two-wire transmitter) R-4L Resistance (four-conductor terminal) R-3L Resistance (three-conductor terminal) RTD-4L Thermal resistor (linear, four-conductor terminal) RTD-3L Thermal resistor (linear, three-conductor terminal) TC-L Thermocouple (linear) Refer to Section 5.19.2 for the measuring ranges of the input channels that you can set. 273.15 to 327.67 oC 60 Hz; 50 Hz " 10 V
Static
Channel
Measuring
range
Reference
Temperature
0,00 oC 50 Hz
Dynamic Static
Module Channel
Interference
suppression
5-81
Analog Modules
Table 5-50 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit, continued Parameter Value Range None Low Average High None RTD on Channel 0 Reference temperature value dynamic Default1) None Static Channel Parameter Type Scope
Smoothing
Ref. junction
None
1)
Smoothing of the Measured Values

You fill find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in Section 5.6. The following figure indicates for the module in the case of a step response the number of module cycles after which the smoothed analog value applies at almost 100%, depending on the smoothing setting. The figure applies to every change of signal at an analog input.
Signal variation in percent 100
Step response for any analog input signal
63 50
50
100
150
200 Module cycles
Figure 5-29
Step Response of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit
5-82
Analog Modules
5.19.2
Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels: Voltage measurement Current measurement Resistance test Temperature measurement You specify the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module and by means of the Measuring Type parameter in STEP 7.
Circuit Variants for the Channels

Two channels are set with each measuring range module. There are therefore restrictions as regards the measuring method for the adjacent channels 0/1, 2/3, 4/5 and 6/7, as shown in the following table:
Table 5-51 Selection of the Measuring Method for Channel n and Channel n+1 of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit
Meas. Method Chan. n+1 Meas. Method Channel n
Disabled
Voltage
Current 4-DMU
Current 2-DMU
R-4L
R-3L
RTD-4L RTD-3L
TC-L
Disabled Voltage Current four-wire transmitter Current two-wire transmitter Resistor four-conductor Resistor three-conductor Thermal resistor four-conductor Thermal resistor three-conductor Thermocouples
x x x x x x x x x
x x
x x
x x
Example
If you select current (two-wire transmitter) for channel 6, you can then only deactivate the measuring method or set current (two-wire transmitter) for channel 7.
5-83
Analog Modules
Wiring for Resistance and Temperature Measurement

The following conditions apply when measuring the resistance and temperature with the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit:
Table 5-52 Channels for Resistance and Temperature Measurement with the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit Measuring Type Parameter Resistor (four-conductor terminal) Resistor (three-conductor terminal) Thermal resistor (linear, four-conductor terminal) Thermal resistor (linear, four-conductor terminal) Permissible for Channel n 0, 2, 4 or 6 0, 2, 4 or 6 0, 2, 4 or 6 Condition You must disable the# Measuring Type parameter for channels n+1 (1, 3, 5, 7). The reason The connections of channel n+1 are used to supply the resistance that is connected to channel n.
0, 2, 4 or 6
Wiring for Junction Compensation for Thermocouples

If you select RTD on Channel 0 as a reference junction for reference junction compensation for thermocouples, the following applies:
Table 5-53 Thermocouple with Reference Junction Compensation via RTD on Channel 0 Reference Junction Parameter RTD on Channel 0 Permissible for Channel n 2 to 7 Condition
You must connect and parameterize on channel 0 a resistance thermometer with linearization, a 3 or 4-conductor connection in the climatic range (channels 0 and 1 are thus assigned). The reason: If channel 0 is to be used as the reference junction, a resistance-type sensor must be connected there to record absolute temperatures in the climatic range.
Unused Channels
Unused channels can be left open. Set the measuring range module to position A. You can improve the noise immunity of the module in a measuring environment with serious interference by short-circuiting the channels. Disable the Measuring Type parameter for unused channels. In this way you shorten the scan time of the module.
5-84
Analog Modules
Measuring Ranges
You set the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range modules on the module and the Measuring Type parameter in STEP 7.
Table 5-54 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit Method Selected U: Voltage Measuring Range (Type of Sensor) " 80 mV " 250 mV " 500 mV "1V " 2.5 V "5V 1 to 5 V " 10 V 2DMU: Current (two-wire 4 to 20 mA transmitter) D To supply these transmitters with current you must connect 24 V to the L+ and M front connector terminals. You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the current measuring range 4DMU: Current (four-wire transmitter) 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA " 20 mA R-4L: Resistors (four-conductor connection) 48W 150 W 300 W 600 W 6000 W R-3L: Resistors (three-conductor connection) 300 W 600 W 6000 W A C You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the current measuring range You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the resistance measuring range Measuring Range Module Setting A Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the voltage measuring range
5-85
Analog Modules
Table 5-54 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit, continued Method Selected TC-L: Thermocouple (linear) (temperature measurement) Measuring Range (Type of Sensor) Type B Type N Type E Type R Type S Type J Type L Type T Type K Type U RTD-4L: thermal resistor (linear, four-conductor connection) (temperature measurement) Pt 100 climatic Pt 200 climatic Pt 500 climatic Pt 1000 climatic Ni 100 climatic Ni 1000 climatic RTD-3L: thermal resistor (linear, three-conductor connection) (temperature measurement) Pt 100 standard Pt 200 standard Pt 500 standard Pt 1000 standard Ni 100 standard Ni 1000 standard A Measuring Range Module Setting A Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the temperature range
Default Settings
The module has the following default settings in STEP 7: Channels 0 to 7: Voltage for the measuring method ; " 10 V for the measuring range You can use these measuring methods and measuring ranges without parameterizing the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit in STEP 7.
5-86
Analog Modules
Wire Break Check for Temperature or Resistance Measurement

The wire break check is intended primarily for temperature measurements (TC, RTD) or resistance measurements. Always parameterize the wire break check in these cases as this ensures that, in the event of a wire break, the measured value provided by the module accepts the data for overrun 7FFFH.
Special Characteristics of the Wire Break Check for the Voltage Measurement Methods
In some transmitters, incorrect measured values may be obtained due to the fact that the wire break check is enabled. If so, disable the wire break check. The reason Some transmitters try to correct the test current and in doing so corrupt the setpoint value provided.
5-87
Analog Modules
5.20
Characteristics
The analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit has the following features: Rapid A/D changeover, therefore particularly suitable for highly dynamic processes 8 inputs for voltage/current measurement 4 inputs for resistance measurement Various measuring ranges, adjustable in parallel 14-bit resolution Supply voltage: 24 VDC required only for the connection of 2-wire transmitters Analog section isolated from CPU The maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels and between the reference potential of the connected sensors and MANA is 8 VAC
Block Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 bits

CH0 CH1 Measuring range module 0 D Bus S7-400 Bus control ENABLE +5V 0V
MANA Measuring range module 3 MULTIPLEXER
CH6 CH7
L+ M MANA
+ 5V + 15V 0V 15V
Bus S7-400 Bus S7-400
Figure 5-30
5-88
Analog Modules

Voltage measurement Current measurement
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Resistance measurement
L+
L+ M0+ M0 M0+ M0 CH0 Word 0
CH0
Word 0
M1+ M1
CH1
Word 2
IC0+ IC0
M2+ M2
CH2
Word 4
M1+ M1 CH2 Word 4
M3+ M3
CH3
Word 6
IC1+ IC1
MANA
A
M4+ M4
CH4
Word 8
M2+ M2 CH4 Word 8
M5+ M5
CH5
Word 10
IC2+ IC2
Tr
M6+ M6
CH6
Word 12
M3+ M3 CH6 Word 12
Tr
M7+ M7
CH7
Word 14
IC3+ IC3
Figure 5-31
5-89
Analog Modules

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 25 x 290 x 210 Approx. 500 g Data for Specific Module Number of inputs 8 4 Max. 200 m Current consumption
From the backplane bus From the backplane bus L+
Max. 1000 mA Max. 200 mA (with 8 connected, fully controlled 2-wire transmitters) Typ. 4.9 W
For resistance-type sensor Shielded
Length of cable Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC (required only for the supply of 2-wire transmitters) Yes
Analog Value Generation Measuring principle Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per channel) Actual-value conversion (Does not go into the response time) Yes None/400/60/50 52 ms 14/14/14 Can be configured none a lot 15 ms 0.420
Parameters can be assigned Interference voltage suppression f1 in Hz Basic conversion time in ms Resolution (incl. overrange)
Power supply of the transmitters Supply current Short-circuit proof Max. 50 mA Yes Typ. 1.67 mA
Constant measured current for resistance-type sensor Isolation
Smoothing of the measured values Yes No Yes Time constant of the input filter Basic execution time of the module, in ms (all channels enabled)
Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels Between channels and load voltage L+ Between inputs and MANA (UCM) Between the inputs (ECM) Between MANA and Minternal (UISO) Between bus and analog section Between bus and chassis ground Between analog section and L+/M Between analog section and chassis ground Between L+/M and chassis ground
Permitted potential difference 8 VAC 8 VAC 75 VDC/60 VAC
Insulation tested 2120 VDC 500 VDC 707 VDC 2120 VDC 2120 VDC
5-90
Analog Modules
Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Interference voltage suppression configured for f = nx (f1 "1%), (f1 = interference frequency) n = 1, 2 , ... filter 400/60/50 Hz Interrupts
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics None None No
Diagnostic functions Substitute value can be applied
> 80 db
Data for Selecting a Sensor Input range (rated values)/Input resistance
> 40 dB
Voltage
" 1 V/10 MW " 10 V/10 MW 1 V to 5 V/10 MW " 20 mA/50 W 4 mA to 20 mA/50 W 0 to 600 W/10 MW Max. 18 V continuous; 75 V for 1 ms (cycle factor 1 : 20) 40 mA continuous
> 70 dB
Current
Resistors
Voltage input "+ 1 V " 10 V 1 V to 5 V " 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA " 0.7 % " 0.9 % " 0.9 % " 0.8% " 0.8% " 1.0%
Maximum input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) Maximum input current for current input (destruction limit) Connection of the signal sensor
Current input
Resistance test 0...600 W;
Possible
Possible Possible
Basic error (operational limit at 25C, referred to input range)
Voltage input "1V " 10 V 1 ... 5 V " 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA " 0.6% " 0.75% " 0.75% " 0.7% " 0.7% " 0.7% " 0.03% K " 0,05% K " 0.2%
For measuring resistance With two-conductor terminal With three-conductor terminal With four-conductor terminal Possible; cable resistance is also measured
Current input
Possible Max. 750 W
Resistance test 0 to 600 W;
5-91
Analog Modules
5.20.1

Measuring Range Modules

Parameters
Table 5-55 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0) Parameter Measurement Measuring type Value Range Default1) Parameter Type Scope
Disabled U Voltage 4DMU Current (four-wire transmitter) 2DMU Current (two-wire transmitter) R-4L Resistance (four-conductor terminal) Refer to Section 5.20.2 for the measuring ranges of the input channels that you can set. 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; none None High
U Static "10 V Channel
Measuring
range
Interference
suppression
50 Hz None
Smoothing
1)
5-92
Analog Modules

You will find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in Section 5.6. You can only set strong smoothing for the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit. The module cycle time is a constant, irrespective of how many channels are enabled. It therefore has no effect on the filter settling time, which is defined by the parameter assignment of interference frequency suppression and smoothing.
Note It is only advisable to parameterize smoothing if you also parameterize interference frequency suppression; otherwise, the measured value resolution will be reduced to 9 bits (analog value representation is right aligned in this case).
Filter Settling Time with Strong Smoothing

Table 5-56 Interference Frequency Suppression and Filter Settling Time with Smoothing of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0) Interference Suppression Smoothing Filter settling time in ms
None 50 Hz 60 Hz 400 Hz
High High High High
100 83.333 12.5
5-93
Analog Modules
Step Response with Strong Smoothing

The following figure illustrates the contents of Table 5-56. It shows the filter settling time after which, in the case of a step response, the smoothed analog value is applied to almost 100%, depending on the interference frequency suppression that has been set. The figure applies to every change of signal at an analog input.
Signal variation in percent 100 Step response for any analog input signal
63 50
12.5
30
60
83.333 100
120
150
Interference frequency suppression 400 Hz: 60 Hz: 50 Hz: Figure 5-32
Filter settling time in ms
Step Response of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7 431-1KF20-0AB0)
5.20.2
Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels: Voltage measurement Current measurement Resistance test You specify the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module and the Measuring Type parameter in STEP 7.
5-94
Analog Modules
Circuit Variants of the Channels

Two channels are set in each case with the measuring range module. There are therefore restrictions as regards the measuring method for the adjacent channels 0/1, 2/3, 4/5 and 6/7, as shown in the following table:
Table 5-57 Selection of the Measuring Method for Channel n and Channel n+1 of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)
Meas. Type Channel n+1 Meas. Type Channel n
Disabled
Voltage "1 V
Voltage 1 to 5 V
Voltage "10 V
Current 4-DMU
Current 2-DMU
R-4L
Disabled Voltage "1 V Voltage 1 to 5 V Voltage "10 V Current four-wire transmitter Current two-wire transmitter Resistance four-conductor
x x x x x x x
x x
x x
x x x x
Example
If you select current (two-wire transmitter) for channel 6, you can only disable the measuring method or set current (two-wire transmitter) for channel 7.
Circuit for Resistance Measurement

The following conditions apply when measuring the resistance with the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit:
Table 5-58 Channels for Resistance Measurement of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0) Measuring Type Parameter Resistor (four-conductor terminal) Permissible for Channel n 0, 2, 4 or 6 Condition You must disable the# Measuring Type parameter for channels n+1 (1, 3, 5, 7). The reason The connections of channel n+1 are used to supply the resistance that is connected to channel n.
Unused Channels
Unused channels can be left open. Set the correspondingmeasuring range modules in position B. You can improve the noise immunity of the module in a measuring environment with serious interference by connecting M and MANA.
5-95
Analog Modules
Measuring Ranges
Table 5-59 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0) Method Selected U: Voltage Measuring Range (Type of Sensor) "1V 1 to 5 V " 10 V 2DMU: Current (two-wire transmitter) 4 to 20 mA D Measuring Range Module Setting A B Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the voltage measuring range To supply these transmitters with current you must connect 24 V to the L+ and M front connector terminals. You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the current measuring range 4DMU: Current (four-wire transmitter) R-4L: Resistor (four-conductor terminal) 4 to 20 mA " 20 mA 600 W A C You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the current measuring range You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the resistance measuring range
Default Settings
The module has the following default settings in STEP 7: Channels 0 to 7: Voltage for the measuring method ; " 10 V for the measuring range You can use these measuring methods and measuring ranges without parameterizing the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit in STEP 7.
5-96
Analog Modules
5.21
Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit; (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)
Characteristics
The analog input module SM 431; AI 13 x 16 Bit has the following features: 16 inputs for voltage/current measurement Various measuring ranges, adjustable in parallel 13-bit resolution Non-isolated between the analog section and bus The maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels and the reference potentials of the connected sensors and central ground point is 2 VDC/VAC
5-97
Analog Modules
Measuring range module
*
Control and backplane bus interface
* * *
Tr
Tr
Tr
Tr
* * * *
Tr
Tr = Transducer = Transmitter
Tr
*Voltage/current sensor and M must be connected to the chassis ground of the rack
Tr
Tr
Figure 5-33
5-98
Analog Modules

Voltage measurement Current measurement
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
L+
L+ M0+ M0 M1+ M1 M2+ M2 M3+ M3

Tr Tr
CH0 CH1
Word 0 Word 2
CH2 CH3
Word 4 Word 6
M4+ M4 M5+ M5 M6+ M6 M7+ M7
CH4 CH5
Word 8 Word 10
Tr Tr
CH6 CH7
Word 12 Word 14
M8+ M8 M9+ M9 M10+ M10 M11+ M11

Tr Tr
CH8 CH9
Word 16 Word 18
CH10 CH11
Word 20 Word 22
M12+ M12 M13+ M13 M14+ M14 M15+ M15 M
CH12 CH13
Word 24 Word 26
Tr Tr
CH14 CH15
Word 28 Word 30
Figure 5-34
5-99
Analog Modules

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions L x H x D (in millimeters) Weight Number of inputs 25 x 290 x 210 Approx. 500 g Data for Specific Module 16 Max. 200 m 24 VDC (only required for the supply of 2-wire transmitters) Yes Basic execution time of the module, in ms (all channels enabled) 880/1040
Shielded
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+
Common-mode interference (UCM < 2 V) Series-mode interference (peak value of interference < rated value of input range)
> 86 dB
> 60 dB
> 50 dB
Voltage input "1V " 10 V 1 V to 5 V " 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA " 0.65% " 0.65% "1% " 0.65% " 0.65%
Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels Between channels and load voltage L+ Between inputs and MANA (UCM) Between the inputs (ECM) Between bus and chassis ground From the backplane bus From load voltage L+ (with 16 connected, fully controlled two-wire transmitters)
No No No
Current input
Permitted potential difference 2 VDC/2 VACSS 2 VDC/2 VACSS 500 VDC
Voltage input "1V " 10 V 1 V to 5 V " 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA " 0.25% " 0.25% " 0.5% " 0.25% " 0.25% " 0.01% " 0.05% " 0.01%
Current input
Current consumption Max. 100 mA Max. 400 mA
Temperature error (with reference to the input range) Linearity error (with reference to the input range)
Power dissipation of the module Measuring principle Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per channel)
Typ. 2 W
Repeat accuracy (in the steady state at 25 C, referred to the input range) Interrupts Diagnostic functions Substitute value can be applied
Analog Value Generation Integrative (Does not go into the response time) Yes 60/50 50/60 55/65 13 bits Not possible
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics None None No
Parameters can be assigned Interference voltage suppression f1 in Hz Integration time in milliseconds Basic conversion time in ms Resolution including sign
Smoothing of the measured values
5-100
Analog Modules
Connection of the signal sensor
Voltage
" 1 V/10 MW " 10 V/100 MW 1 V to 5 V/100 MW " 20 mA/50 W 4 mA to 20 mA/50 W 20 V continuous; 75 V for 1 ms (cycle factor 1 : 20) 40 mA
Possible Possible Possible Max. 750 W
Current
Maximum input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) Maximum input current for current input (destruction limit)
5-101
Analog Modules
5.21.1

Measurement Range Modules

A measuring range module of the module matches two consecutive channels to each type of sensor. If necessary, the measuring range modules must be replugged to change the measuring method and the measuring range. The steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in Section 5.4. The corresponding table in Section 5.21.2 tells you which assignment you have to select for which measuring method and measuring range. In addition, the necessary settings are embossed on the module.
Parameters
You will find a description of the procedure of assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 5.7. An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below.
Table 5-60 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit Parameter Measurement Measuring type Value Range Default1) Parameter Type Scope
Disabled U Voltage 4DMU Current (four-wire transmitter) 2DMU Current (two-wire transmitter) Refer to Section 5.21.2 for the measuring ranges of the input channels that you can set. 60 Hz; 50 Hz
U Static "10 V Channel
Measuring
range
Interference
suppression
1)
50 Hz
5-102
Analog Modules
5.21.2
Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels: Voltage measurement Current measurement You specify the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module and the Measuring Type parameter in STEP 7.
Circuit Variants of the Channels

Two channels are set in each case with the measuring range module. There are therefore restrictions as regards the measuring method for the adjacent channels 0/1, 2/3, 4/5, 6/7, 8/9, 10/11, 12/13 and 14/15, as shown in the following table:
Meas. Type Disabled Channel n+1 Meas. Type Channel n
Voltage "1 V
Voltage 1 to 5 V
Voltage "10 V
Current 4-DMU
Current 2-DMU
Disabled Voltage "1 V Voltage 1 to 5 V Voltage "10 V Current four-wire transmitter Current two-wire transmitter
x x x x x x
x x
x x
x x x x
Example
If you select current (two-wire transmitter) for channel 6, you can only disable the measuring method or set current (two-wire transmitter) for channel 7.
Unused Channels
Unused channels can be left open. Put the measuring range modules in position B. You can improve the noise immunity of the module in a measuring environment with serious interference by interconnecting M and Mana. Disable the Measuring Type parameter for unused channels to reduce the scan cycle time of the module.
5-103
Analog Modules
Measuring Ranges
Table 5-62 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit Method Selected U: Voltage Measuring Range (Type of Sensor) "1V 1 to 5 V " 10 V 2DMU: Current (two-wire transmitter) 4 to 20 mA D Measuring Range Module Setting A B Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the voltage measuring range To supply these transmitters with current you must connect 24 V to the L+ and M front connector terminals. You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the current measuring range 4DMU: Current (four-wire transmitter) 4 to 20 mA " 20 mA C You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the current measuring range
Default Settings
The module has the following default settings in STEP 7: Measuring method voltage Measuring range +/10 V. You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit inSTEP 7
5-104
Analog Modules
5.22
Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit; (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)
Characteristics
The analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit has the following features: 16 inputs for voltage/current and temperature measurement with thermocouple (TC) 8 inputs for resistance and temperature measurement with thermocouple (TC) Various measuring ranges, adjustable in parallel 16-bit resolution Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded Programmable end-of-scan-cycle interrupt Analog section isolated from CPU The maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels and between the channel and central ground is 120 VAC
5-105
Analog Modules
CH0 CH1
const
PGA
A Multiplexer Opto relay
CH14 CH15
+ 15 V L+ M Diagnostics in L+ loop + 5V 0V 15 V +5V Bus S7-400 0V
Figure 5-35 Block Diagram of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit
5-106
Bus control
Bus S7-400
Signal jumpering
Analog Modules

Thermocouples Voltage measurement Current measurement Resistance measurement Resistance thermometer
INTF EXTF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
L+
L+ M0+ M0 M1+ M1 M0+ M0 IC0+ IC0 M1+ M1 IC1+ IC1 M2+ M2 IC2+ IC2 M3+ M3 IC3+ IC3
CH0 CH1
Word 0 Word 2
CH0
Word 0
V V
M2+ M2 M3+ M3 M4+ M4 M5+ M5 M6+ M6 M7+ M7
CH2 CH3
Word 4 Word 6
CH2
Word 4
CH4 CH5
Word 8 Word 10
CH4
Word 8
CH6 CH7
Word 12 Word 14
CH6
Word 12
A A
M8+ M8 M9+ M9 M10+ M10 M11+ M11 M12+ M12 M13+ M13 M14+ M14 M15+ M15 M
CH8 CH9
Word 16 Word 18
M4+ M4 IC4+ IC4 M5+ M5 IC5+ IC5 M6+ M6 IC6+ IC6 M7+ M7 IC7+ IC7
CH8
Word 16
A A
CH10 CH11
Word 20 Word 22
CH10
Word 20
Tr Tr
CH12 CH13
Word 24 Word 26
CH12
Word 24
Tr Tr
CH14 CH15
Word 28 Word 30
CH14
Word 28
Figure 5-36
5-107
Analog Modules

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 25 x 290 x 210 Approx. 500 g Data for Specific Module Number of inputs 16 8 Insulation tested with
Between bus and L+/M Between bus and analog section Between bus and chassis ground Between analog section and L+/M Between analog section and chassis ground Between L+/M and chassis ground
2120 VDC 2120 VDC 500 VDC 707 VDC 2120 VDC 2120 VDC
For resistance-type sensor Shielded in the input ranges x 80 mV and with thermocouples
Length of cable Max. 200 m Max. 50 m
Current consumption 24 VDC (only required for the supply of two-wire transmitters) Yes From the backplane bus (5 V) From load voltage L+ (with 16 connected, fully controlled two-wire transmitters) Max. 700 mA Max. 400 mA
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+
Typ. 4.5 W
Analog Value Generation Measuring principle Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per channel) Integrative (Does not go into the response time) Yes 400/60/50 2.5/16.7/20 6/20.1/23.5 12/40.2/47
Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels Between channels and load voltage L+ Between inputs and MANA (UCM) Between the inputs (ECM) Between MANA and Minternal (UISO)
Yes No Yes
Parameters can be assigned Interference voltage suppression f1 in Hz Integration time in ms Basic conversion time in ms Additional conversion time for measuring resistance, in ms Additional conversion time for open-circuit monitoring, in ms Additional conversion time for measuring resistance in ms Resolution including sign
Permitted potential difference 120 VAC 120 VAC 75 VDC/60 VAC
4.3/4.3/4.3
5.5/5.5/5.5
16/16/16 bit Parameters can be assigned in 4 stages 96/322/376
Smoothing of the measured values Basic execution time of the module, in ms (all channels enabled)
5-108
Analog Modules
> 100 dB
0 to 5000 ; three-conductor measurement (in the range of 6000 W)
" 0.4%
> 40 dB
Thermocouples TC type B TC type R TC type S TC type T TC type E TC type J TC type K TC type U TC type L TC type N " 11.5 K " 7.3 K " 8.3 K " 1.7 K " 3.2 K " 4.3 K " 6.2 K " 2.8 K " 4.2 K " 4.4 K
> 70 dB
Voltage input " 25 mV " 50 mV " 80 mV " 250 mV " 500 mV "1V " 2.5 V "5V 1 V to 5 V " 10 V " 0.35 % " 0.32% " 0.31% " 0.3% " 0.3% " 0.3% " 0.3% " 0.3% " 0.3% " 0.3% " 0.3% " 0.3% " 0.3% " 0.3% " 0.3% " 0.3%
Current input 0 mA to 20 mA " 5 mA " 10 mA " 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA
Resistance test 0 to 48 W; four-conductor measurement 0 to 150 W, four-conductor measurement 0 to 300 W, four-conductor measurement 0 to 600 W; four-conductor measurement 0 to 5000 W; four-conductor measurement (in the range of 6000 W) 0 to 300 W; three-conductor measurement 0 to 600 W; three-conductor measurement
Resistance thermocouples, three-conductor standard measuring range Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000 " 4.2 K " 6.5 K " 5.2 K " 4.2 K " 1.0 K " 1.0 K " 0.5 K " 0.5 K " 0.5 K " 0.5 K " 1.0 K " 1.0 K
" 0.3%
" 0.3%
" 0.3%
" 0.3%
" 0.4%
" 0.4%
5-109
Analog Modules
Thermocouples TC type B TC type R TC type S TC type T TC type E TC type J TC type K TC type U TC type L TC type N " 7.6 K " 4.8 K " 5.4 K " 1.1 K " 1.8 K " 2.3 K " 3.4 K " 1.7 K " 2.3 K " 2.6 K
Voltage input " 25 mV " 50 mV " 80 mV " 250 mV " 500 mV "1V " 2.5 V "5V 1 V to 5 V "+ 10 V " 0.23% " 0.19% " 0.17% " 0.15% " 0.15% " 0.15% " 0.15% " 0.15% " 0.15% " 0.15% " 0.15% " 0.15% " 0.15% " 0.15% " 0.15% " 0.15%
Current input 0 mA to 20 mA " 5 mA " 10 mA " 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA
Resistance test 0 to 48 W; four-conductor measurement 0 to 150 W, four-conductor measurement 0 to 300 W, four-conductor measurement 0 to 600 W; four-conductor measurement 0 to 5000 W; four-conductor measurement (in the range of 6000 W) 0 to 300 W; three-conductor measurement 0 to 600 W; three-conductor measurement 0 to 5000 ; three-conductor measurement (in the range of 6000 W)
Climatic measuring range " 0.15% " 0.15% Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000
Resistance thermocouples, three-conductor standard measuring range Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000 " 3.1 K " 4.9 K " 3.9 K " 3.1 K " 0.8 K " 0.8 K " 0.4 K " 0.4 K " 0.4 K " 0.4 K " 0.8 K " 0.8 K " 0.004% K " 0.01% K " 0.1%
" 0.15%
" 0.15%
Climatic measuring range " 0.3% " 0.3% " 0.3% Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000
5-110
Analog Modules
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Interrupts
Pt 100/1 MW Pt 200/1 MW Pt 500/1 MW Pt 1000/1 MW Ni 100/1 MW Ni 1000/1 MW
Hardware interrupt Hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded Diagnostic Interrupt
Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Maximum input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) Maximum input current for current input (destruction limit) Red LED (INTF) Red LED (EXTF) Yes No Connection of the signal sensor
Diagnostic functions Group error display For internal fault For external fault
Max. 18 V continuous; 75 V for 1 ms (cycle factor 1 : 20) 40 mA
Possible
Possible Possible
Voltage
" 25 mV/1 MW " 50 mV/1 MW " 80 mV/1 MW " 250 mV/1 MW " 500 mV/1 MW " 1 V/1 MW " 2.5 V/1 MW " 5 V/1 MW 1 V to 5 V/1 MW " 10 V/1 MW 0 mA to 20 mA/50 W " 5 mA/50 W " 10 mA/50 W " 20 mA/50 W 4 mA to 20 mA/50 W 0 to 48 W/1 MW 0 to 150 W/1 MW 0 to 300 W/1 MW 0 to 600 W/1 MW 0 to 6000 W/1 MW (can be used up to 5000 W) TC type B/1 MW TC type R/1 MW TC type S/1 MW TC type T/1 MW TC type E/1 MW TC type J/1 MW TC type K/1 MW TC type U/1 MW TC type L/1 MW TC type N/1 MW
For measuring resistance With two-conductor terminal With three-conductor terminal With four-conductor terminal Possible; cable resistance is also measured Possible Possible Max. 750 W Parameters can be assigned Types B, R, S, T, E, J, K, U, L, N Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000, Ni 100, Ni 1000 Yes, programmable No Possible
Current
Resistors
For thermocouples For resistance thermometer
Temperature compensation
Thermocouples
Internal temperature compensation External temperature compensation with compensating box External temperature compensation with Pt 100 Compensation for definable reference junction temperature
Possible Possible
Degrees Celsius
5-111
Analog Modules
5.22.1

Measuring Range Module

Parameters
You will find a description of the procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 5.7. An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below.
Table 5-63 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit Parameter Enable Diagnostic interrupt1) Hardware interrupt1) Value Range Default2) Parameter Type Dynamic Scope
No No
Module
Destination CPU for

interrupt Trigger for hardware interrupt
Static
Module
End of scan cycle

reached at input
Yes/no
No
Static
Channel

Diagnostics Wire break Reference channel error Underflow Overflow Short circuit to M
32511 to 32512 32512 to 32511
Dynamic
Channel
No No No No No
Static
Channel
5-112
Analog Modules
Table 5-63 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit, continued Parameter Measurement Measuring type Value Range Default2) Parameter Type Scope
Disabled U Voltage 4DMU Current (4-wire transmitter) 2DMU Current (two-wire transmitter) R-4L Resistor (four-conductor terminal) R-3L Resistor (three-conductor terminal) RTD-4L Thermal resistor (linear, four-conductor terminal) RTD-3L Thermal resistor (linear, three-conductor terminal) TC-L Thermocouple (linear) Refer to Section 5.22.2 for the measuring ranges of the input channels that you can set. 273.15 to 327.67 oC 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz None Low Average High None RTD on Channel 0 Reference temperature value
Static
Channel
Measuring range teference

Temperature
"10 V
0.00 oC 50 Hz None Dynamic Module
Interference
suppression
Smoothing
Ref. junction
None
1)
If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER-1/ER-2. 2) Only in the CC (central controller) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings.
A Point to Note About Channels for Hardware Interrupts with the End of Scan Cycle Trigger
You can parameterize hardware interrupts for the end of scan cycle for one of the 16 channels because the module can only trigger these interrupts on one channel.
5-113
Analog Modules

You fill find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in Section 5.6. The following figure indicates for the module the number of module cycles after which, in the case of a step response, the smoothed analog value is applied at almost 100%, depending on the smoothing setting. The figure applies to every change of signal at an analog input.
63 50
20
40
60
80
100
Module cycles
Figure 5-37
Step Response of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)
Displaying Parameter Assignment Errors

The SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit has diagnostics capability. Below you will find an overview of the displays that are possible for modules with parameter assignment errors.
Table 5-64 Diagnostic Information of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit Incorrect Parameter Assignment Of the module Possible Display Explanation You can find an explanation of the diagnostic information in Tables 4-7 and 5-46 on Pages 4-10 and 5-64.
Affecting certain channels
Module malfunction Internal malfunction Wrong parameters Module malfunction Internal malfunction There is a channel error Wrong parameters Channel information available
Vector channel error Channel parameter

assignment error
5-114
Analog Modules
5.22.2
Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels: Voltage measurement Current measurement Resistance test Temperature measurement You specify the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module and the Measuring Type parameter in STEP 7.
Circuit Variants for the Channels

Two channels are set in each case with the measuring range module. There are therefore restrictions as regards the measuring method for the adjacent channels 0/1, 2/3, 4/5, 6/7, 8/9, 10/11, 12/13 and 14/15, as shown in the following table:
Meas. Type Channel n+1 Meas. Type Channel n
Disabled
Voltage
Current 4-DMU
Current 2-DMU
R-4L R-3L RTD-4L RTD-3L TC-L
Disabled Voltage Current four-wire transmitter Current two-wire transmitter Resistance four-conductor Resistance three-conductor Thermal resistor four-conductor Thermal resistor three-conductor Thermocouples
x x x x x x x x x
x x
x x
x x
5-115
Analog Modules
Example
If you have select current (two-wire transmitter) for channel 6, you can only disable the measuring method or set current (two-wire transmitter) for channel 7.
Circuit for Resistance and Temperature Measurement

The following conditions apply when measuring the resistance and temperature with the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit:
Table 5-66 Channels for Resistance and Temperature Measurement of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit Measuring Type Parameter Resistor (four-conductor terminal) Resistor three-conductor terminal Thermal resistor (linear, four-conductor terminal) Thermal resistor (linear, four-conductor terminal) Thermocouple (linear) Permissible for Channel n Condition
Measuring Type parameter 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, You must disable the # for channels n+1 (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15). 12 or 14 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, The reason The connections of channel n+1 are used to supply the resistance that is connected to 12 or 14 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, channel n. 12 or 14 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 or 14 0 to 15 You can select the reference junction. It is only advisable to specify a reference junction with thermocouples.
Circuit for Reference Junction Compensation for Thermocouples

If you select RTD on Channel 0 as a reference junction for reference junction compensation for thermocouples, the following applies:
Table 5-67 Reference Junction Compensation via RTD on Channel 0 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit Reference Junction Parameter RTD on Channel 0 Permissible for Channel n 2 to 15 Condition
You must connect and parameterize on channel 0 a resistance thermometer with linearization, a 3- or 4-conductor terminal in climatic range. This means that channels 0 and 1 are assigned. The reason If channel 0 is to be used as the reference junction, a resistance-type sensor must be connected there to establish the absolute temperatures in the climatic range.
Unused Channels
Unused channels can be left open. Set the measuring range modules to position A. You can improve the noise immunity of the module in a measuring environment with serious interference by short-circuiting the channels. Disable the Measuring Type parameter for unused channels to reduce the scan cycle time of the module.
5-116
Analog Modules
Measuring Ranges
Table 5-68 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit Method Selected U: Voltage Measuring Range (Type of Sensor) " 25 mV " 50 mV " 80 mV " 250 mV " 500 mV "1V " 2.5 V "5V 1 to 5 V " 10 V 2DMU: Current (two-wire transmitter) 4 to 20 mA D To supply these transmitters with current you must connect 24 V to the L+ and M front connector terminals. You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the current measuring range 4DMU: Current (four-wire transmitter) " 5 mA " 10 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA " 20 mA R-3L: Resistor (three-conductor terminal) R-4L: Resistor (four-conductor terminal) 300 W 600 W 6000 W (max. 5000 W) 48W 150 W 300 W 600 W 6000 W (max. 5000 W) A You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the resistance measuring range C You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the current measuring range Measuring Range Module Setting A Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the voltage measuring range
5-117
Analog Modules
Table 5-68 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit, continued Method Selected TC-L: Thermocouple (linear) (temperature measurement) Measuring Range (Type of Sensor) Type B Type N Type E Type R Type S Type J Type L Type T Type K Type U RTD-3L: thermal resistor linear, three-conductor terminal (temperature measurement) Pt 100 climatic Pt 200 climatic Pt 500 climatic Pt 1000 climatic Ni 100 climatic Ni 1000 climatic RTD-4L: thermal resistor linear, four-conductor terminal (temperature measurement) Pt 100 standard Pt 200 standard Pt 500 standard Pt 1000 standard Ni 100 standard Ni 1000 standard A You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the temperature range Measuring Range Module Setting A Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the temperature range
Default Settings
The default measuring method of the module in STEP 7 is Voltage, at a range of " 10 V. You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit in STEP 7.
Wire Break Check

The wire-break check is intended primarily for temperature measurements (TC, RTD) or resistance measurements. Always parameterize the wire break check in these cases as this ensures that in the event of a wire break the measured value provided by the module accepts the data for overrun 7FFFH.
Special Characteristics of the Wire Break Check for the Voltage Measurement Methods
In some transmitters, incorrect measured values may occur due to the fact that the wire break check is enabled. If so, disable the wire-break check. The reason Some transmitters try to correct the test current and in doing so corrupt the setpoint value they provide.
5-118
Analog Modules
Points to Note About the Wire Break Check when Current Sensors Are Connected
A wire break check of current sensors is not possible for the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit except in life-zero areas. You can therefore only parameterize the wire break check for the Current (four-wire transmitter) measuring method and the 4 to 20 mA measuring range.
Checking for Reference Channel Errors when Connecting Thermocouples

If you have connected a thermocouple, you can then enable the Reference channel error diagnosis if you have configured an RTD on Channel 0 or Reference Temperature Value reference junction.
Points to Note About Checking for Underflow with some Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges
There is now underflow in life-zero areas. A value that is too low or is negative is interpreted as a wire break. You can therefore not parameterize the underflow check for the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit for the following measuring methods and ranges:
Table 5-69 Points to Note when Checking for Underflow Measuring Method Voltage Current (four-wire transmitter) Current (two-wire transmitter) 1 to 5 V 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Measuring Range
Points to Note About the Short Circuit to M Diagnosis

You can only parameterize the check for Short Circuit to M for the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit for the Current (2-wire transmitter) measuring method.
5-119
Analog Modules
5.23
Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit; (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)
Characteristics
The analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit has the following features: 8 differential inputs for the resistance thermometer Parameters can be assigned to the resistance thermometer Linearization of the resistance thermometer characteristic curves 16-bit resolution Update rate of 25 ms for 8 channels Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded Analog section isolated from CPU The maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channel and the central ground point is 120 VAC
Calibration Software
The calibration software is only available on the Internet. You can find the current version under article ID 12443337. After installing the software, you can define user-specific calibration values for each channel and and each module input range. You will find further information under ID 12436891 at the Customer Support FAQ site.
5-120
Analog Modules
Block Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit
SO+0 SE+0 SE0 AGND
CH0
CH1
Isolation
CH2
CH3
A/D converter
Bus S7-400
CH4
Internal voltage supply
CH5
CH6 SO+7 SE+7 SE7 AGND
CH7
Figure 5-38
Block Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit
Note An external protective network is required in the signal leads in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5 (12 V MOV CT19-506, connected in series with all inputs as recommended by the manufacturer).
5-121
Analog Modules
Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit
INTF EXTF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
SE+0 SE0 SO0 AGND SE+1 SE1 SO1 AGND SE+2 SE2 SO2 AGND SE+3 SE3 SO3 AGND
CH0
Word 0
CH1
Word 1
CH2
Word 2
CH3
Word 3
SE+4 SE4 SO4 AGND SE+5 SE5 SO5 AGND SE+6 SE6 SO6 AGND SE+7 SE7 SO7 AGND
CH4
Word 4
CH5
Word 5
CH6
Word 6
CH7
Word 7
Figure 5-39
Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit
5-122
Analog Modules
Technical Specifications of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight Number of inputs Length of cable 25 x 290 x 210 Approx. 650 g Data for Specific Module 8 Max. 200 m Max. 1 mA Crosstalk between the inputs > 70 dB
Operational limit (over entire temperature range, referred to 0 to 60 _C input range)
Shielded
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Constant current for resistance-type sensor Isolation
RTD-Input Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000
RTD-4L RTD-3L 1.8 C 3.4 C 0.8 C 1.7 C 0.4 C 0.7 C 0.3 C 0.4 C 1.5 C 2.1 C 0.2 C 0.3 C
Yes
Between channels and backplane bus Between MANA and Minternal (UISO)
Permitted potential difference 120 VAC 1500 VAC Max. 650 mA Typ. 3.3 W
CRTD-4L RTD-3L 0.5 C 1.0 C 0.3 C 0.5 C 0.3 C 0.4 C 0.2 C 0.2 C 0.3 C 0.6 C 0.2 C 0.2 C
Linearity error (with reference to the input range)
Power dissipation of the module Measuring principle Integration/conversion time/ resolution (per channel)
Analog Value Generation Integrative (Does not go into the response time) Yes 22/25 Max. 200
additional error RTD-4L RTD-3L 0.2 C 0.3 C 0.2 C 0.2 C 0.1 C 0.1 C 0.1 C 0.1 C 0.1 C 0.2 C 0.1 C 0.1 C
Parameterizable Basic conversion time in ms Additional conversion time for measuring resistance, in ms Resolution including sign Noise suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz
Repeat accuracy (in the steady state at 25 C, referred to the input range)
16/16 bit 60/50
additional error CRTD-4L RTD-3L 0.5 C # C 0.3 0.3 C # C 0.2 0.3 C 0.1 C 0.2 C 0.1 C 0.3 C 0.2 C 0.2 C 0.1 C
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Parameters can be assigned in 4 stages 22/25 ms Interrupts
Smoothing of the measured values Basic response time of module (all channels enabled)
Hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded Diagnostic Interrupt
Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Red LED (INTF) Red LED (EXTF) Possible
Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Noise suppression for f = n (f1 "1%), (f1 = interference frequency) n = 1, 2, etc.
Common-mode interference (UCM < 120V) Series-mode interference (peak value of interference < rated value of the input range)
> 100 dB > 50 dB
Diagnostic information can be displayed
5-123
Analog Modules
Data for Selecting a Sensor Input range (rated values) input resistance
Pt 100/> 10M Pt 200/> 10M Pt 500/> 10M Pt 1000/> 10M Ni 100/> 10M Ni 1000/> 10M 35 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (duty factor 1:20)
Maximum input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) For measuring resistance With three-conductor terminal With four-conductor terminal
Connection of the sensor
Possible Possible
For resistance thermometer
Pt100...1000, 0.00385 Alpha to DIN IEC 751 Ni 100...1000, 0.00618 Alpha to DIN 43760 Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit
5-124
Analog Modules
5.23.1
Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

You set the mode of operation of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit in STEP 7.
Parameters
Table 5-70 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit Parameter Enable Diagnostic interrupt1) Hardware interrupt1) Value Range Default2) Parameter Type Dynamic Scope
No No
Module
Destination CPU for

interrupt Trigger for hardware interrupt3)
Static
Module

Diagnostics Wire break Underflow Overflow Measurement Measuring type
32767 to 32768 32768 to 32767 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Disabled RTD-4L Thermal resistor (linear, four-conductor terminal) RTD-3L Thermal resistor (linear, three-conductor terminal) Refer to Section 5.23.2 for the measuring ranges of the input channels that you can set. Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit For platinium (Pt) 0.00385 W/W/ C 0.003916 W/W/ C 0.003902 W/W/ C 0.003920 W/W/ C For nickel (Ni) 0.00618 W/W/ C 0.00672 W/W/ C 60 Hz; 50 Hz; none
Dynamic
Channel
No No No RTD-3L Static Channel
Measuring range Temperature unit Temperature

coefficient for temperature measurement with thermal resistor (RTD)
Pt 100 standard Degrees Celsius 0.00385
Static
Module
Static
Channel
Interference
suppression
60 Hz
5-125
Analog Modules
Table 5-70 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit, continued Parameter Value Range None Low Average High Default2) None Static Channel Parameter Type Scope
Smoothing
1)
If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER-1/ER-2. 2) Only in the CC (central controller) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings. 3) The limit values must be within the temperature range of the connected sensor.

You fill find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in Section 5.6. The following figure shows for the module the number of module cycles, in the case of a step response, after which the smoothed analog value is applied to almost 100%, depending on the smoothing setting. The figure applies to every change of signal at an analog input.
63 50
20
40
60
80
100
Module cycles
Figure 5-40
Step Response of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit
5-126
Analog Modules

The SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit is capable of diagnostics. Below you will find an overview of the displays that are possible for modules with parameter assignment errors.
Table 5-71 Diagnostic Information of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit Incorrect Parameter Assignment Of the module Possible Display Explanation You can find an explanation of the diagnostic information in Tables 4-7 and 5-46 on Pages 4-10 and 5-64.
Module malfunction Internal malfunction Wrong parameters Module not configured. Module malfunction Internal malfunction There is a channel error Wrong parameters Channel information available Vector channel error Channel parameter assignment error correspond to the parameter assignment
User calibration doesnt
5-127
Analog Modules
5.23.2
Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit
Measuring Methods
As the measuring method for the input channels, you can set the temperature measurement.
Unused Channels
Disable the Measuring Type parameter for unused channels. In this way you shorten the scan time of the module.
Measuring Ranges
You set the measuring ranges with the Measuring Type parameter in STEP 7.
Table 5-72 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit Method Selected RTD-3L: Thermal resistor (linear, three-conductor terminal) (temperature measurement) RTD-4L: Thermal resistor (linear, four-conductor terminal) (temperature measurement) Measuring Range Pt 100 standard Pt 200 standard Pt 500 standard Pt 1000 standard Ni 100 standard Ni 1000 standard Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the temperature range
Default Settings
The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are Thermal resistor (linear, 3-conductor terminal) for the measuring method and Pt 100 standard for the measuring range. You can use this measuring method with this measuring range without parameterizing the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit with STEP 7.
5-128
Analog Modules
5.24
Characteristics
The analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit has the following features: 8 isolated differential inputs for voltage/current/temperature measurement Unlimited measuring range selection Linearization of the thermocouple characteristic curves 16-bit resolution Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded Analog section isolated from CPU The maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels and between the channel and the central ground point is 120 VAC Field connection (6ES7431-7K00-6AA0) with internal reference temperature (included with the product)
Calibration Software
The calibration software is only available on the Internet. You can find the current version under article ID 12443337. After installing the software, you can define user-specific calibration values for each channel and and each module input range. You will find further information under ID 12436891 at the Customer Support FAQ site.
5-129
Analog Modules
M0+ M0+ R0 M0 CH0

A/D converter Internal supply
CH1
CH2
CH3
Bus S7-400
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
Figure 5-41
Note An external protective network is required in the signal lines in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5 (150 V/14 mm MOV across each + and input to chassis ground)
5-130
Analog Modules

Optional connector (screw-type) INTF EXTF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Connector with temperature reference Thermocouples Voltage measurement Current measurement
M0+ M0+ R0 M0 M1+ M1+ R1 M1 M2+ M2+ R2 M2 M3+ M3+ R3 M3 M4+ M4+ R4 M4 M5+ M5+ R5 M5 M6+ M6+ R6 M6 M7+ M7+ R7 M7
M0+ M0+ R0 M0 M1+ M1+ R1 M1 M2+ M2+ R2 M2 M3+ M3+ R3 M3 M4+ M4+ R4 M4 M5+ M5+ R5 M5 M6+ M6+ R6 M6 M7+ M7+ R7 M7
CH0
Word 0
CH1
Word 1
CH2
Word 2
CH3
Word 3
CH4
Word 4
CH5
Word 5
Tr
Tr
CH6
Word 6
Tr
Tr
CH7
Word 7
6ES7492-1AL00-0AA0
6ES7431-7KF00-6AA0
Figure 5-42
Terminal Assignment Diagram SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit
5-131
Analog Modules

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 25 x 290 x 210 Approx. 650 g Data for Specific Module Number of inputs Length of cable 8 200 m Suppression of Interference, Limits of Error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 " 1%), (f1 = interference frequency) n= 1.2 ...
Common-mode interference (Ucm < 120 V) Current, thermoelement and Voltage ranges < 2.5 V Voltage ranges 2.5 V > 120 dB
Shielded
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Isolation
> 95 dB
Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels
Yes Yes
Crosstalk between inputs (Ucm < 120 V) Current, thermoelement and Voltage ranges 2.5 V Voltage ranges# # V 2.5 > 120 dB
Permitted potential difference Between the inputs (UCM ) Between MANA and Minternal (UISO) 120 VAC 120 VAC
> 95 dB > 80 dB
1500 VAC
Series-mode noise (peak value of noise < nominal value of input range)
From the backplane bus (5 V)
Max. 1200 mA Typ. 4.6 W
Analog Value Generation Measuring principle Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per channel) Integration (Does not go into the response time) Yes 2.5 10 16.7 16.7 20 20 100 100
Voltage input Current input
" 0.30 % " 0.50 %
Temperature error (reference to the input range)2 across the temprature range of: 3.6 C 2.9 C 2.1 C 5.0 C 4.6 C 3.8 C 5.7 C 5.3 C 6.7 C 7.3 C
Type U -100 C to 600 C Type L 0 C to 900 C Type T -100 C to 400 C Type J -100 C to 1200 C Type E -100 C to 1000 C Type K 0 C to 1372 C
Parameters can be assigned Integration time in milliseconds Basic conversion time including integration time in milliseconds Resolution in bits (incl. overrange) Noise suppression for frequency f1 in Hz
16 bits 400 60 50 10
Type N 0 C to 1300 C Type S 200 C to 1769 C Type R 200 C to 1769 C Type B 400 C to 1820 C 400
Smoothing of the measured values Basic reaction time of module (enable all channels)
Parameters can be assigned in 4 stages 40 67 80
5-132
Analog Modules
Suppression of Interference, Limits of Error Basic error (operational limit at 25 _C, referred to input range) Interrupts
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Voltage input Current input Temperature error (reference to the input range)2 across temprature range of :
" 0.10 % " 0.17 %
Hardware interrupt Hardware interrupt on exceeding the limit value Diagnostic interrupt Group error display For internal fault For external fault
Programmable Programmable
Programmable Programmable Programmable Red LED (INTF) Red LED (EXTF) Yes
Type U 100 C to 600 C Type L 0 C to 900 C Type T 100 C to 400 C Type J 100 C to 1200 C Type E 100 C to 1000 C Type K 0 C to 1372 C Type N 0 C to 1300 C Type S 200 C to 1769 C Type R 200 C to 1769 C Type B 400 C to 1820 C Linearity error (with reference to the input range) Repeatability (in steady state at 25 _C, with reference to the input range) Connection for compensating the cold junction Operational limit
1.2 C 1.0 C 0.7 C 1.7 C 1.5 C 1.3 C 1.9 C 1.8 C 2.2 C 2.2 C Additional error " 0.05% Additional error " 0.05%
Diagnostic information can be displayed wirebreak
Monitoring on Data for Selecting a Sensor Input range (rated values)/Input resistance
Voltage
" 25 mV " 50 mV " 80 mV "100 mV "250 mV "500 mV "1V " 2.5 V "5V " 10 V
>2 M >2 M >2 M >2 M >2 M >2 M >2 M >2 M >2 M >2 M
Current
6ES7431-7KF006AA0
20 mA 50 + 4 to 20 mA 50 10 mA 50 5 mA 50 3,2 mA 50 Types B, N, E, R, S, J, L, T, K, U 35 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (duty factor 1:20) 32 mA >2 M
Thermocouple
Error internal temperature compensation
Additional error 2.0#C
Maximum input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) Maximum input current for current input (destruction limit) Connection of the sensor
For measuring voltage For measuring current As four-wire transmitter
Possible Possible Types B, N, E, R, S, J, L, T, K, U Yes, programmable Possible Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit
Characteristic linearization For thermocouples
Temperature compensation Internal temperature compensation
5-133
Analog Modules
Notes to the technical specifications
Note 6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0 does not support the high and low ranges defined in S7 for thermocouples. When the module reaches the operational limit defined for S7, the system outputs a corrsponding underflow (32768) or overflow (32767) signal.
1) The
Note
2) Thermocouples
can be operated above the specified temperaturs. The specified accuracy improves in the lower range and at higher temperature. The accuracy of the thermocouple module can be calculated for other temperature ranges based on the accuracy limit values of the input voltage and the emf/C of the thermocouple.
5-134
Analog Modules
5.24.1
Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x16 Bit

You set the mode of operation of the SM 431; AI 8 x16 Bit in STEP 7.
Parameter
You will find a description of the procedure of assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 5.7. An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below.
Table 5-73 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x16 Bit Parameter Enable Diagnostic interrupt1) Hardware interrupt1) Value Range Default2) Parameter Type Dynamic Scope
No No
Module
Destination CPU for

interrupt Trigger for hardware interrupt3)
Static
Module

Diagnostics Wire break Reference channel error Underflow Overflow Measurement Measuring method
32767 to 32768 32768 to 32767 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Disabled U Voltage 4DMU Current (four-wire transmitter) TC-L Thermocouple (linear) Refer to Section 5.24.2 for the measuring ranges of the input channels that you can set. 273.15 to 327.67 oC 327.68 to 327.67 oF Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz None, Low, Average, High
Dynamic
Channel
No No No No TC-L
Static
Channel
Static Type J
Channel
Measuring range Reference

temperature
100 oC Degrees Celsius 60 Hz None
Dynamic
Module
Temperature unit4) Interference

suppression
Static
Module
Smoothing
5-135
Analog Modules
Table 5-73 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x16 Bit, continued Parameter Value Range Default2) Internal Parameter Type Static Scope Module
Reference junction
None (reference to the cold Internal junction) Reference temperature value dynamic
1)
If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER-1/ER-2. 2) Only in the CC (central controller) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings. 3) The limit values must be within the temperature range of the connected sensor. 4) Valid for the format of the output temperature and the dynamic reference temperature

You fill find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in Section 5.6. The cycle time of the module is a constant in the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit that is not dependent on the number of channels that are enabled. It therefore has no effect on the step response, which is defined by the parameter assignment of interference frequency suppression and smoothing.
Step Response
Table 5-74 How Response Times Depend on the configured Interference Frequency Suppression and Smoothing of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit Interference Frequency Suppression in Hz 10 50 60 400 Response Time in ms with Configured Smoothing: None 100 20 16.7 10 Low 200 40 33.3 20 Average 1600 320 267 160 High 3200 640 533 320
The following figures illustrate the contents of Table 5-74. They show the response time required for a step response before the smoothed analog value is almost applied to 100%. The figures apply to every change of signal at an analog input.
5-136
Analog Modules
Step Response at an Interference Frequency Suppression of 10 Hz

Smoothing: None: Low: Average: High:
0 100 200 Figure 5-43
800
1600
2400
3200 Response time in ms
Step Response at 10 Hz Interference Frequency Suppression of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

40 80 20
160
240
320
400
480
560
640
Response time in ms
Figure 5-44
5-137
Analog Modules

80 0 16.7 33.3 Figure 5-45
160
240 320 267
400
480
560 640 533 Response time in ms

0 10 20 Figure 5-46
80
160
240
320
400
480
560 640 Response time in ms
5-138
Analog Modules

The SM 431; AI 8 16 Bit has diagnostics capability. Below you will find an overview of the displays that are possible for modules with parameter assignment errors.
Table 5-75 Diagnostic Information of the SM 431; AI 8 Incorrect Parameter Assignment Of the module Possible Display 16 Bit Explanation You can find an explanation of the diagnostic information in Tables 4-7 and 5-46 on Pages 4-10 and 5-64.
Module malfunction Internal malfunction Wrong parameters Module not configured. Module malfunction Internal malfunction There is a channel error Wrong parameters Channel information available Vector channel error Channel parameter assignment error correspond to the parameter assignment
User calibration doesnt
5.24.2
Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels: Voltage measurement Current measurement Temperature measurement You specify the setting by means of the Measuring Type parameter in STEP 7.
Unused Channels
Disable the Measuring Type parameter for unused channels. In this way you shorten the scan time of the module.
5-139
Analog Modules
Measuring Ranges
You set the measuring ranges by means of the Measuring Range parameter in STEP 7.
Table 5-76 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit Method Selected U: Voltage Measuring Range "25 mV "50 mV "80 mV "100 mV "250 mV "500 mV "1 V "2.5 V "5 V "10 V 1 to 5 V 4DMU: Current (four-wire transmitter) "3.2 mA "5 mA "10 mA "20 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA TC-L: Thermocouple (linear) (temperature measurement) Type B Type N Type E Type R Type S Type J Type L Type T Type K Type U You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the temperature range You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the current measuring range Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5.3.1 in the voltage measuring range
Default Settings
The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are Thermocouple (linear) for the measuring method and Type J for the measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit in STEP 7.
5-140
Analog Modules
5.25
Analog Output Module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit; (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0)
Characteristics
The SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit has the following features: 8 outputs The individual output channels can be programmed as Voltage outputs Current outputs 13-bit resolution Analog section Isolated to CPU and load voltage Maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels and the channels against MANA is 3 VDC
Block Diagram of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit
CH0 A CH1
Bus control
Bus S7-400
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5 D CH6
CH7
24 V Analog supply L+/M
Figure 5-47
Block Diagram of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit
5-141
Analog Modules
Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit

Voltage output
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Current output
L+
L+ QV0 S0+ S0 CH0 Word 0
L+ QI0 CH0 Word 0
QV1 S1+ S1
CH1
Word 2
QI1
CH1
Word 2
QV2 S2+ S2
CH2
Word 4
QI2
CH2
Word 4
QV3 S3+ S3 MANA M ANA QV4 S4+ S4
CH3
Word 6
QI3
CH3
Word 6
M ANA CH4 Word 8 QI4 CH4 Word 8
QV5 S5+ S5
CH5
Word 10
QI5
CH5
Word 10
QV6 S6+ S6
CH6
Word 12
QI6
CH6
Word 12
QV7 S7+ S7 M
CH7
Word 14
QI7
CH7
Word 14
Figure 5-48
Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit
5-142
Analog Modules
Technical Specifications of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit

Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (in millimeters) Weight 25 x 290 x 210 Approx. 650 g Data for Specific Module Number of outputs Length of cable 8 Max. 200 m Analog Value Generation Resolution including sign Conversion time (per channel) 13 bits 420 ms 300 ms
In the ranges 1 V to 5 V and 4 mA to 20 mA In all ranges
Shielded
Basic response time of module (all channels enabled) In the ranges 1 V to 5 V and 4 mA to 20 mA In all the other ranges 3.36 ms 2.4 ms
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Supply voltage of the electronics L+ Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC 24 VDC Yes
Settling time For resistive load For capacitive load For inductive load 0.1 ms 3.5 ms 0.5 ms
Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels Between channels and load voltage L+ Between the outputs (ECM) Between S and MANA (UCM) Between MANA and Minternal (UISO) Between bus and L+/M Between bus and analog section Between bus and chassis ground Between analog section and L+/M Between analog section and chassis ground Between L+/M and chassis ground Yes No Yes
Suppression of Interference, Limits of Error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 " 1%), (f1 = interference frequency) n= 1.2 ...
3 VDC 3 VDC 75 VDC/60 VAC 2120 VDC 2120 VDC 500 VDC 707 VDC 2120 VDC 2120 VDC
Common-mode interference (UCM < AC 3 Vss/50 Hz)
>60 dB
Crosstalk between the outputs
> 40 dB
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the output range)
Voltage outputs " 10 V 0 V to 10 V 1 V to 5 V " 20 mA 4 mV to 20 mV " 0.5 % " 0.5 % " 0.5 % " 1% " 1%
Insulation tested
Current outputs
Basic error (operational limit at 25 C, referred to the output range)
Voltage outputs " 10 V 0 V to 10 V 1 V to 5 V " 20 mA 0 mA to 20 mA " 0.5% " 0.5% " 0.5% " 0.5% " 0.5% " 0.02% K " 0.05%
Current consumption From the backplane bus Power supply and load voltage L+ (with rated load) Power supply and load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 150 mA Max. 400 mA Max. 200 mA Typ. max. 9 W
Current outputs
Temperature error (with reference to the output range) Linearity error (with reference to the output range)
5-143
Analog Modules
Repeat accuracy (in the steady state at 25 C, referred to the output range) Output ripple; band width 0 to 50 kHz (with reference to the output range)
" 0.05%
Destruction limit for voltages/ currents connected from outside
" 0.05%
Voltage at outputs to MANA
Max. 20 V continuous 75 V for 1 ms (cycle factor 1 : 20) Max. 40 mA continuous
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Interrupts Diagnostic functions Substitute value can be applied None None No
Current
Connection of actuators
For voltage output Two-conductor connection Possible, without compensation for circuit resistance Possible
Data for Selecting an Actuator Output ranges (rated values)
Voltage
" 10 V 0 V to 10 V 1 V to 5 V " 20 mA 0 mA to 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA
Four-conductor connection (measuring circuit)
Current
For current output Two-conductor connection Possible
Load resistance (in the nominal range of the output)
For voltage outputs capacitive load
Min. 1 kW Max. 1 mF Max. 500 W 600 W with reduced UCM to < 1 V Max. 1 mH
For current outputs
Inductive load
Voltage outputs
Short-circuit protection Short-circuit current
Yes Max. 30 mA
Current outputs No-load voltage Max. 19 V
5-144
Analog Modules
5.25.1
Commissioning the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit
Parameter
You will find a description of the procedure of assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 5.7. You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values in Table 5-42, on page 5-41.
Assigning Parameters to Channels

You can configure each output channel of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit individually. You can thus assign different parameters to each output channel.
5.25.2
Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit
Wiring the Analog Outputs

You can wire the outputs as voltage or current outputs, or disable them. You wire the outputs by means of the Type of Output parameter in STEP 7.
Unused Channels
To ensure that output channels of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit remain de-energized, you must disable the Type of Output parameter and leave the terminal open.
Output Ranges
You program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in STEP 7.
Table 5-77 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 432; AO8 x 13 Bit Selected Type of Output Voltage Output Range 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V "10 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA "20 mA Description You will find the digital analog values in Section 5.3.2 in the voltage and current output ranges
Current
Default Settings
The default settings of the module are Voltage for the output type and " 10 V for the output range. You can use this combination of output type and output range without parameterizing the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit in STEP 7.
5-145
Analog Modules
5-146
Interface Modules
6
Description Page 6-2 6-7 6-10 6-14 6-18
Chapter Overview
Section 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5
Common Features of the Interface Modules The Interface Modules IM 460-0; (6ES7460-0AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-0; (6ES7461-0AA01-0AA0) The Interface Modules IM 460-1; (6ES7460-1BA01-0AB0) and IM 461-1; (6ES7461-1BA01-0AA0) The Interface Modules IM 460-3; (6ES7460-3AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-3; (6ES7461-3AA01-0AA0) The Interface Modules IM 460-4; (6ES7460-4AA01-0AB0), IM 461-4; (6ES7461-4AA01-0AA0)
You will find a description of the IM 463-2 in Chapter 7.
6-1
Interface Modules
6.1
Common Features of the Interface Modules
Function
Interface modules (a send IM and a receive IM) are required if one or more expansion units (EU) are to be connected to a central controller (CC). This configuration is described in the Installation Manual, Chapter 4.
Configuration
Interface modules must always be used together. The send modules (send IMs) are inserted in the CC, whilst the corresponding receive modules (receive IMs) are plugged into the series-connected EU.
Table 6-1 Partner IM 460-0 IM 461-0 IM 460-1 IM 461-1 IM 460-3 IM 461-3 IM 460-4 IM 461-4 Interface Modules of the S7-400 Areas of Application Send IM for local link without PS transfer; with communication bus Receive IM for local link without PS transfer; with communication bus Send IM for local link with PS transfer; without communication bus Receive IM for local link with PS transfer; without communication bus Send IM for remote link up to 102.25 m; with communication bus Receive IM for remote link up to 102.25 m; with communication bus Send IM for remote link up to 605 m; without communication bus Receive IM for remote link up to 605 m; without communication bus
Overview of the Properties of the Connections

Note the rules for connections in the section after next.
Table 6-2 Overview of the connections Local connection Send IM Receive IM Max. number of connectable EMs per chain Max. distance 5 V transfer Max. current transfer per interface Communication bus transmission 460-0 461-0 4 5m No Yes 460-1 461-1 1 1.5 m Yes 5A No Remote connection 460-3 461-3 4 102.25 m No Yes 460-4 461-4 4 605 m No No
6-2
Interface Modules
Connection possibilities for central racks and expansion racks

IM 460-4 IM 460-3 IM 460-1 IM 460-0
Central rack CR
Expansion without 5 V local transfer Expansion rack ER 1 Expansion rack ER 4
IM 461-0
IM 461-0
Chain length max. 5 m Expansion with 5 V local transfer Expansion rack ER 1
IM 461-1
Chain length max. 1.5 m
Remote expansion Expansion rack ER 1 Expansion rack ER 4
IM 461-3
IM 461-3
Chain length max. 102.25 m Expansion rack ER 1 Expansion rack ER 4
IM 461-4 Chain length max. 605 m
IM 461-4
6-3
Interface Modules
Rules for Connection

When you connect a central rack to expansion racks, you must observe the following rules: You can connect up to 21 ERs of the S7-400 to one CR. The ERs are assigned numbers to identify them. The rack number must be set on the coding switch of the receive IM. Any rack number between 1 and 21 may be assigned. Numbers must not be duplicated. You may insert up to six send IMs in one CR. However, only two send IMs with 5 V transfer are allowed in one CR. Each chain connected to the interface of a send IM can comprise up to four ERs (without 5 V transfer) or one ER (with 5 V transfer). The exchange of data via the communication bus is limited to 7 racks, meaning the CR and ER numbers 1 to 6. The maximum (total) cable lengths specified for the type of connection must not be exceeded.
Table 6-3 Cable for different connections Connection type Local connection with 5 V transfer via IM 460-1 and IM 461-1 Local connection without 5 V transfer via IM 460-0 and IM 461-0 Remote connection via IM 460-3 and IM 461-3 Remote connection via IM 460-4 and IM 461-4 Maximum (total) line length 1.5 m 5m 102.25 m 605 m
Terminator
The bus must be terminated in the last EU of a line. To do this, plug in the appropriate terminator in the lower front connector of the receive IM in the last EU of the line. Unused front connectors in a send IM do not have to be terminated. The IM 461-1 does not require a terminator.
Table 6-4 Terminators for the Receive IMs Receive IM IM 461-0 IM 461-3 IM 461-4 Terminator 6ES7461-0AA00-7AA0 6ES7461-3AA00-7AA0 6ES7461-4AA00-7AA0
6-4
Interface Modules
The following figure shows you a typical configuration with send IMs, receive IMs and terminators.
Receive IM
Terminator Receive IM
Send IM
CC Figure 6-1 Example: Configuration with Send IMs, Receive IMs and Terminators
Connecting Cable
Precut cables are available in different fixed lengths for connecting the individual interface modules. (See Appendix C: Accessories and Spare Parts)
Table 6-5 Connecting Cable for Interface Modules Connecting Cable 6ES7468-1... (P bus and communication bus are transferred) 6ES7468-3... (P bus is transferred; mounting rack is supplied with current via the IM) 6ES7468-1...
Interface Modules IM 460-0 and IM 461-0 IM 460-3 and IM 461-3 IM 460-1 and IM 461-1 IM 460-4 and IM 461-4
6-5
Interface Modules
Installation and Removal of the Modules During Operation

Please read the following warning on the insertion and removal of the interface modules and associated connecting cables. Caution Data may be lost or corrupted. Removing or inserting the interface modules and/or their associated connecting cables under voltage can result in the loss or corruption of data. Switch off the power supply modules to the CC and EUs you are working on before you carry out any changes.
6-6
Interface Modules
6.2
The Interface Modules IM 460-0; (6ES7460-0AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-0; (6ES7461-0AA01-0AA0)
Position of the Operator Controls and Indicators of the IM 460-0 and IM 461-0
IM 461-0
IM 460-0 LEDs EXTF C1 C2
INTF EXTF
DIP switch
Under cover
Connector X1: Interface C1 IN
Connector X2: Interface C2 OUT
Figure 6-2
6-7
Interface Modules
Function
The interface module pair IM 460-0 (send IM) and IM 461-0 (receive IM) are used for a local link.
Parameter Assignment for the Mounting Rack Number

Using the DIP switch on the front panel of the module, you must set the number of the mounting rack in which the receive IM is installed. The permitted range is 1 to 21.
Setting/Changing the Number

Proceed as follows: 1. Put the switch of the power supply module in the EU in which you want to make a change in the position (Output voltage 0 V). 2. Enter the number using the DIP switch. 3. Switch the power supply module on again.
Operator Controls and Indicators on the Send IM

Table 6-6 EXTF LED (red) C1 LED (green) C1 LED (flashing green) C2 LED (green) C2 LED (flashing green) Front connectors X1 and X2 Operator controls and Indicators on Send IM Lights up in the event of an external fault Line 1 or line 2 is faulty (terminator missing or broken cable) Line 1 (via front connector X1, connection 1) is correct. An EU in the line is not ready for operation because
The power supply module is not switched on or A module has not yet completed the initialization process
Line 2 (via front connector X2, connection 2) is correct. An EU in the line is not ready for operation because
Connector (output) for line 1 and line 2 X1 = upper front connector; X2 = lower front connector
6-8
Interface Modules
Operator Controls and Indicators of the Receive IM

Table 6-7 Operator controls and Indicators on Receive IM Lights up if a rack number > 21 or = 0 was set. Lights up if you have changed the rack number under voltage. EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault (line fault, for example, if the terminator is not inserted or if a module has not yet completed the initialization process). DIP switch to set the number of the mounting rack.
INTF LED (red)
DIP switch
Front connector X1 Upper connector (input) for the connecting cable from the previous interface module. Front connector X2 Lower connector (output) for the connecting cable to the next interface module or for the terminator.
Technical Specifications of the IM 460-0 and IM 461-0

Maximum line length (total) Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Weight 5m 25 x 290 x 280 600 g 610 g Typ. 130 mA Max. 140 mA Typ. 260 mA Max. 290 mA Typ. 650 mW Max. 700 mW Typ. 1300 mW Max. 1450 mW Terminator Backup current 6ES7461-0AA00-7AA0 No
IM 460-0 IM 461-0
Current consumption from the S7-400 bus 5 VDC
IM 460-0 IM 461-0
Power loss
IM 460-0 IM 461-0
6-9
Interface Modules
6.3
The Interface Modules IM 460-1; (6ES7460-1BA01-0AB0) and IM 461-1; (6ES7461-1BA01-0AA0)
IM 461-1 INTF EXTF
5 VDC
DIP switch
Under cover Connector X1: Interface C1 IN
Connector X2: Interface C2
Figure 6-3
6-10
Interface Modules
Function
The interface module pair IM 460-1 (send IM) and IM 461-1 (receive IM) are used for a local link (up to a maximum 1.5 m in total). A 5 V supply voltage is also transferred with these interface modules. Please particularly remember the following points: The current requirements of the module plugged into the EU must not exceed 5 V/5 A. You can only connect one EU per line. The modules in this mounting rack are not supplied with 24 V and are not backed up. The communication bus is not transferred with the interface module pair IM 460-1 and IM 461-1. You must not use a power supply module in the EU. Note If you connect an EU via a local link with 5 V transmission, ungrounded operation is prescribed for the EU (see Installation Manual, Chapter 4)
Parameter Assignment for the Mounting Rack Number

Using the DIP switch on the front panel of the module, you must set the number of the mounting rack in which the receive IM is installed. The permitted range is 1 to 21.

Proceed as follows: 1. Put the power supply module in the CC into the position 2. Enter the number using the DIP switch. 3. Switch the power supply module on again. (Output voltage 0 V).
6-11
Interface Modules

Table 6-8 Operator controls and indicators on the Send IM Lights up in the event of an external fault Line 1 or line 2 is faulty (terminator missing or open circuit) Line 1 (via front connector X1, connection 1) is correct. A module has not yet completed the initialization process EXTF LED (red) C1 LED (green) C1 LED (flashing green) C2 LED (green) C2 LED (flashing green) Front connectors X1 and X2
Line 2 (via front connector X2, connection 2) is correct. A module has not yet completed the initialization process
Connector (output) for line 1 and line 2 X1 = upper front connector; X2 = lower front connector

Table 6-9 Operator controls and indicators on the Receive IM Lights up if a rack number > 21 or = 0 was set. Lights up if you have changed the rack number under voltage. Lights up in the event of an external fault (line fault, for example, if the terminator is not inserted or if a module has not yet completed the initialization process, but not when the CC is switched off) Power supply in the EU is correct. DIP switch to set the number of the mounting rack. Upper connector (input) for the connecting cable from the previous interface module.
INTF LED (red) EXTF LED (red) 5 VDC (green) DIP switch Front connector X1
Caution Modules can be damaged. If you want to connect an EU via the IM 461-1 interface module and use a power supply module in this EU, you might damage the modules. Dont use a power supply module in an EU that you want to connect to the CC via the IM 461-1 interface module.
6-12
Interface Modules

Maximum line length (total) Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Weight 1.5 m 25 x 290 x 280 600 g 610 g Typ. 50 mA Typ. 120 mA max. 85 mA max. 100 mA
IM 460-1 IM 461-1
IM 460-1 IM 461-1
Power loss
IM 460-1 IM 461-1
Power supply for EU Backup current
Typ. 250 mW Typ. 500 mW 5 V/5 A per line No
max. 425 mW max. 600 mW
6-13
Interface Modules
6.4
IM 461-3
INTF EXTF
DIP switch
Under cover Connector X1: Interface C1
IN
Figure 6-4
6-14
Interface Modules
Function
The interface module pair IM 460-3 (send IM) and IM 461-3 (receive IM) are used for a remote link of up to a maximum 102.25 m (exactly: 100 m plus inputs/outputs of 0.75 m in the line).
Parameter assignment
Using the DIP switch on the front panel of the module, you must set the number of the mounting rack that the receive IM is installed on. The permitted range is 1 to 21. If required, you can change the distance setting for the line on the programming device using STEP 7. The default setting for the distance is 100 m. Ensure that the distance corresponds as closely as possible to the current length (the sum of all the connecting cables per line) as this will accelerate data transmission. Note The distance set must always be longer than the actual length of cable per line.

Proceed as follows: 1. Put the switch of the power supply module in the EU in which you want to make a change in the position (Output voltage 0 V). 2. Enter the number using the DIP switch. 3. Switch the power supply module on again.
6-15
Interface Modules

Table 6-10 Operator controls and indicators on the Send IM EXTF LED (red) C1 LED (green) C1 LED (flashing green) C2 LED (green) C2 LED (flashing green) Lights up in the event of an external fault Line 1 or line 2 is faulty (terminator missing or broken cable) Line 1 (via front connector X1, connection 1) is correct. An EU in the line is not ready for operation because

Table 6-11 Operator controls and indicators on the Receive IM INTF LED (red) EXTF LED (red) Lights up if a rack number > 21 or = 0 was set.
Lights up if you have changed the rack number under voltage. Lights up in the event of an external fault (line fault, for example, if the terminator is not inserted or if a module has not yet completed the initialization process, or if the CC is switched off) DIP switch DIP switch to set the number of the mounting rack. Front connector X1 Upper connector (input) for the connecting cable from the previous interface module. Front connector X2 Lower connector (output) for the connecting cable to the next interface module or for the terminator.
6-16
Interface Modules

Maximum line length (total) Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Weight 102 m 25 x 290 x 280 630 g 620 g Typ. 1350 mA Max. 1550 mA Typ. 590 mA Max. 620 mA Typ. 6750 mW Max. 7750 mW Typ. 2950 mW Max. 3100 mW Terminator Backup current 6ES7461-3AA00-7AA0 No
IM 460-3 IM 461-3
IM 460-3 IM 461-3
Power loss
IM 460-3 IM 461-3
6-17
Interface Modules
6.5
6ES7461-4AA01-0AA0 IM 460-4 IM 461-4 LEDs EXTF C1 C2 INTF EXTF
DIP switch
Under cover Connector X1: Interface C1
IN
Figure 6-5
6-18
Interface Modules
Function
The interface module pair IM 460-4 (send IM) and IM 461-4 (receive IM) are used for a remote link of up to a maximum 605 m (exactly: 600 m plus inputs/outputs of 1.5 m in the line).
Parameter assignment
Using the DIP switch on the front panel of the module, you must set the number of the mounting rack in which the receive IM is installed. The permitted range is 1 to 21. If required, you can change the distance setting for the line on the programming device using STEP 7. The default setting for the distance is 600 m. Ensure that the distance corresponds as closely as possible to the current length (the sum of all the connecting cables per line) as this will accelerate data transmission. Note The distance set must always be longer than the actual length of cable per line.

Proceed as follows: 1. Put the switch of the power supply module in the EU in which you want to make the change in the position (Output voltage 0 V). 2. Enter the number using the DIP switch. 3. Switch the power supply module on again.
6-19
Interface Modules

Table 6-12 Operator controls and indicators on the Send IM EXTF LED (red) C1 LED (green) C1 LED (flashing green) C2 LED (green) C2 LED (flashing green) Lights up in the event of an external fault Line 1 or line 2 is faulty (terminator missing or broken cable) Line 1 (via front connector X1, connection 1) is correct. An EU in the line is not ready for operation because

Table 6-13 Operator controls and indicators on the Receive IM INTF LED (red) EXTF LED (red) Lights up if a rack number > 21 or = 0 was set.
Lights up if you have changed the rack number under voltage. Lights up in the event of an external fault (line fault, for example, if the terminator is not inserted or if a module has not yet completed the initialization process, or if the CC is switched off) DIP switch DIP switch to set the number of the mounting rack. Front connector X1 Upper connector (input) for the connecting cable from the previous interface module. Front connector X2 Lower connector (output) for the connecting cable to the next interface module or for the terminator.
6-20
Interface Modules

Maximum line length (total) Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Weight 605 m 25 x 290 x 280 630 g 620 g Typ. 1350 mA Max. 1550 mA Typ. 590 mA Max. 620 mA Typ. 6750 mW Max. 7750 mW Typ. 2950 mW Max. 3100 mW Terminator Backup current 6ES7461-4AA00-7AA0 No
IM 460-4 IM 461-4
IM 460-4 IM 461-4
Power loss
IM 460-4 IM 461-4
Compatibility
You cannot use the IM 460-4 and IM 461-4 interface modules with CPUs that have the following order numbers: 6ES7412-1XF00-0AB0 6ES7413-1XG00-0AB0 6ES7413-2XG00-0AB0 6ES7414-1XG00-0AB0 6ES7414-2XG00-0AB0 6ES7416-1XJ00-0AB0
6-21
Interface Modules
6-22
IM 463-2
Chapter Overview
Section 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 Description Using SIMATIC S5 Expansion Units in an S7-400 Rules for Connecting S5 Expansion Units Operator Controls and Indicators Installing and Connecting the IM 463-2 Setting the Operating Modes of the IM 314 Configuring S5 Modules for Operation in the S7-400 Pin Assignments of the 721 Connecting Cable Terminating Connector for IM 314 Technical Specifications
7
Page 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-6 7-8 7-10 7-11 7-13 7-14
Order Number
IM 463-2 6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0
7-1
IM 463-2
7.1
Using SIMATIC S5 Expansion Units in an S7-400
Area of Application
The IM 463-2 interface module is used for distributed connection of S5 expansion units to an S7-400. You can use the IM 463-2 in the CR of the S7-400. In the S5 expansion unit, you use an IM 314. This allows you to connect the following S5 expansion units to an S7-400: EU 183U EU 185U EU 186U ER 701-2 ER 701-3 Accordingly, you can use all digital and analog I/O modules suitable for these EUs or ERs.
Basic Requirement
If you connect an S5 expansion unit to a CR of the S7-400 via an IM 463-2, the SIMATIC S5 basic requirements concerning EMC, ambient conditions, etc., apply for the overall system. Note In environments contaminated by radiated noise, you must apply the type 721 cable shield (see Installation Manual, Chapter 4).
Expanding the Distributed Connection

You can also centrally expand the EUs connected in a distributed configuration via an IM 463-2. The following table lists the S5 interface modules that you can use for this purpose.
Table 7-1 S5 Interface Modules Module IM 300 6ES5300-5CA11 6ES5300-3AB11 6ES5300-5LB11 6ES5306-7LA11 Order Number
IM 306
7-2
IM 463-2
7.2
Rules for Connecting S5 Expansion Units
Introduction
When you connect S5 expansion units to an S7-400 via the IM 463-2, there are rules to observe with regard to cable length, maximum expansion, use of a terminating connector and permissible potential differences.
Cable Length
The maximum cable length per IM 463-2 from the CR of the S7-400 to the last S5 expansion unit is 600 m. You set the actual cable length at the IM 463-2 (see Section 7.3).
Maximum Expansion
You can use up to four IM 463-2s in one S7-400 CR. At each IM 463-2 interface (C1 and C2), you can connect up to four S5 expansion units in a distributed configuration. You can connect further EUs centrally to the EUs connected in the distributed configuration.
Addressing of the S5 modules

All S5 address areas are available (P, Q, IM3, IM4)
Note Note that every S5 address can only be used once, even across different chains.
Terminating Connector
You must terminate the IM 314 of the last EU in each chain with the 6ES5760-1AA11 terminating connector.
Permissible Potential Differences

For the safe functioning of the distributed configuration, you must ensure that the potential difference between two devices is not more than 7 V. Use an equipotential bonding conductor.
7-3
IM 463-2
7.3
Operator Controls and Indicators
Introduction
All controls and indicators on the IM 463-2 are arranged on the front plate. The following figure shows the arrangement of the controls and indicators.
LEDs EXTF, C1, C 2
Interface selector switch
Cable length selector switch
X1 connector C1 interface
X2 connector C2 interface
Figure 7-1
Layout of the Controls and Indicators of the IM 463-2
7-4
IM 463-2
LEDs
Table 7-2 LEDs of the IM 4632 Meaning Lights up in the event of an external fault. Chain 1 or chain 2 has a fault (power supply failed in the EU; terminating connector missing; wire break, or interface selector switch wrongly set). Chain 1 (via front connector X1, connection 1) is in order. Chain 2 (via front connector X2, connection 2) is in order.
LED LED EXTF (red)
LED C1 (green) LED C2 (green)
Front connector X1 Connector plug (output) for chain 1 and chain 2. and X2 X1 = upper front connector; X2 = lower front connector
Interface Selector Switch

Table 7-3 Switch Position: Interface Selector of the IM 463-2 Meaning You use only interface C1. You use only interface C2. You use both interfaces. You use neither of the two interfaces. You do not want to operate an S5 EU at present.
Switch Position C1 ON C2 ON C1, C2 ON C1, C2 OFF
Cable Length Selector Selector

Table 7-4 Switch Position: Cable Length Selector of the IM 463-2 Meaning Cable length 1 to 100 m Cable length 100 to 250 m Cable length 250 to 450 m Cable length 450 to 600 m
Switch Position 100 250 450 600
Warning Danger of data loss. Changing the setting of the interface selector switch and the cable length selector switch in RUN mode can result in loss of data. Change the settings of these switches only in STOP mode of the CPU.
7-5
IM 463-2
7.4
Installing and Connecting the IM 463-2
Introduction
To install an IM 463-2 in a CR of the S7-400, proceed in the same way as when installing other S7-400 modules (see Installation Manual, Chapter 5). To connect an IM 463-2, follow the steps outlined below: 1. 2. 3. 4. Prepare the connecting cable Plug in the connecting cable Select the interface Select the cable length
Preparing the Connecting Cable

You can use the 721 connecting cable. However, you must change the connector housing on the connection side of the IM 463-2. Two connector housings are enclosed with every IM 463-2. You can prepare a connecting cable for an IM 463-2 using one of these connector housings and a 721 connecting cable (see Catalog ST 54.1). To prepare the connecting cable, follow the steps outlined below: 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove one connector housing on the 721 connecting cable. Open one of the connector housings enclosed with the IM 463-2. Attach this connector housing to the 721 connecting cable. Close the connector housing.
7-6
IM 463-2
Plugging in the Connecting Cable

To plug in the connecting cable, follow the steps outlined below: 1. Open the cover of the IM 463-2. 2. Plug the new connector of the connecting cable into one of the connectors of the IM 463-2. Interface C1 corresponds to the upper connector; interface C2 corresponds to the lower connector. 3. Screw the connector of the connecting cable onto the connector of the IM 463-2. 4. Close the cover.
Selecting the Interface

You select the interface with the selector switch on the front plate. Set the interface(s) here that you want to use. Make the settings on the IM 463-2 only when the CPU is in STOP mode.
Selecting the Cable Length

You select the cable length with the selector switch on the frontplate. Set the range corresponding to the chain length. Make the settings on the IM 463-2 only when the CPU is in STOP mode.
7-7
IM 463-2
7.5
Setting the Operating Modes of the IM 314
Introduction
To operate the IM 463-2, you must set on the IM 314 the S5 expansion unit used and the address area of the S5 I/O modules.
Setting the S5 Expansion Unit

You set the S5 expansion unit in which you want to use the IM 314 using jumpers BR1, BR2, and BR3 on the IM 314. The following figure shows where these jumpers are located on the IM 314 and which setting corresponds to which expansion unit.
Used in EU 185U, EU 186U
2 1 3 2 1 BR 1
Used in EU 183U
2 1 3 2 1 BR 1
S1 BR 2
off on
S1 BR 2
off on
X3
3 2 1 BR 3
X1
X3
BR 3
X1
3 2 1
X4
X2
X4
X2
Used in ER 701-2, ER 701-3

2 1 3 2 1 BR 1
S1 BR 2
off on
X3
BR 3
X1
3 2 1
X4
X2
Figure 7-2
Settings of the IM 314 with Expansion Units
7-8
IM 463-2
Setting the Address Area

The address area of the S5 I/O modules is set on the IM 314. This setting applies only for the digital and analog I/O modules. The address areas P, Q, IM3, and IM4 are available. Set the switch to the relevant position to address the digital and analog I/O modules in these areas.
Table 7-5 Settings Address Areas on the IM 314 Switch Position O = OFF, P area: Q area: F000 - F0FF F100 - F1FF S1: 0000 *) 0001 1100 1101
OFF ON
I/O Area Address
1 = ON
not relevant
IM3 area: FC00 - FCFF IM4 area: FD00 - FDFF *) Status as shipped
7-9
IM 463-2
7.6
Configuring S5 Modules for Operation in the S7-400

You configure the S5 modules using STEP 7. See the description of STEP 7 or the online help function for details of how to proceed. The following figure shows a possible connection of CRs and EUs via the IM 463-2 and IM 314.
further EU 184U, EU 187U (central)
S5 expansion unit
IM 312-3
S5 expansion unit
IM 312-3
S5 expansion unit
IM 312-5
IM 314 S5 expansion unit
IM 314
IM 300-3
IM 300-3
S5 expansion unit
IM 300-5
Terminating connector 760-1AA11
All 721 connecting cables
S5 expansion unit
IM 312-3
S5 expansion unit
IM 312-5
Central mounting rack

S7-400
IM 463-2
IM 300-3
IM 300-5
Terminating connector 760-1AA11 All 721 connecting cables max. 600 m To further S5 expansion units (distributed) (max. 4 per IM 463-2)
Figure 7-3
Connection Variant for CCs and EUs via the IM 463-2 and IM 314
7-10
IM 463-2
7.7
Table 7-6
Pin Assignments of the 721 Connecting Cable

Assignment of the Connecting Cable 721
34 1
50
17
Connector 50-Pin Contact 20 21 4 5 18 19 2 3 24 25 8 9 22 23 6 7 26 27 10 11 42 43 44 45 28 29 12 13 46 47 30 31
Bundle Ident. Sheath
Identification Foil
1 No. 16
red
2 No. 17
green
3 No. 18
yellow
4 No. 19
brown

17 50 1 34
Core Color white brown green yellow gray pink blue red white brown green yellow gray pink blue red white brown green yellow gray pink blue red white brown green yellow gray pink blue red
Connector 50-Pin Contact 20 21 4 5 18 19 2 3 24 25 8 9 22 23 6 7 26 27 10 11 42 43 44 45 28 29 12 13 46 47 30 31
7-11
IM 463-2
Table 7-6
Assignment of the Connecting Cable 721, continued Bundle Ident. Sheath Identification Foil Core Color white brown green 5 No. 20 yellow black gray pink blue red white brown 6 No. 21 green blue yellow gray pink Shield Connector 50-Pin Contact 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 48 49 14 15 32 33 -
Connector 50-Pin Contact 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 48 49 14 15 32 33 -
7-12
IM 463-2
7.8
Terminating Connector for IM 314
Introduction
The IM 314 of the last expansion unit of each chain is terminated with the 6ES5760-1AA11 terminating connector.
Table 7-7 Assignment of the Terminator 760-1AA11
Plug Connection 28 29 26 27 48 47 44 45 42 43 38 39 34 35 36 37 40 41 48 49 15 16 14 50 1) 100 W 2) 200 W

1 1 7 34 50
180-Ohm Resistance or Jumper
Plug Connection 8 9 6 7 4 5 2 3 24 25 22
1) 1)
23 20 21 18 19 12 13 10 11 30 31
1) 1) 2)
7-13
IM 463-2
7.9
Technical Specifications (6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0)

Voltages, Currents, Potentials As of STEP 7 V 2.1 Supply voltage from S7-400 bus Current consumption 25x290x280 360 g Backup current 2 parallel, symmetrical interfaces Power losses +5 V typ. 1.2 A max. 1.32 A typ. 6 W max. 6.6 W no
Programming package Associated programming package Dimensions and Weight Dimensions WxHxD (mm) Weight Module-Specific Data Number and type of interfaces Cable length: from IM 463-2 to the last IM 314 (per interface) Transmission rate Parameter sets of the signal modules Front connector
max. 600 m 2 Mbytes/s to 100 Kbytes/s differential signal in accordance with RS 485 2 connectors, 50-pin male
7-14
PROFIBUS DP Master Interface IM 467/IM 467 FO
8
Page 8-2 8-6 8-7 8-11
Chapter Overview
Section 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 Description PROFIBUS DP Master Interface IM 467/IM 467 FO Configuration Connection to PROFIBUS DP Technical Specifications
8-1
8.1
Order Numbers
IM 467 IM 467 FO 6ES7467-5GJ02-0AB0 (RS 485) 6ES7467-5FJ00-0AB0 (F0)
Application
PROFIBUS DP, standardized to IEC 617841:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1, enables rapid communication in the field between programmable controllers, PCs and field devices. Field devices are devices such as: ET 200 distributed I/O devices, drives, valve terminals, switchgear and many others. The IM 467/IM 467 FO interface module is meant to be used in an S7-400 programmable controller. It permits the S7-400 to be connected to PROFIBUS DP.
Note The PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467 or IM 467 FO is not a DP master in accordance with DPV 1.
Configuration
Configured as for the S7-400 Can be operated without a fan A maximum of 4 IM 467/IM 467 FO can be used in the central controller. There are no slot rules. The IM 467/IM 467 FO and the CP 443-5 Extended cannot be used together. The transmission rate of 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps can be set in steps using software Configuration and programming are possible via PROFIBUS DP. You must not, however, change the PROFIBUS DP parameters. IM 467 with 9-pin subminiature D female connector for connection to PROFIBUS DP (6ES7467-5GJ02-0AB0) IM 467 FO with fiber-optic cable for connection to PROFIBUS DP (6ES7467-5FJ00-0AB0)
8-2
LEDs
Mode selector
PROFIBUS DP interface 9-pin subminiature D
Figure 8-1
Configuration of the IM 467/467 FO
Communication Services
The IM 467/IM 467 FO offers two communication services: PROFIBUS DP The IM 467/IM 467 FO is a PROFIBUS DP master in accordance with EN 50 170. It is configured entirely with STEP 7. It behaves in basically the same way as the integrated PROFIBUS DP interfaces on the CPU modules (see the technical specifications of the IM 467/IM 467 FO for the differences). DP communication does not require any function calls in the STEP 7 user program. S7 functions The S7 functions guarantee optimal and easy communication in a SIMATIC S7/M7/C7 automation solution. The following S7 functions are enabled for the IM 467/IM 467 FO: Programming device functions via PROFIBUS DP Operator control and monitoring functions via PROFIBUS DP Communication takes place without any additional configuration on the IM 467/ IM 467 FO. S7 functions can be used on their own or in parallel with the PROFIBUS DP protocol. If they are used in parallel with DP communication, this affects the PROFIBUS DP bus cycle time.
8-3
8.1.1
LED
Indicators and the Mode Selector
The LED plate on the front panel of the IM 467/ IM 467 FO has the following four indicators:
INTF EXTF
RUN STOP
Figure 8-2
LEDs of the IM 467/467 FO
IM Operating Mode
The LEDs indicate the operating mode of the IM in accordance with the following table:
Table 8-1 Operating Modes of the IM 467/467 FO RUN LED (green) Flashing On On Off Off Off EXTF LED (red) Off Off Off Off Off Off INTF LED (red) Off Off Off Off On Off CP Operating Mode Startup RUN STOPPING STOP STOP with internal error (IM not configured, for example) Waiting for FW update (takes 10 sec. after power up) Waiting for FW update (IM currently contains an incomplete FW version). RUN and PROFIBUS DP bus fault RUN; but there are faults on the DP line (the DP slave is not taking part in data transfer, or the module in the DP slave is faulty, for example) Module error/ System error
STOP LED (yellow) On Off Flashing On On Flashing
Flashing
Off
On
On
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
Flashing
Off
Flashing
Flashing
Flashing
Flashing
8-4
Controlling the Operating Mode

There are two ways to control the operating mode of the IM 467/IM 467 FO: By using the mode selector By using the programming device/PC
Mode Selector
You can switch operating modes as follows using the mode selector: From STOP to RUN All the configured communication services and S7 communication services are available in RUN. The IM operating mode can only be controlled from the programming device/PC when the switch is in the RUN position. From RUN to STOP The IM goes into STOP mode. Any existing S7 connections are cleared down, and the DP slaves are no longer supplied.
Loadable Firmware
The IM 467/IM 467 FO supports the updating of firmware (FW) by means of the FW loader. The FW loader is a component of the NCM S7 configuration software for PROFIBUS DP. Authorization is not required for this. After a FW update, the central controller must be switched off and on again before normal operation can be resumed.
Note You can find additional information on loading firmware in the NCM S7 for PROFIBUS DP manual and in the readme file of the NCM S7 for PROFIBUS DP configuration software.
Note An optical bus terminal (OBT) is required to load FW in the IM 467 FO.
8-5
8.2
Configuration
The IM 467/IM 467 FO is configured with STEP 7. The configuration data are retained even in the event of a power failure; a memory module is not required. Using the S7 functions it is possible to program and configure remotely all the IM 467/IM 467 FO connected to the network and all the CPUs connected via the SIMATIC S7-400 backplane bus. SIMATIC STEP 7 as version 5.00.
Module Replacement Without a Programming Device

The configuration data are stored in the load memory of the CPU. The non-volatile storage of configuration data in the CPU is ensured by battery backup or EPROM module cards. The IM 467/IM 467 FO can be replaced without the need to explicitly reload the configuration data. It is only possible to remove and insert the IM 467/IM 467 FO in a deenergized state.
Multiprocessor Operation
The connected DP slaves can only be assigned to and processed by one CPU.
Configuration and Diagnostics Cannot Be Carried Out Simultaneously

When configuration is in progress, the IM 467/IM 467 FO cannot be diagnosed at the same time via MPI.
Note The 3 MB and 6 MB transmission rates are not enabled for the IM 467-FO.
8-6
8.3
Connection to PROFIBUS DP
There are two ways of connecting to PROFIBUS DP: Electrical connection via a bus connector Optical connection using a fiber-optic cable
8.3.1
Bus Connector
Only with 6ES7467-5GJ02-0AB0. The bus cable is connected to the IM 467 by means of this connector. (See the detailed description in the chapter on networking in the S7-400, Hardware and Installation manual.)
Switch for the bus terminating resistor Bus connector PROFIBUS DP bus cable
Figure 8-3
Connecting the Bus Connector to the IM 467
Maximum Cable Lengths for PROFIBUS DP
Transmission Rate in 9.6 19.2 93.75 187.5 500 Kbps Max. Length of a Bus 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 400 Segment in m Max. Number of Bus 10 10 10 10 10 Segments 1) Max. Length in m 10.000 10.000 10.000 10.000 4.000 1) Bus segments are interconnected by means of RS 485 repeaters
1500 200 10 2.000
3000 100 10 1.000
6000 W 12000 100 10 1.000 100 10 1.000
8-7
Connector Pin Assignment

The electrical interface used to connect to PROFIBUS DP (9-pin subminiature D female connector) is specified in the following table.
INTF EXTF
Ass. with Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signal Name PROFIBUS DP Designation Protective earth Data transfer line B Control A Data reference potential Supply plus Data transfer line A RS 485
RUN STOP
RUN STOP
PE RxD/TxD P RTS (AG) M5V2 P5V2 BATT RxD/TxD N
yes yes yes yes yes
Figure 8-4
Connector Pin Assignment
8.3.2
Optical Connection to PROFIBUS DP

Only in the case of 6ES7467-5FJ00-0AB0. The IM 467 F0 with an integrated fiber-optic cable interface is available for connecting to the optical version of PROFIBUS DP.
C3 X P 2 45 4 4X00 350 X FE 03 IT N F E X T F
R U N S T O P R U N S T O P
AP U I /T
PROFIBUS FO bus cable
Figure 8-5
Optical Connection to PROFIBUS DP
8-8
8.3.3
Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to the IM 467 FO
Accessories Required
Pack of Simplex connectors and polishing sets (6GK1901-0FB00-0AA0) Pack of plug-in adapters (6ES7195-1BE00-0XA0)
Installing Connectors
1. Remove approximately 30 cm of the sheath of the fiber-optic duplex cable. 2. Install the fiber-optic duplex cable with the associated Simplex connectors. You can find a detailed description of Simplex connectors in the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks manual. TIP: Close the two Simplex connectors together rather than separately to obtain a Duplex connector. This ensures a more secure position in the plug-in adapter. IMPORTANT: The polished surface of the plastic fibers must be absolutely smooth and even. The plastic sheath must not stick out or be cut unevenly. If this is not the case, considerable attenuation of the light signal via the fiber-optic cable may occur. 3. Place the Simplex connectors in the plug-in adapter for the IM 467 FO and the fiber-optic cable in the cable guides provided. Insert the plug-in adapter until you hear the sides clearly latch into position. Make sure when you insert the plugs in the plug-in adapter that the sender is always at the top and the receiver is underneath.
Plug-in adapter for the IM 467 FO
Fiber-optic duplex cable Figure 8-6 Installing the Connector
Put the 2 Simplex connectors together to make one duplex connector. Tip: Cut the lower cable approx. 10 mm shorter than the upper one to achieve better cable routing in the cable channel of the IM 467 FO. Max. 30 mm bending radius
8-9
Reusing Fiber-Optic Cables

Note If you insert used fiber-optic cables in the plug-in adapter again, you must cut off the bent lengths of both fiber-optic cable cores and install the Simplex connectors again. This avoids any attenuation losses due to parts of the cores of the fiber-optic duplex cables being bent again and overstressed.
Inserting the Fiber-Optic Cables into the IM 467 FO

Insert the fiber-optic cables and attached plug-in adapters into the IM 467 FO. Move the protruding handle of the plug-in adapter upwards. Make sure that it is correctly positioned: The sender fiber-optic cable is plugged into the receiver socket, and the receiver fiber-optic cable is inserted into the sender socket of the fiber-optic interface of the IM 467 FO. If the IM 467 FO is the last node in the fiber-optic network, you must close the unoccupied fiber-optic cable interface with filler connectors (the connectors are already in place when the IM 467 FO is delivered).
Caution Do not look directly into the opening of the optical sender diodes. The light beam could damage your eyes.
PROFIBUS DP
Sender Handle
R T
Receiver Sender
R T
Receiver
Receiver
Sender
Figure 8-7
Inserting the Fiber-Optic Cables into the IM 467 FO
Bending Radius for the Fiber-Optic Cable

Make sure when you wire the fiber-optic duplex cable cores and insert them into the plug-in adapter that the permissible bending radius of 30 mm is not violated. See also the installation guidelines on fiber-optic cables in the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks manual.
8-10
8.4
Technical Specifications
8.4.1
Technical Specifications of the IM 467

6ES7467-5GJ02-0AB0.
Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Weight 25 x 290 x 210 Can be used in 700 g PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS DP, EN 50 170 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps, parameterizable in steps RS 485 via 9-pin subminiature D female connector Total current consumption of the components connected to the DP interfaces, with a maximum of 150 mA
PROFIBUS DP Conditions of Use SIMATIC S7-400, max. 4 IM 467 in the central controller 5 VDC via the backplane bus 1.3 A Max. 4 KB for inputs and 4 KB for outputs Yes No No 96
Standard Transmission rate Transmission technology
IM 467 cannot be used together with the CP 443-5 Supply voltage Current consumption
From 5 VDC
Addressing range DP master
Current consumption Current consumption from the S7-400 bus (24 VDC) The IM does not consume any current at 24 V, and it only makes this voltage available at the MPI/DP interface.
DPV 1 Enable/disable
Number of connectable I/O devices (slaves) Number of connections for S7 functions for the programming device and operation and monitoring Data volume per slave Consistency Configuration software DP slave
32 + 1 diagnostic connection
Max. 244 bytes Max. 128 bytes STEP 7 No
Deviations from the DP Interface Integrated in the CPU
Different SSL IDs for system diagnostics Possibly extended SFC run times Additional return codes for SFC 14 and SFC 15
8-11
8.4.2
Technical Specifications of the IM 467 FO

6ES7 467-5FJ00-0AB0
Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Weight 25 x 290 x 210 Can be used in 700 g PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS DP, EN 50 170 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps, configurable in steps (3 Mbps and 6 Mbps not possible) FOC Wavelength l = 660 nm 2 x Duplex socket Total current consumption of the components connected to the DP interfaces, with a maximum of 150 mA
PROFIBUS DP Conditions of Use SIMATIC S7-400, max. 4 IM 467 in the central controller
Standard Transmission rate
IM 467 cannot be used with the CP 443-5 Supply voltage Current consumption 5 VDC via the backplane bus 1.3 A Max. 4 KB for inputs and 4 KB for outputs Yes No No 96
Transmission technology
From 5 VDC
Addressing range DP master
Current consumption Current consumption from the S7-400 bus (24 VDC) The IM does not consume any current at 24 V, and it only makes this voltage available at the MPI/DP interface.
DPV 1 Enable/disable
Number of connectable I/O devices (slaves) Number of connections for S7 functions for the programming device and operator control and monitoring Data volume per slave Consistency Configuration software DP slave
32 + 1 diagnostic connection
Max. 244 bytes Max. 128 bytes STEP 7 No
Deviations from the DP Interface Integrated in the CPU
Different SSL IDs for system diagnostics Possibly extended SFC run times Additional return codes for SFC 14 and SFC 15
8-12
Cable Duct and Fan Subassemblies

Chapter Overview
Section 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 Description Fan Monitoring in the Fan Subassemblies Cable Duct; (6ES7408-0TA00-0AA0) The 120/230 VAC Fan Subassembly; (6ES7408-1TB00-0XA0) The 24 VDC Fan Subassembly; (6ES7408-1TA00-0XA0)
9
Page 9-2 9-4 9-5 9-7
Characteristics
The cable duct and the fan subassembly have the following characteristics The air inflow area is variable. Shield and cable clamping are possible. In addition, the fan subassembly has the following characteristics: Fans and filter frames can be replaced from the front during operation. The fan function is controlled by means of speed monitoring. Operation with filter frames is optional.
9-1
9.1
Fan Monitoring in the Fan Subassemblies

In this section, you will find out how to monitor the fans. There is a signaling concept example at the end of the section.
LEDs
The three red LEDs are assigned to the individual fans. From left to right, these are: F1 for fan 1 F2 for fan 2 F3 for fan 3
Fans
The fans have a redundant design. The fan subassembly continues to function even if one fan fails.
Fan Monitoring
The function of the fans is controlled by means of speed monitoring. If the speed of a fan drops below the limit speed of 1750 rpm, the LED assigned to it lights up. In addition, the relay K1 drops out. If the speed of a second fan drops below the limit speed, the LED assigned to it lights up; in addition, the relay K2 drops out. The following table is the function table for the fan monitoring.
Table 9-1 Fan1 + + + + * Function of Fan Monitoring Fan2 + + + + * Fan3 + + + + * LED F1 L L L D L D D D D* LED F2 L L D L D L D D D* LED F3 L D L L D D L D D* Relay K1 + * Relay K2 + + + + *
+ D L *
Fan in operation or relay picked up Fan failed or relay dropped out LEDs dark LEDs lit Power off
9-2
Signaling Concept Example

You can check the fault-free functioning of the fan subassembly using digital inputs. You can cause the power supply to be cut off after the failure of at least two fans by using the relay K2. For example, you can use an intermediate contactor to interrupt the mains. The relay contacts are labeled as follows: Relay K1: Relay K2: No. 1...3 No. 4...6
The following diagram explains the circuit in the fan subassembly when all fans are functioning.
... to the digital input module ... in the fan assembly Evaluation (digital input module) Evaluation (digital input module) 1 2 3
L+
... to the monitor K1
24 V
4 5 6
... to the monitor K2
... to the power supply module
... to the mains
Status: All fans operating

Figure 9-1 Example of a Message Concept
9-3
9.2
Function
Cable Duct; (6ES7408-0TA00-0AA0)
The cable duct is used in installations outside the cabinet for Cable clamping and/or for Shielding or for Air circulation without fan assistance
Front View of the Cable Duct
Eye for clamping cable Shielding clamp (Side elevation Scale 1:1)
Figure 9-2
Front View of the Cable Channel
Shielding Clamps
If you do not require the shielding clamps supplied, do not install them in the cable duct.
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Weight 482.5 x 109.5 x 235 ca. 1200 g
9-4
9.3
The 120/230 VAC Fan Subassembly; (6ES7408-1TB00-0XA0)
Operator Controls and Indicators on the 120/230 VAC Fan Subassembly
Relay contacts 1, 2, 3 Relay contacts 4, 5, 6
Quick-release lock
LEDs F1, F2, F3
Voltage selector switch
Fuse compartment
Figure 9-3
Controls and Indicators of the Fan Subassembly 120/230 VAC (6ES7408-1TB00-0XA0)
Fuse
Included in this fan subassembly are standard cartridge fuse links, 5 x 20 mm, conforming to DIN 250 mAT for 120 V 160 mAT for 230 V. The fuse for the 230 V range is already installed on shipping from the factory. Note If you change the voltage range, you must also insert the fuse for this voltage range in the fan subassembly. You will find a description of how to change the fuse in the Installation Manual, Chapter 9.
9-5
Shielding Clamps
If you do not require the shielding clamps supplied, do not install them in the fan subassembly.
Dimensions, Weights Dimensions WxHxD (mm) Weight Cable diameter 482.5 109.5 235 482.5109.5235 appr. 2000 g 3 to 9 mm Nominal Sizes Lifespan of the fans Voltages, Currents, Potentials At nominal voltage of Power consumption 230 VAC 17 W 5W 0.6 A 160 mA 120 VAC 18 W 4W 1.15 A 250 mA
with fan without fan
Starting current typ. 70000 h typ. 25000 h Fuses
at 40C at 75C
Max. contact load of relay contacts 1 to 6 Switching voltage Switching current 24 VDC 200 mA
Warning Electrical current can lead to personal injury. If you remove the left cover when installing or removing the fan subassembly, the terminals on the transformer are accessible briefly. Remove the voltage from the fan subassembly before you install or remove it. Disconnect the supply cable before you remove the fan subassembly.
Caution Danger of damage to equipment. If you mix up the power supply PCB and the monitoring PCB in the fan subassembly, the fan subassembly may be damaged. During maintenance of the unit, make sure you do not mix up the power supply PCB and the monitoring PCB.
Monitoring Function
In the case of a fault (defective fans) the fans are not switched off. Once you have replaced the defective fan(s), the fault is acknowledged automatically as soon as the fans have reached the required speed. Any faults that occur are not stored. When you switch on the fan subassembly, the fans start running. After approximately 10 s the current status of the fans is indicated via LEDs and relays.
9-6
9.4
The 24 VDC Fan Subassembly; (6ES7408-1TA00-0XA0)
Operator Controls and Indicators on the 24 VDC Fan Subassembly
Relay contacts 1, 2, 3
1 AT
Relay contacts 4, 5, 6
Quick-release lock
LEDs F1, F2, F3
1 AT
Fuse compartment
Figure 9-4
Controls and Indicators of the Fan Subassembly 24 VDC (6ES7408-1TA00-0XA0)
Characteristics
The 24 VDC fan subassembly has the same construction and functional characteristics as the 120/230 VAC fan subassembly.
Installation
Installing the 24 VDC fan subassembly is the same as for the 120/230 VAC fan subassembly.
Wiring
You connect the 24 VDC fan subassembly to the 24 VDC supply in the same manner as for the 120/230 VAC fan subassembly. You should note the polarity of the spring connections L+ and L.
Signaling Concept
The signaling concept of the 24 VDC fan subassembly is identical to the signaling concept of the 120/230 VAC fan subassembly.
9-7
Fuse
Included in this fan subassembly are standard cartridge fuse links, 5 x 20 mm, conforming to DIN 1.0 AT for 24 V The fuse is already installed on shipping from the factory.
Shielding Clamps
If you do not require the shielding clamps supplied, do not install them in the fan subassembly.
Dimensions, Weights Dimensions WxHxD (mm) Weight Cable diameter 482.5 x 109.5 x 235 appr. 1600 g 3 to 9 mm Nominal Sizes Lifespan of the fans Voltages, Currents, Potentials
Input voltage
Nominal value Valid range
DC 24 V Static 19.2 V up to 30 V Dynamic: 18.5 up to 30.2 V
at 40C at 75C
typ. 70000 h typ. 25000 h
Starting current Fuses Power consumption
0.9 A at 24 V 1.0 AT 12 W 1.4 W
Max. contact load of relay contacts 1 to 6 Switching voltage Switching current 24 VDC 200 mA
with fan without fan
Caution Danger of damage to equipment. If you insert the monitoring PCB in the wrong position in the fan subassembly, the fan subassembly may be damaged. During maintenance of the unit, make sure you do not replace the monitoring PCB in the wrong position.
Monitoring Function
In the case of a fault (defective fans) the fans are not switched off. Once you have replaced the defective fan(s), the fault is acknowledged automatically as soon as the fans have reached the required speed. Any faults that occur are not stored. When you switch on the fan subassembly, the fans start running. After approximately 10 s the current status of the fans is indicated via LEDs and relays.
9-8
RS 485 Repeater
10
In this Chapter
In this chapter, you will find a detailed description of the RS 485 repeater. Included in the description are: The purpose of the RS 485 repeater The maximum cable lengths possible between two RS 485 repeaters The functions of the individual operating elements and terminals Information about grounded and non-grounded operation Technical specifications and the block diagram
Further Information
You will find further information on the RS 485 repeater in the Installation manual, Chapter Configuring an MPI or PROFIBUS DP network.
Chapter Overview
Section 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 Description Application and Characteristics; (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0) Appearance of the RS-485 Repeater; (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0) RS 485 Repeater in Ungrounded and Grounded Operation Technical Specifications Page 10-2 10-3 10-4 10-6
10-1
RS 485 Repeater
10.1
Application and Characteristics (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)
What is an RS 485 Repeater?

The RS 485 repeater amplifies data signals on bus lines and interconnects bus segments.
Application of the RS 485 Repeater

You need an RS 485 repeater if: more than 32 nodes are connected to the bus ungrounded segments are to be operated on the bus, or the maximum cable length of a segment is exceeded. (See table 10-1).
Table 10-1 Maximum Cable Length of a Segment Baud Rate 9.6 to 187.5 kbaud 500 kbaud 1.5 Mbaud 3 to 12 Mbaud Max. Cable Length of a Segment (in m) 1000 400 200 100
Rules
If you configure the bus with RS 485 repeaters: Up to 9 RS 485 repeaters can be connected in series. The maximum cable length between two nodes must not exceed the values in Table 10-2.
Table 10-2 Maximum Cable Length between Two RS 485 Repeaters Baud Rate 9.6 to 187.5 kbaud 500 kbaud 1.5 Mbaud 3 to 12 Mbaud Maximum Length of Cable between 2 Nodes (in m) with RS 485 Repeater (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0) 10000 4000 2000 1000
10-2
RS 485 Repeater
10.2
Appearance of the RS 485 Repeater; (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)

The table below shows the appearance of the RS 485 repeater and lists its functions.
Table 10-3 Description and Functions of the RS 485 Repeater Repeater Design No. Function Connection for the RS 485 repeater power supply (pin M5.2 is the ground reference, if you want to measure the voltage difference between terminals A2 and B2). Shield clamp for the strain relief and grounding of the bus cable of bus segment 1 or bus segment 2 Terminals for the bus cable of bus segment 1 Terminating resistance for bus segment 1 Switch for OFF operating mode (= isolate bus segments from each other for example, for startup
24 VDC
10
L+ M PE M 5.2
3
A1 B1 A1 B1
ON
DP1 OFF
4 11 5 12 6
PG OP
DP2
ON SIEMENS RS 485-REPEATER
A2 B2 A2 B2
Terminating resistance for bus segment 2 Terminals for the bus cable of bus segment 2 Slide for mounting and removing the RS 485 repeater on the standard rail Interface for programming device/OP in bus segment 1 LED 24 V supply voltage LED for bus segment 1 LED for bus segment 2
10
11 12
10-3
RS 485 Repeater
10.3
RS 485 Repeater in Ungrounded and Grounded Operation
Grounded or Ungrounded
The RS 485 repeater is ... grounded, if all other nodes in the segment are also operated with a grounded potential ungrounded, if all other nodes in the segment are operated with an ungrounded potential Note The bus segment 1 is grounded if you connect a programming device which has a pure MPI interface to the PG/OP socket of the RS 485 repeater. Ground connection is effected since the MPI in the programming device is grounded and the PG/OP socket is connected internally with bus segment 1 in the RS 485 repeater. This does not apply if the PG is equipped with a combo MPI/DP interface.
Grounded Operation of the RS 485 Repeater

For grounded operation of the RS 485 repeater, you must jump terminals M and PE on the top of the RS 485 repeater.
Ungrounded Operation of the RS 485 Repeater

For ungrounded operation of the RS 485 repeater, M and PE on the top of the RS 485 repeater must not be interconnected. In addition, the supply voltage of the RS 485 repeater must be ungrounded.
10-4
RS 485 Repeater
Terminal Connection Diagram

In the case of a repeater configuration with ungrounded reference potential (ungrounded operation), any interference currents and static charges are discharged by means of an RC network integrated in the repeater (refer to Figure 10-1) to the protective conductor.
PE
24 VDC L+ M PE M 5.2
22 nF M
10 M
A1 B1 A1 B1
Ground bus
Figure 10-1
RC Network with 10 M for Configuration with Ungrounded Reference Potential
Isolation Between Bus Segments

Bus segment 1 and bus segment 2 are galvanically isolated from each other. The PG/OP interface is connected internally to the port for bus segment 1. Figure 10-2 shows the front panel of the RS 485 repeater.
24 VDC
L+ M PE M 5.2
Terminals for bus segment 1

A1 B1 A1 B1
ON
PG/OP interface
PG OP
DP1 OFF DP2
Isolation
ON SIEMENS RS 485-REPEATER
A2 B2 A2 B2
Terminals for bus segment 2
Figure 10-2
Isolation Between the Bus Segments
10-5
RS 485 Repeater
Amplification of the Bus Signals

The amplification of the bus signals takes place between the port for bus segment 1 or the PG/OP interface and the port for bus segment 2.
10.4
Technical Specifications of the RS 485 Repeater

Technical Specification Power supply
Rated voltage Ripple
24 VDC 20.4 to 28.8 VDC
Current consumption at rated voltage without node at PG/OP socket Node at PG/OP socket (5 V/90 mA) Node at PG/OP socket (24 V/100 mA) 200 mA 230 mA 200 mA Yes, 500 VAC Yes, via repeater adapters No 9.6 kbaud, 19.2 kbaud, 45.45 kbaud, 93.75 kbaud, 187.5 kbaud, 500 kbaud. 1.5 Mbaud. 3 Mbaud, 6 Mbaud, 12 Mbaud IP 20 D (in millimeters) 45 350 g 128 67 mm
Isolation Connection of fiber optic cables Redundancy operation Transmission rate (automatically detected by the repeater)
Degree of protection Dimensions W H
Weight (incl. packaging)
Pin Assignment of the Sub-D Connector (PG/OP Socket)

View Pin No. 1 2 5 4 3 7 2 1 6 9 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signal Name M24V RxD/TxD-P RTS M5V2 P5V2 P24V RxD/TxD-N Ground 24 V Data line B Request To Send Data reference potential (from station) Supply plus (from station) 24 V Data line A Designation
10-6
RS 485 Repeater
Block Diagram of the RS 485 Repeater

Bus segment 1 and bus segment 2 are galvanically isolated from each other. Bus segment 2 and the PG/OP socket are galvanically isolated from each other. Signals are amplified between bus segment 1 and bus segment 2 between PG/OP socket and bus segment 2
Segment 1 A1 B1 A1 B1
OFF
Logic
+
Segment 2 A2 B2 A2 B2
OFF ON ON
5V 24V
PG/OPsocket L+ (24 V) M A1 B1 5V M5 V
+ 1M 5V
1M
24V
L+ (24 V) M PE M 5.2
Figure 10-3
Block Diagram of the RS 485 Repeater
10-7
RS 485 Repeater
10-8
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules
A
Page A-2 A-3 A-6 A-9
Chapter Overview
Section A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 Description How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the User Program Parameters of the Digital Input Modules Parameters of the Digital Output Modules Parameters of the Analog Input Modules
A-1
A.1
How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the User Program
Parameter Assignment in the User Program

You have already assigned parameters to the modules in STEP 7. In the user program, you can use a SFC: to reassign parameters to the module and and transfer the parameters from the CPU to the addressed signal module
Parameters Stored in Data Records

The signal module parameters are stored in data records 0 and 1.
Modifiable Parameters
You can change the parameters of record 1 and pass them to the signal module using SFC 55. The parameters set on the CPU are not changed when you do this! You cannot modify the parameters of data record 0 in the user program.
SFCs for Parameter Assignment

The following SFCs are available for assigning parameters to the signal modules in the user program:
Table A-1 SFC No. 55 56 57 SFCs for assigning Parameters to Signal Modules Identifier WR_PARM WR_DPARM PARM_MOD Application Transfer of modifiable parameters (data record 1) to the addressed signal module. Transfer of parameters (data record 0 or 1) from the CPU to the addressed signal module. Transfer of all parameters (data record 0 and 1) from the CPU to the addressed signal module.
Description of the Parameters

The following sections contain all the modifiable parameters for the various module classes. The parameters of the signal modules are described: in the online help of STEP 7. in this reference manual You will find the parameters that can be adjusted for the signal module concerned in the specific sections for the different signal modules.
Further References
You can find an in-depth description of the principle of assigning parameters to signal modules in the user program and a description of the SFCs that can be used for this purpose in the STEP 7 manuals.
A-2
A.2
Parameters of the Digital Input Modules
Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters you can set for digital input modules. You will see which parameters you can modify from the list: in STEP 7 with SFC 55 WR_PARM The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred to the module with SFCs 56 and 57 (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).
Table A-2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules Parameter Data Record No. Parameters Can Be Assigned with ... ... SFC 55 Destination CPU for interrupts Input delay Diagnostics Hardware interrupt enable Diagnostic interrupt enable Reaction to error* Hardware interrupt with rising edge Hardware interrupt with falling edge Substitute 1* * Only in 6ES7421-7BH00-0AB0 1 0 No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes ... STEP 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Note If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.
A-3
Structure of Data Record 1

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 (bytes 0, 1, 2 and 3) for the parameters of the digital input modules. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to 1.
7 6 Byte 0 Reaction to error *) Diagnostic interrupt enable Hardware interrupt enable 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 1 Hardware interrupt On rising edge at channel 0 On rising edge at channel 1 On rising edge at channel 2 On rising edge at channel 3 On rising edge at channel 4 On rising edge at channel 5 On rising edge at channel 6 On rising edge at channel 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 2 Hardware interrupt On rising edge at channel 8 On rising edge at channel 9 On rising edge at channel 10 On rising edge at channel 11 On rising edge at channel 12 On rising edge at channel 13 On rising edge at channel 14 On rising edge at channel 15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 3 Hardware interrupt On falling edge at channel 0 On falling edge at channel 1 On falling edge at channel 2 On falling edge at channel 3 On falling edge at channel 4 On falling edge at channel 5 On falling edge at channel 6 On falling edge at channel 7 *) Only in 6ES7421-7BH00-0AB0 Figure A-1 Data Record 1 of the Parameters of the Digital Input Modules 0
A-4
The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 (bytes 4, 5 and 6) for the parameters of the digital input modules. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to 1.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 4 Hardware interrupt On falling edge at channel 8 On falling edge at channel 9 On falling edge at channel 10 On falling edge at channel 11 On falling edge at channel 12 On falling edge at channel 13 On falling edge at channel 14 On falling edge at channel 15
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 5 Substitute value *) Enable substitute value 1 on channel 0 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 1 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 2 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 3 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 4 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 5 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 7
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 6 Substitute value *) Enable substitute value 1 on channel 8 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 9 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 10 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 11 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 12 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 13 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 14 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 15 *) Only in 6ES7421-7BH00-0AB0 Figure A-2 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Input Modules
A-5
A.3
Parameters of the Digital Output Modules
Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters you can set for digital output modules. The comparison shows: Which parameters you can change with STEP 7 and Which parameters you can change with SFC 55 WR_PARM The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred to the module with SFCs 56 and 57 (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).
Table A-3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules Parameter Data Record No. Parameters Can Be Assigned with ... ... SFC 55 Destination CPU for Interrupts Diagnostics Diagnostic interrupt enable Reaction to CPU STOP Enable substitute value 1 1 0 No No Yes Yes Yes ... STEP 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A-6

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 (bytes 0, 1 and 2) for the parameters of the digital output modules. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to 1.
7 6 Byte 0 Reaction to CPU STOP Diagnostic interrupt enable 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 1 Substitute value Enable substitute value 1 on channel 0 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 1 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 2 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 3 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 4 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 5 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 7
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 2 Substitute value Enable substitute value 1 on channel 8 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 9 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 10 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 11 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 12 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 13 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 14 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 15
Figure A-3
Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Output Modules
A-7
The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 (bytes 3 and 4) for the parameters of the digital output modules. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to 1.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 3* Substitute value Enable substitute value 1 on channel 16 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 17 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 18 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 19 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 20 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 21 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 22 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 23
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 4* Substitute value Enable substitute value 1 on channel 24 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 25 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 26 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 27 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 28 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 29 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 30 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 31 * Bytes 3 and 4 are not relevant for SM 421; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A
Figure A-4
Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Output Modules
A-8
A.4
Parameters of the Analog Input Modules
Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters you can set for analog input modules. You will see which parameters you can modify from the list: in STEP 7 with SFC 55 WR_PARM The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred to the module with SFCs 56 and 57 (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).
Table A-4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules Parameter Data Record No. Parameters Can Be Assigned with ... ... SFC 55 Destination CPU for Interrupts Measuring Type Measuring Range Diagnostics Temperature Unit Temperature Coefficient Interference Suppression Smoothing Reference Junction End-of-scan-cycle interrupt Diagnostic interrupt enable Hardware interrupt enable Reference Temperature High Limit Low Limit 1 1 1 1 0 No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes ... STEP 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A-9

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the analog input modules. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to 1.
7 6 Byte 0
Diagnostic interrupt enable Hardware interrupt enable Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte Reference temperature in 0.01 C Upper-limit value for channel 0 Lower-limit value for channel 0
Byte 31 Byte 32 Byte 33 Byte 34
High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte
Upper-limit value for channel 7 Lower-limit value for channel 7
Byte 63 Byte 64 Byte 65 Byte 66 High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte Upper-limit value for channel 15 Lower-limit value for channel 15
Figure A-5
Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules
Note The representation of the limit values and the reference temperature corresponds to the analog value representation (see Chapter 6). Please observe the range limits when setting the limit values.
A-10
Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules
B
Page B-2 B-3 B-4 B-8 B-14
Chapter Overview
Section B.1 B.2 B.3 B.4 B.5 Description Evaluating the Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules in the User Program Structure and Contents of Diagnostic Data Bytes 0 and 1 Diagnostic Data of the Digital Input Modules as of Byte 2 Diagnostic Data of the Digital Output Modules as of Byte 2 Diagnostic Data of the Analog Input Modules as of Byte 2
B-1
B.1
Evaluating the Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules in the User Program
In This Appendix
This Appendix describes the structure of the diagnostic data in the system data. You must be familiar with this structure if you want to evaluate the diagnostic data of the signal module in the STEP 7 user program.
Diagnostic Data are Contained in Data Records

The diagnostic data of a module can be up to 43 bytes long and are contained in data records 0 and 1: Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostic data that describe the current status of a programmable controller. Data record 1 contains the four bytes of diagnostic data that are also contained in data record 0 and as many as 39 bytes of module-specific diagnostic data.
Further Reading
An in-depth description of the principle of evaluating the diagnostic data of signal modules in the user program and a description of the SFCs that can be used for that purpose will be found in the STEP 7 manuals.
B-2
B.2
Structure and Contents of Diagnostic Data Bytes 0 and 1

The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data are described below. The following general rule applies: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to 1.
Bytes 0 and 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 0 Module malfunction Internal malfunction External malfunction There is a channel error No external auxiliary supply Front connector missing Module not parameterized. Incorrect parameter in the module 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 1 0 0 0
Module type (see Table B-1) Channel information available
Figure B-1
Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data
Module Types
The following table contains the IDs of the module classes (bits 0 to 3 in byte 1).
Table B-1 Codes of the Module Types Code 0101 0110 1000 1100 1111 Analog module CPU Function module CP Digital module Module Type
B-3
B.3
Diagnostic Data of the Digital Input Modules as of Byte 2

The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for special digital input modules are described below. The following general rule applies: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to 1. You will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the section called Diagnostics of the Modules.
Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 421; DI 16
24 VDC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 Operating status 0: RUN 1: STOP Module-internal supply voltage failure 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 EPROM error Hardware interrupt lost Figure B-2 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC
B-4
Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
Byte 4
Channel type B#16#70: digital input 7 Byte 5 7 Byte 6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 7 Channel error, channel 0 Channel error, channel 1 ... Channel error, channel 6 Channel error, channel 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 8 Channel error, channel 8 Channel error, channel 9 0 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 16 channels 0 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 8 bits long
... Channel error, channel 14 Channel error, channel 15 Figure B-3
Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC
Bytes 9 to 24 of the SM 421; DI 16
24 VDC
Data record 1 with bytes 9 to 24 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data. The figure below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the module.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Configuring/parameter assignment error Wire break Sensor supply missing Figure B-4 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC
B-5
Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Operating status 0: RUN 1: STOP 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 EPROM error Hardware interrupt lost Figure B-5 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC
Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
Byte 4
Channel type B#16#70: digital input 7 Byte 5 7 Byte 6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 7 Channel error, channel 0 Channel error, channel 1 0 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 16 channels 0 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 8 bits long
...
Channel error, channel 6 Channel error, channel 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 8 Channel error, channel 8 ... Channel error, channel 9 Channel error, channel 14 Channel error, channel 15 Figure B-6 Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC
B-6
Bytes 9 to 24 of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Configuring/parameter assignment error Wire break Figure B-7 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC
B-7
B.4
Diagnostic Data of the Digital Output Modules as of Byte 2

The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for special digital output modules are described below. The following general rule applies: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to 1. You will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the section called on the special module.
Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Operating status 0: RUN 1: STOP 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EPROM error Figure B-8 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A
Byte 2
B-8
Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
Byte 4
Channel type B#16#72: digital output 7 Byte 5 7 Byte 6 0 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 16 channels 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 7 Channel error, channel 0 Channel error, channel 1 0 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 8 bits long
...
Channel error, channel 6 Channel error, channel 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 8 Channel error, channel 8 Channel error, channel 9 ... Channel error, channel 14 Channel error, channel 15 Figure B-9 Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A
Bytes 9 to 24 of the SM 421; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Configuring/parameter assignment error Short-circuit to M External auxiliary supply missing Figure B-10 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A
B-9
Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 Operating status 0: RUN 1: STOP Module-internal supply voltage failure 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EPROM error Figure B-11 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A
B-10
Bytes 4 to 10 of the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
Byte 4
Channel type B#16#72: digital output 7 Byte 5 7 Byte 6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 7 Channel error, channel 0 Channel error, channel 1 ... Channel error, channel 6 Channel error, channel 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 8 Channel error, channel 8 Channel error, channel 9 ... Channel error, channel 14 Channel error, channel 15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 9 Channel error, channel 16 Channel error, channel 17 ... Channel error, channel 22 Channel error, channel 23 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 10 Channel error, channel 24 Channel error, channel 25 ... Channel error, channel 30 Channel error, channel 31 Figure B-12 Bytes 4 to 10 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A 0 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 32 channels 0 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 8 bits long
B-11
Bytes 11 to 42 of the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 Configuring/parameter assignment error Short-circuit to L+ Short-circuit to M Wire break External auxiliary supply missing Figure B-13 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A
Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Operating status 0: RUN 1: STOP 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EPROM error Figure B-14 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A
B-12
Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
Byte 4
Channel type B#16#72: digital output 7 Byte 5 7 Byte 6 0 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 16 channels 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 7 Channel error, channel 0 Channel error, channel 1 0 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 8 bits long
... Channel error, channel 6 Channel error, channel 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 8
Channel error, channel 8 Channel error, channel 9 ... Channel error, channel 14 Channel error, channel 15 Figure B-15 Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A
Bytes 9 to 24 of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Configuring/parameter assignment error Fuse blown Figure B-16 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A
B-13
B.5
Diagnostic Data of the Analog Input Modules as of Byte 2

The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for the special analog input modules are described below. The following general rule applies: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to 1. You will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the section called on the special module.
Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 Measuring range module incorrect or missing Operating status 0: RUN 1: STOP 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 3 0 0 0 0 EPROM error RAM error ADC/DAC error Hardware interrupt lost Figure B-17 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit
B-14
Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
Byte 4
Channel type B#16#71: analog input 7 Byte 5 7 Byte 6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 7 Channel error, channel 0 Channel error, channel 1 ... Channel error, channel 6 Channel error, channel 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 8 Channel error, channel 8 ... Channel error, channel 9 Channel error, channel 14 Channel error, channel 15 Figure B-18 Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit 0 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 16 channels 0 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 8 bits long

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 Configuring/parameter assignment error Short-circuit to M Wire break Reference channel error Underflow Overflow Figure B-19 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit
B-15
Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Operating status 0: RUN 1: STOP 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 3 0 0 0 0 0 EPROM error ADC/DAC error Hardware interrupt lost Figure B-20 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit
Bytes 4 to 7 of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
Byte 4
Channel type B#16#71: analog input 7 Byte 5 7 Byte 6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 7 Channel error, channel 0 Channel error, channel 1
... ... ... ... ...
0 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 16 bits long 0 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 8 channels
Channel error, channel 6 Channel error, channel 7
Figure B-21
Bytes 4 to 7 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit
B-16
Bytes 8 to 23 of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

Data record 1 with bytes 8 to 23 contains channel-specific diagnostic data. The following figure shows the assignment of the even diagnostic bytes (bytes 8, 10, to 22) for a channel of the module.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 Configuring/parameter assignment error Wire break Underflow Overflow Figure B-22 Even Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit
The following figure shows the assignment of the odd diagnostic bytes (bytes 9, 11, to 23) for a channel of the module.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 User connection not wired Open conductor in + direction Open conductor in direction Run time calibration error Underrange or overrange Open conductor in the current source User calibration doesnt correspond to the parameter assignment
Figure B-23
Odd Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit
B-17
Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 Thermocouple connection error Operating status 0: RUN 1: STOP 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 3 0 0 0 0 EPROM error RAM error ADC/DAC error Hardware interrupt lost Figure B-24 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
Byte 4
Channel type B#16#71: analog input 7 Byte 5 7 Byte 6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 7 Channel error, channel 0 Channel error, channel 1
... ... ... ... ...
0 Number of diagnostic bits that the module outputs per channel: 16 bits long 0 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 8 channels
Channel error, channel 6 Channel error, channel 7
Figure B-25
Bytes 4 to 7 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit
B-18

Data record 1 with bytes 8 to 23 contains channel-specific diagnostic data. The following figure shows the assignment of the even diagnostic bytes (bytes 8, 10, to 22) for a channel of the module.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 Configuring/parameter assignment error Wire break Reference channel error Underflow Overflow Figure B-26 Even Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit
The following figure shows the assignment of the odd diagnostic bytes (bytes 9, 11, to 23) for a channel of the module.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Run time calibration error User calibration doesnt correspond to the parameter assignment
Figure B-27
Odd Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit
B-19
B-20
Spare Parts and Accessories

For Racks Number wheel for slot labeling Spare slot covers (qty 10) For Power Supplies Spare connector for PS 405 (DC) Spare connector for PS 407 (AC) Backup battery For Digital Modules/Analog Modules Cover foil (10 x) for labeling strips of the SMs Cover flap for fuse receptacle on the AC modules Measuring range module for analog modules Front connector screw-type connection Front connector spring connection Front connector crimp connection Crimping tool for crimp contacts Crimp contacts (package of 250) Extraction tool for crimp contacts Fuses, 8 A, quick blow Wickmann
C
C79165-Z1523-A22 6ES7490-1AA00-0AA0 6ES7490-0AA00-0AA0 6ES7490-0AB00-0AA0 6ES7971-0BA00 6ES7492-2XX00-0AA0 6ES7422-0XX00-7AA0 6ES7974-0AA00-0AA0 6ES7492-1AL00-0AA0 6ES7492-1BL00-0AA0 6ES7492-1CL00-0AA0 6XX3 071 6XX3 070 6ES5 497-8MA11 194-1800-0 SP001.1013 217.008 6ES7492-2AX00-0AA0 6ES7492-2BX00-0AA0 6ES7492-2CX00-0AA0 6ES7492-2DX00-0AA0
Schurter Littelfuse
Labeling sheet for the front connector, petrol blue Labeling sheet for the front connector, beige Labeling sheet for the front connector, yellow Labeling sheet for the front connector, red
C-1
For IMs Terminating connector for IM 461-0 Terminating connector for IM 461-1 Terminating connector for IM 461-3 IM 463-2, send IM, 600 m to IM 314 of the S5 IM cable with communication bus, 0.75 m IM cable with communication bus, 1.5 m IM cable with communication bus, 5 m IM cable with communication bus, 10 m IM cable with communication bus, 25 m IM cable with communication bus, 50 m IM cable with communication bus, 100 m IM cable with current transmission, 0.75 m IM cable with current transmission, 1.5 m Package with plug adapters for IM 467 FO Package with simplex plugs and polishing set for IM 467 FO For Interfacing / Networking DIN rail 35 mm PROFIBUS bus cable PROFIBUS internal cable PROFIBUS grounding cable PROFIBUS bus connector without PG socket PROFIBUS bus connector with PG socket PROFIBUS bus connector without PG socket for CPU 417 PROFIBUS bus connector with PG socket for CPU 417 PROFIBUS RS 485 bus terminal
6ES7461-0AA00-7AA0 6ES7461-1AA00-7AA0 6ES7461-3AA00-7AA0 6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0 6ES7468-1AH50-0AA0 6ES7468-1BB50-0AA0 6ES7468-1BF00-0AA0 6ES7468-1CB00-0AA0 6ES7468-1CC50-0AA0 6ES7468-1CF00-0AA0 6ES7468-1DB00-0AA0 6ES7468-3AH50-0AA0 6ES7468-3BB50-0AA0 6ES7195-1BE00-0XA0 6GK1901-0FB00-0AA0 6ES5710-8MA... 6XV1830-0BH10 6XV1830-3BH10 6XV1830-0BH10 6XV1830-3BH10 6ES7972-0BA00-0XA0 6ES7972-0BB10-0XA0 6ES7972-0BA40-0X40 6ES7972-0BB40-0X40 6GK1500-0AA00 6GK1500-0AB00 6GK1500-0DA00 6ES7901-2BF00-0AA0 6ES7408-1TA00-6AA0 6ES7408-1TA00-7AA0 6ES7408-1TX00-6XA0 6ES7408-1XX00-6XA0 8 MC 2281-7FC11-8DA1 8 MC 1605-0BS70-0AA0
PC/MPI cable (5 m) For Fan Subassembly Spare fan for fan subassembly Filters (qty 10) for fan subassembly Monitoring PCB for fan subassembly Power supply PCB for fan subassembly Cabinets Cabinet 2200 x 800 x 400 with extension set for SIMATIC S7-400 Extension set for SIMATIC S7-400
C-2
Cables Connecting cables for printers with Serial port (COM, 10 m) Parallel port (Centronics) Connecting cable for interface module 1m 2.5 m 5m 10 m V.24 cable Connector housing, gray 9-pin 15-pin 25-pin Connector housing, black 9-pin 15-pin 25-pin
9AB4173-2BN10-0CA0 6AP1901-0AL00 6ES7368-3BB00-0AA0 6ES7368-3BC00-0AA0 6ES7368-3BF00-0AA0 6ES7368-3CB00-0AA0 9AB4173-2BN10-0CA0 V42254-A6000-G109 V42254-A6000-G115 V42254-A6000-G125 V42254-A6001-G309 V42254-A6001-G315 V42254-A6001-G325
C-3
C-4
Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD)
Introduction
In this appendix, we explain what is meant by electrostatic sensitive devices the precautions you must observe when handling and working with electrostatic sensitive devices.
Chapter Overview
This chapter contains the following sections on electrostatic sensitive devices:
Section D.1 D.2 D.3 What is ESD? Electrostatic Charging of Persons General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge Damage Description Page D-2 D-3 D-4
D-1
D.1
What is ESD?
Definition
All electronic modules are equipped with large-scale integrated ICs or components. Due to their design, these electronic elements are very sensitive to overvoltages and thus to any electrostatic discharge. These Electrostatic Sensitive Devices are commonly referred to by the abbreviation ESD. Electrostatic sensitive devices are labelled with the following symbol:
Caution Electrostatic sensitive devices are subject to voltages that are far below the voltage values that can still be perceived by human beings. These voltages are present if you touch a component or the electrical connections of a module without previously being electrostatically discharged. In most cases, the damage caused by an overvoltage is not immediately noticeable and results in total damage only after a prolonged period of operation.
D-2
D.2
Electrostatic Charging of Persons
Charging
Every person with a non-conductive connection to the electrical potential of its surroundings can be charged electrostatically. Figure D-1 shows you the maximum values for electrostatic voltages which can build up on a person coming into contact with the materials indicated in the figure. These values are in conformity with the specifications of IEC 61000-4-2.
Voltage in kV (kV) 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 Synthetic material Wool
3 Antistatic material, for example, wood or concrete
2 3 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Relative air humidity in %
Figure D-1
Electrostatic Voltages which can build up on a person
D-3
D.3
General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge Damage
Ensure Sufficient Grounding

Make sure that the personnel, working surfaces and packaging are sufficiently grounded when handling electrostatic sensitive devices. You thus avoid electrostatic charging.
Avoid Direct Contact

You should touch electrostatic sensitive devices only if it is unavoidable (for example, during maintenance work). Hold modules without touching the pins of components or printed conductors. In this way, the discharged energy cannot affect the sensitive devices. If you have to carry out measurements on a module, you must discharge your body before you start the measurement by touching grounded metallic parts. Use grounded measuring devices only.
D-4
List of Abbreviations
Abbreviation AC ADC AI AO AS BAF BUSF1; BUSF2 CD CH COMP CP CR CPU DAC DB DC DI DO EMC EEPROM EPROM ER ES ESD EWS EXM EXTF FB FBD FC FEPROM Alternating current Analog to digital converter Aanalog input Analog output Automation system Battery failure LED bus failure on the MPI/Profibus DP interface 1 or 2 Central device Channel Compensating terminal Communications processor Central rack Central processing unit of a PLC Digital-to-analog converter Data block Direct current Digital input Digital output Electromagnetic compatibility Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory Erasable programmable read-only memory Expansion rack Encoder supply Electrostatic sensitive devices Apply substitute value Extension module Error LED external fault Function block Function block diagram Function Flash erasable programmable read only memory Explanation
E-1
FM FOC FRCE GD IC ID IFM1F; IFM2F IM INTF IP L+ LAD LWH M M+ M MANA MPI MRES MSM MSTR OB OP OS PIQ PII PLC PG PS QI QV RAM REDF RL S+ S SCL SP
Function module Fiber-optic cable Force Global data communication Constant-current lead Input delay LED error at interface module 1/2 Interface module Error LED internal fault Intelligent periphery Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage Ladder logic diagram Hold last valid value Ground terminal Measuring lead (positive) Measuring lead (negative) Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit Multipoint interface Master reset position of the toggle switch Mass storage module Master Organization block Operator panel Operator system Process-image output table Process-image input table Programmable logic controller Programming device Power supply Analog output current Analog output voltage Random access memory Redundancy fault Load impedance Sensor lead (positive) Sensor lead (negative) Structured control language Sensor power
E-2
SF SFB SFC SM SSI SSL STL TD TR UCM UH Uiso UC UR USR Vs VZ
Group error LED System function block System function Signal module Synchronous serial interface System status list Statement list (representation type in STEP 7) Text display Transducer Common mode voltage Auxiliary voltage Potential difference between MANA and local ground Universal current Universal rack USR Sensor voltage Sign
E-3
E-4
Glossary
Address An address denotes a specific operand or address area; examples of this are: input I 12.1; memory word MW 25; data block DB 3.
Aggregate current Sum of the currents of all output channels on a digital output module.
Backplane bus The backplane bus is a serial data bus that is used by the modules to communicate with each other and to supply them with the voltage they require. The interconnection of the modules is established by the bus connector.
Backup battery The backup battery ensures that the user program is stored in a powerfail-proof manner in the CPU, and that defined data areas and memory markers, timers and counters are kept retentively.
Backup voltage, external You can obtain the same kind of backup if you apply backup voltage to the EXT.BATT. socket of the CPU (DC voltage between 5 V and 15 V) as you can with a backup battery. External backup voltage is required if you want to replace a power supply module and to provide a backup supply while the user program and data (for example, memory markers, timers, counters, system data, integrated clock) stored in RAM are to be buffered for the time it takes to replace the module.
Basic error limit The basic error limit is the operation limit at 25 C, referenced to the rated range of the analog module.
Bus segment A bus segment is a self-contained section of a serial bus system. Bus segments are interconnected by means of repeaters.
Glossary-1
Glossary
Central controller An S7-400 consists of a central controller (CC) that can be allocated expansion units (EU), as required. The central controller is the mounting rack that contains the CPU.
Central processing unit CPU
Cold restart Restart of the programmable controller and its user program, after all the dynamic data (variables of the input/output image, internal registers, timers, counters, etc. and the corresponding program sections) have been reset to a specified value. A cold restart can be automatically triggered, such as after a power failure or loss of information in dynamic memory sections, etc., or manually by pressing the reset key.
Common mode voltage A voltage that is common to all inputs/outputs of a group and is measured between this group and any reference point (usually to ground).
Communication load This is the load on the cyclic program scanning of a CPU caused by communication operations (for example, via PROFIBUS DP). To prevent communication operations overloading cyclic program scanning, you can set the maximum permissible load that communication can place on the scan cycle by parameter assignment in STEP 7.
Communication processor Programmable module for communication tasks, such as networking, point-to-point connection.
Comparison point Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. Using this parameter, you can determine the reference junction (the point where the temperature is known) when thermocouples are used. The following can be reference junctions: resistance thermometer on channel 0 of the module; compensating box, reference temperature.
Compensating box Compensating boxes can be used for measuring temperatures with thermocouples on analog input modules. The compensating box is a compensation circuit for compensating temperature fluctuations at the reference junction.
Glossary-2
Glossary
CP Communication processor
CPU The CPU (central processing unit) is a CPU module of the programmable controller that stores and runs the user program. It contains the operating system, memory, processing unit and communication interface.
Data block Data blocks (DB) are data areas in the user program that contain user data. Global data blocks can be accessed by all code blocks, whereas instance data blocks are assigned to a specific FB call.
Data, static Static data is data that can only be used within a function block. The data is saved in an instance data block belonging to the function block. The data stored in this way is retained until the next function block call.
Data, temporary Temporary data are local data of a block that are stored in the L stack during execution of a block and that are no longer available after execution.
Declaration Assigning variables (parameters or local data of a block, for example) with a name, data type, comment, etc.
Default setting The default setting is a sensible basic setting that is used whenever no other value is used.
Destruction limit Limit of the permissible input voltage / current. The accuracy of the measurement may deteriorate if this limits is violated. The internal measurement circuit could be destroyed if this limit is exceeded.
Diagnostic buffer The diagnostic buffer is a buffered memory area in the CPU in which the diagnostic events are stored in the order in which they occur. For troubleshooting, the user can read out the exact error cause in STEP 7 (PLC Module Information) from the diagnostic buffer.
Glossary-3
Glossary
Diagnostic data All the diagnostic events that occur are collected in the CPU and entered in the diagnostic buffer. If there is an error OB, it is started.
Diagnostic interrupt Modules with diagnostics capability report system errors to the CPU by means of diagnostic interrupts. The operating system of the CPU calls OB 82 in the course of a diagnostic interrupt.
Diagnostics Generic term for system diagnostics, process error diagnostics and user-defined diagnostics.
Direct communication Direct communication involves assigning local input address areas of an intelligent DP slave (for example, CPU 315-2 with PROFIBUS DP connection) or of a DP master to the input address areas of a PROFIBUS DP partner. The intelligent DP slave or DP master receives the input data that the PROFIBUS DP partner sends to its DP master via these assigned input address areas.
DP master A node with a master function in the PROFIBUS DP. A master that behaves in accordance with the EN 50170 with the DP protocol is a DP master. The bus access right (token) is only passed amongst masters. The slaves, in this case DP slaves, can only respond on the request of a master. The following distinctions are made: DP master (class 1): executes the user data communication with the DP slaves assigned to it. DP master (class 2): provides services such as: reading of the input/output data, diagnostics, global control.
DP slave A slave that is operated on the PROFIBUS bus system with the PROFIBUS DP protocol is called a DP slave.
Constant bus cycle time The constant bus cycle time is a DP bus cycle that is accurate to a few ms and can be configured in STEP 7.
Equipotential bonding An electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor) that brings the bodies of electrical resources and foreign conductive bodies to an identical or approximately identical potential in order to avoid interfering or hazardous voltages between these bodies.
Glossary-4
Glossary
External load memory Memory card
FB Function block
FC Function
Fiber-optic cable A fiber-optic cable is a transmission medium made of glass fiber or plastic. Fiber-optic cables are resistant to electromagnetic faults and they make fast data transfer rates possible.
Force The Force function overwrites a variable (for example, memory marker, output) with a value defined by the user. At the same time, the variable is assigned write protection so that this value cannot be modified from any point (including from the STEP 7user program). The value is retained after the programming device is disconnected. Write protection is not canceled until the Unforce function is called and the variable is written again with the value defined by the user program. During commissioning, for example, the Force function allows certain outputs to be set to the ON state for any length of time even if the logic operations of the user program are not fulfilled (for example, because inputs are not wired).
FREEZE Control command. The inputs of the DP slaves are frozen to the current value.
Function A function (FC) in accordance with IEC 1131-3 is a code block without static data. A function allows parameters to be passed in the user program. Functions are therefore suitable for programming complex functions, such as calculations that are frequently repeated.
Functional grounding Grounding which has the sole purpose of safeguarding the intended function of the electrical equipment. Functional grounding short-circuits interference voltage that would otherwise have an impermissible impact on the equipment.
Function block A function block (FB) in accordance with IEC 1131-3 is a code block with static data. Because an FB has a memory, its parameters (outputs, for example) can be accessed from any position in the user program.
Glossary-5
Glossary
Fuse blown Parameter in STEP 7 for digital output modules. When the parameter is enabled, the failure of one or more fuses is detected by the module. With corresponding parameter assignment, a diagnostic interrupt is triggered.
Global data Global data are data that can be addressed from any code block (FC, FB, OB). In detail, this refers to bit memories (M), inputs (I), outputs (Q), timers, counters and data blocks (DB). Absolute or symbolic access is possible to global data.
Global data communication Global data communication is a method of transferring global data between CPUs.
Ground The ground is the total number of all the interconnected inactive parts of a device that cannot take on a hazardous voltage in the event of a fault.
Ground The conductive ground whose electric potential can be set to zero at any point. In the proximity of grounding electrodes, the ground can have a potential other than zero. The term reference ground is frequently used to describe such circumstances.
Ground, to To ground means to connect an electrically conductive part via a grounding system to the grounding electrode (one or more conductive parts having a very good contact to ground).
Hardware interrupt A hardware interrupt is triggered by interrupt-triggering modules in response to a particular event in the process (limit value violation; the module has completed the cyclic change of its channels). The hardware interrupt is reported to the CPU. In accordance with the priority of this interrupt, the organization block assigned to it is processed.
Glossary-6
Glossary
Input delay Parameter in STEP 7 for digital input modules. The input delay is used to suppress injected interference. Interfering pulses from 0 ms to the set input delay are suppressed. The set input delay is subject to a tolerance that can be obtained from the technical specifications of the module. A high input delay suppresses long interfering pulses, whereas a low input delay suppresses short ones. The permissible input delay depends on the length of the cable between the encoder and the module. For example, a high input delay has to be set for long unshielded supply conductors to the encoder (longer than 100m).
Integration time The integration time is the inverse value of the interference frequency suppression in ms.
Interference frequency suppression Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The frequency of the AC network can interfere with the measured value, especially with measurements in low voltage ranges and with thermocouples. This parameter is used by the user to specify the prevailing line frequency on his system.
Interrupt The SIMATIC S7 is familiar with 28 different run-time level, which govern running of the user program. These run-time levels include interrupts such as hardware interrupts, among other things. When an interrupt occurs, the operating system automatically calls an assigned organization block in which the user can program the reaction he wants (for example, in an FB).
Interrupt, diagnostic Diagnostic Interrupt
Interrupt, end-of-scan-cycle Hardwareinterrupt
Interrupt, hardware Hardware interrupt
Interrupt response time The interrupt response time is the time from when an interrupt signal first occurs to calling the first instruction in the interrupt OB. The following general rule applies: Higher priority interrupts take precedence. This means that the interrupt response time is increased by the program processing time of the higher priority interrupt OBs and interrupt OBs with the same priority that have not yet been processed (queue).
Glossary-7
Glossary
I/O bus This is part of the backplane bus in the programmable controller, optimized for the rapid exchange of signals between the CPU(s) and the signal modules. User data (for example, digital input signals of a signal module) and system data (for example, default parameter data records of a signal module) are transferred via the I/O bus.
Isolated With optically isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control and load circuit are galvanically isolated (by an optocoupler, contact assembly or repeater, for example). Input/output circuits can be connected to common potential.
Keep last value (KLV) The module retains the last value read out before STOP mode.
Linearity error Defines the maximum offset between the measured / output value and the ideal linear relationship between those signals and the digital value. The value is defined as a percentage and refers to the rated range of the analog module.
Load memory The load memory is part of a programmable module (CPU, CP). It contains objects generated by the programming device (load objects). It is implemented either as a plug-in memory card or a permanently integrated memory. In the case of SIMATIC, the load memory can also be defined as a directory on the hard disk.
Measuring principle, instantaneous value encoding A module with instantaneous value encoding is always used for very fast measuring operations or variables that change very rapidly. In this process, the module accesses the variable to be measured as fast as possible and delivers an instantaneous snapshot of the signal at a particular time. Due to this measuring procedure, the modules are more sensitive than modules with an integrating measuring procedure. Interference affecting the measured value can thus corrupt the result. You must ensure when using these modules that the measuring signal is clean by adhering strictly to the installation guidelines, for example.
Glossary-8
Glossary
Measuring principle, integrating A module with an integrating measuring procedure is always used for non-time-critical measuring operations. The integration time is inversely proportional to the line frequency. You can set the latter in STEP 7. This then gives you the integration time. If the line frequency is 50 Hz, the integration time is 20 ms or an even multiple of that. Because the measured value is included up to exactly this time period, at least one or more whole periods of the line frequency, which may overlay the measuring signal, are also included. The average value of the error is therefore included as zero (positive part of the first half period = negative part of the second half period). Only the user signal is thus recorded.
Measuring range module Measuring range modules are plugged into the analog input modules for adaptation to different measuring ranges.
Memory reset In a memory reset, the following memories of the CPU are deleted: working memory, write/read area of the load memory, system memory. The MPI parameters and diagnostic buffer are preserved.
Mode selector Using the mode selector, the user can set the current operating mode of the CPU (RUN, RUN-P, STOP) or reset the memory of the CPU (MRES).
Module filtering mode By operating mode we mean: 1. The selection of an operating mode of the CPU using the mode switch or the PG 2. The type of program execution in the CPU
Non-isolated In the case of non-isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control and load circuit are electrically connected.
Operating mode The SIMATIC S7 programmable controllers have the following operating modes: STOP, STARTUP, RUN and STOP.
Operating limit Defines the measured / output value of the analog module within its entire temperature range, referenced to the rated range of the analog module.
Glossary-9
Glossary
Operating system The operating system of the CPU organizes all functions and processes of the CPU that are not tied to a specific control task.
Parameters 1st tag of a logic block 2nd tag for setting the characteristics of a module (one or more per module). When delivered to the customer, each module has a practical basic setting for its parameters, which the user can modify in STEP 7.
PG Programming device
PLC Programmable controller
Point-to-point connection Only two nodes are physically linked with one another in a point-to-point connection. This type of communication link is used if the use of a communication network is not recommended or when, for example, different types of partners, such as a PLC and a process computer, are to be connected.
Priority class The operating system of an S7 CPU has a maximum of 28 priority classes (= program execution levels) for cyclic program scanning or program scanning controlled by hardware interrupt, for example. Each priority class is assigned organization blocks in which the user can program a response. By default, the OBs have different priorities determining the order in which they are executed or interrupted in the event that they are activated simultaneously. The user can change the default priorities.
Process image The signal states of the digital input and output modules are stored in the CPU in a process image. A distinction is made between the process input image and the process output image. The process input image (PII) is read by the input modules before the operating system scans the user program. The process output image (PIQ) is transferred to the output modules at the end of program scanning.
Product status Products having an identical order number are distinguished by their product status. The product status is incremented for upwards compatible extensions, modifications due to production reasons (use of new component parts and components) and troubleshooting.
Glossary-10
Glossary
PROFIBUS-DP Digital, analog and intelligent I/O modules and a wide range of field devices complying with EN 50170, Part 3, such as drives or valve terminals, are moved by the automation system to the process on site, over a distance of up to 23 km. The modules and field devices are connected to the programmable controller by means of the PROFIBUS-DP fieldbus and addressed in the same way as central I/O.
Programmable controller A programmable controller consists of a central device, a CPU and diverse input/output modules.
Programming device A programming device (PG) is an industry-standard, compact personal computer. A PG is completely equipped for programming SIMATIC programmable controllers.
Protection level The SIMATIC S7 access protection concept prevents the central processing unit from being accessed by unauthorized persons. It has three protection levels: Protection level 1: all program device functions allowed Protection level 2: read-only program device functions allowed Protection level 3: no program device functions allowed
RC element Series connection of ohmic resistance and capacitor. When a load is disconnected, overvoltage occurs in circuits with inductive load. This can result in an arc and reduce the lifetime of the contacts. To suppress this arc, you can bridge the contact with an RC element.
Reference ground Ground
Reference channel error Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. Using this parameter, you can enable the group error message of the reference junction when thermocouples are used. A reference channel error occurs when thermocouples are used and the following occurs: If an error occurs (for example, wire break) on a reference channel on which a thermal resistor (RTD) is connected to compensate for temperature drift (channel 0). If the reference temperature is outside the permissible range of values. Each input channel that is assigned the RTD on Channel 0 reference junction has a reference channel error in the situation described above. The measured temperature is no longer compensated.
Glossary-11
Glossary
Reference potential Potential from which the voltages of the circuits involved are viewed and measured.
Reference temperature Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The reference temperature is the temperature at the reference junction (in 1/100 oC climatic temperature range) when thermocouples are used. The reference temperature makes it possible to measure the temperature correctly using thermocouples. The temperature at the reference junction must be known because a thermocouple always measures the difference in temperature between the measuring point and the reference junction.
Repeater A device for the amplification of bus signals and connection of bus segments over long distances.
Repetitive accuracy The repetitive accuracy identifies the maximum deviation between measured/output values when recursive input or output values are applied. Refers to the rated range of the module and applies to the transient state at a specific temperature.
Resolution With analog modules, the number of bits which represent the digitized analog value in binary. The resolution depends on the module and with analog input modules on the integration time. The precision of the resolution of a measured value increases with the length of the integration time. The resolution can be as many as 16 bits, including sign.
Response time The response time is the time from an input signal being detected to the change to an output signal linked to it. The actual response time is somewhere between a shortest and a longest response time. When configuring a system, you must always assume the longest response time.
Glossary-12
Glossary
Restart When a CPU starts up (through the use of the mode selector, for example, or when the power is switched on), either OB 101 (restart), OB 100 (reboot: warm restart) or OB 102 (cold restart) is processed before cyclic program scanning (OB 1). It is essential for a restart that the CPU is up. The following applies: All the data areas (timers, counters, memory markers, data blocks) and their contents are preserved. The process input image is read, and processing of the STEP 7 user program is continued from the point at which it was last terminated (STOP, power off). Other types of startup are cold restart and reboot ( warm restart).
Retentivity Data areas in data blocks, and also timers, counters and memory markers are retentive when their contents are not lost upon a complete restart or POWER DOWN.
S7 basic communication Communication functions integrated in the CPU of the SIMATIC S7/M7/C7 that can be called by the user. The call is executed in the user program by means of system functions. The user data volume can be up to 76 bytes (small data volume). S7 basic communication is implemented via MPI.
S7 communication Communication functions integrated in the CPU of the SIMATIC S7/M7/C7 that can be called by the user. The call is executed in the user program by means of system function blocks. The user data volume can be up to 64 Kbytes (large data volume). S7 communication offers a network-independent interface between devices of the type SIMATIC S7/M7/C7 and the programming device/PC.
Segment Bus segment
Shunt resistor Parallel or shunt resistor in electrical circuits.
Signal module Signal modules (SM) form the interface between the process and the programmable controller. There are input modules, output modules, input/output modules (both digital and analog).
Smoothing Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The measured values are smoothed by digital filtering. For specific modules it is possible to choose between no, low, medium and high smoothing. The higher the smoothing, the greater is the time constant of the digital filter.
Glossary-13
Glossary
Standard communication Communication via standard and standardized protocols, such as PROFIBUS DP or PROFIBUS FMS.
STARTUP The STARTUP mode is traversed during the transition from STOP mode to RUN mode. STARTUP can be triggered by the mode selector or following power-on or by means of an operator input on the programming device. Rebooting and restarting are the two different types of startup. Depending on the position of the mode selector, either a reboot or restart is executed in the case of the S7-400. A reboot is executed in the case of the M7-300/400.
STEP 7 Parameter assignment and programming software for the parameterization and creation of user programs for SIMATIC S7 controllers.
Substitute value Substitute values are values that can be output to the process when signal output modules have failed or be used in the user program instead of a process value when signal input modules have failed. The substitute values can be assigned parameters by the user in STEP 7 (old value retained, substitute value 0 or 1). They are values which the output(s) have to output in the event of a CPU STOP.
SYNC Control command of the master to the slave: freeze the outputs at their current value.
System diagnostics System diagnostics is the detection, analysis and reporting of errors that occur within the programmable controller. Examples of such errors are: program errors or failures on modules. System errors can be indicated with LED displays or in STEP 7.
System function A system function (SFC) is a function integrated in the operating system of the CPU that can be called in the STEP 7 user program like a function ( FC), as required.
Glossary-14
Glossary
System function block A system function block (SFB) is a function block integrated in the operating system of the CPU that can be called in the STEP 7 user program like a function block (FB), as required. The associated instance data block is in working memory.
Temperature coefficient Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules when measuring temperatures with a resistance thermometer (RTD). The temperature coefficient you select depends on the resistance thermometer being used (to DIN standard).
Temperature error Defines the drift of the measured / output value of the analog module due to changes in temperature. The value is defined in a percentage per Kelvin and refers to the rated range of the analog module.
Temperature error of the internal compensation This error occurs only when measurements are carried out with thermocouples. In addition to the actual temperature error, it also identifies the additive error when internal comparison is selected. The error is defined either as a percentage of the physical range of the analog module, or as the absolute value in C.
Transmission rate Rate of data transmission (bit/s)
Two-conductor/three-conductor/four-conductor connection Method of connection to the module for example, of resistance thermometers/resistors to the front connector of the analog input module or of loads at the voltage output of an analog output module.
Two-wire transmitter/four-wire transmitter Kind of transmitter (two-wire transmitter: supply (via terminals of the analog input module; four-wire transmitter: supply via separate terminals of the transmitter)
Unforce Force
Ungrounded Without galvanic connection to ground
Glossary-15
Glossary
Warm restart This is a reboot after a power failure using a set of dynamic data programmed by the user and a user program section defined in the system. A warm restart is indicated by setting a status bit or by some other appropriate means that can be read by the user program and indicate that the standstill of the programmable controller, brought about by a power failure, has been detected in RUN mode.
Wire break Parameter in STEP 7. A wire break test is used for monitoring the connection from the input to the encoder and from the output to the actuator. With wire break, the module detects a flow of current at the appropriately parameterized input/output.
Working memory The working memory is a random access memory in the CPU which the processor accesses during program execution of the user program.
Glossary-16
Index
A
Accessories, C-1 Actuator connection, to analog output module, 5-58 ADC-DAC error, analog input module, 5-64 Address, Glossary-1 Address area, setting, 7-9 Aggregate current, Glossary-1 Ambient conditions, 1-13, 7-2 climatic, 1-15 mechanical, 1-13 Analog functions, STEP 7 blocks, 5-1 Analog input module ADC-DAC error, 5-64 channel error, 5-64 channel information available, 5-64 configuring error, 5-65 connecting resistance thermometers, 5-49 connecting resistors, 5-49 connecting sensor, 5-42 connecting thermocouple, 5-52 diagnostic data, B-14 diagnostic interrupt, 5-39 diagnostic message in measured value, 5-62 diagnostics, 5-39 EPROM error, 5-64 external malfunction, 5-64 ground short circuit, 5-65 hardware interrupt lost, 5-65 incorrect parameters, 5-64 interference frequency suppression, 5-40 internal malfunction, 5-64 isolated, 5-42 limit value, 5-39 measurement, 5-40 measuring range, 5-40 measuring range module incorrect/missing, 5-64 measuring type, 5-40 module malfunction, 5-64 no external auxiliary voltage, 5-64 no front connector, 5-64 non-isolated, 5-42 overflow, 5-65 parameter assignment error, 5-65 parameter assignment missing, 5-64 parameters, 5-39, A-9 potential difference, 5-42 RAM error, 5-64 reference channel error, 5-65 reference junction, 5-40 reference temperature, 5-40 run time calibration error, 5-65 SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit, 5-97 SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit, 5-105 SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit, 5-68 SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit, 5-74, 5-88 SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit, 5-129 SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit, 5-120 smoothing of analog input values, 5-35, 5-40 STOP operating mode, 5-64 structure of data record 1, A-10 temperature coefficient, 5-40 temperature unit, 5-40 underflow, 5-65 wire break, 5-65 wire break check, 5-39 Analog input modules causes of errors and remedies, 5-64 diagnostic messages, 5-63 Analog module assigning parameters, 5-38 behavior, 5-30 determination of measuring error/output error, 5-33 diagnostics, 5-62 EXTF LED, 5-62 interrupts, 5-66 INTF LED, 5-62 load voltage failure, 5-31 sequence of steps for commissioning, 5-5 Analog output channel conversion time, 5-36 response time, 5-37 Analog output module connecting loads and actuators, 5-58 connecting loads to current output, 5-61 connecting loads to voltage output, 5-59 isolated, 5-58 output, 5-41 output range, 5-41 output type, 5-41 parameters, 5-41
Index-1
Index
response time, 5-37 settling time, 5-37 SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit, 5-141 Analog value conversion, 5-6 sign, 5-6 Analog value representation, 5-6 binary representation of input ranges, 5-9 binary representation of output ranges, 5-22 for current measuring ranges, 5-125-15 for current output ranges, 5-265-29 for resistance thermometers, 5-14, 5-15, 5-16 for resistance-type sensors, 5-13 for thermocouple, 5-17, 5-18, 5-19, 5-20, 5-21 for voltage measurement ranges, 5-11 for voltage measuring ranges, 5-105-12 for voltage output ranges, 5-255-28 Analog-to-digital conversion, 5-34 Approvals, 1-2 Area of application, 7-2 Auxiliary voltage missing analog input module, 5-64 digital module, 4-11
B
Backplane bus, Glossary-1 Backup battery, Glossary-1 shipping and storage conditions, 1-11 technical specifications, 3-6 Backup time, 3-7 calculating, 3-7 Backup voltage, external, Glossary-1 Basic error limit, 5-32, Glossary-1 Basic execution time analog input channels, 5-35 analog output channels, 5-37 Battery. See backup battery Bus segment, Glossary-1 Bytes 0 and 1, of diagnostic data, B-3
Channel error analog input module, 5-64 digital module, 4-11 Channel information available analog input module, 5-64 digital module, 4-11 Cold restart, Glossary-2 Commissioning analog modules, sequence of steps, 5-5 Commissioning digital modules, sequence of steps, 4-5 Common mode voltage, Glossary-2 Communication bus, 2-4 Communication load, Glossary-2 Communication processor, Glossary-2 Comparison point, 5-56, Glossary-2 Compensating box, 5-54, Glossary-2 connecting, 5-55 Compensation external, 5-54 internal, 5-53, 5-55 Configuring error, analog input module, 5-65 Connecting cable, 6-5 plugging in, 7-7 preparing, 7-6 Connecting cable 721, 7-11 Connection distributed, 7-2 rules, 6-4 Conversion time analog input channels, 5-34 analog output channel, 5-36 Converting, analog values, 5-6 CP, Glossary-2 CPU, Glossary-3 CSA, 1-4 Current sensors, connecting, 5-46
D
Data static, Glossary-3 temporary, Glossary-3 Data block, Glossary-3 Data record, for diagnostic data, B-2 Data record 1 analog input module configuration, A-10 digital output module configuration, A-7 structure for digital input module, A-4 Data records, for parameters, A-2 Declaration, Glossary-3 Default setting, Glossary-3 Degree of protection, 1-16 IP 20, 1-16
C
Cable length, 7-3 selecting, 7-7 Cable length selector switch, 7-5 Cables, for analog signals, 5-42, 5-58 Causes of errors and remedies analog input module, 5-64 digital module, 4-11 CE mark, 1-2 Central controller, Glossary-2
Index-2
Index
substitute 1, 4-7 Destination CPU for interrupt, digital output substitute a value, 4-7 module, 4-8 wire break check, 4-7 Destruction limit, Glossary-3 Digital input modules, parameters, A-3 Diagnostic buffer, Glossary-3 Digital module Diagnostic data, Glossary-4 assigning parameters, 4-6 bytes 0 and 1, B-3 causes of errors and remedies, 4-11 data record, B-2 channel error, 4-11 of the analog input modules, B-14 channel information available, 4-11 of the digital input modules, B-4 diagnostic messages, 4-10 of the digital output modules, B-8 diagnostics, 4-9 of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC, B-4 EPROM error, 4-11 of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC, B-6 external malfunction, 4-11 of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A, EXTF LED, 4-9 B-12 fuse blown, 4-12 of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A, hardware interrupt, 4-14 B-8 hardware interrupt lost, 4-11, 4-14 of the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, B-10 internal malfunction, 4-11 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit, B-14 internal voltage failure, 4-11 of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit, B-18 interrupt-triggering channels, 4-14 of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit, B-16 interrupts, 4-13 Diagnostic interrrupt enable INTF LED, 4-9 digital input module, 4-7 M short circuit, 4-11 digital output module, 4-8 module malfunction, 4-11 Diagnostic interrupt no auxiliary voltage, 4-11 of analog modules, 5-66 no front connector, 4-11 of digital modules, 4-13 no load voltage L+, 4-12 Diagnostic messages, 4-9, 5-62 no sensor supply, 4-12 of analog input modules, 5-63 parameter assignment error, 4-11 of the digital modules, 4-10 parameter assignment missing, 4-11 reading out, 4-9, 5-62 sequence of steps for commissioning, 4-5 Diagnostics short circuit to L+, 4-11 analog input module, 5-39 STOP mode, 4-11 digital input module, 4-7 wire break, 4-11 digital output module, 4-8 wrong parameters, 4-11 of analog modules, 5-62 Digital output module of digital modules, 4-9 destination CPU for Interrupt, 4-8 system, Glossary-14 diagnostic data, B-8 Diagnostics entry, 5-31 diagnostic interrupt enable, 4-8 Digital input module diagnostics, 4-8 diagnostic data, B-4 fuse blown, 4-8 diagnostic interrupt enable, 4-7 keep last value, 4-8 diagnostics, 4-7 no load voltage L+, 4-8 hardware interrupt enable, 4-7 parameters, 4-8, A-6 input delay, 4-7 short circuit to L+, 4-8 keep last value, 4-7 short circuit to M, 4-8 no load voltage L+, 4-7 SM 422; DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/2 A, 4-64 parameters, 4-7 SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A, 4-68 sensor supply missing, 4-7 SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A, 4-47 SM 421; DI 16 x 120 VAC, 4-28 SM 422; DO 16 x 24 VDC/2 A, 4-44 SM 421; DI 16 x 120/230 VUC, 4-36, 4-38 SM 422; DO 16 x 30/230 VUC/Rel.5 A, 4-72 SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 4-20 SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 4-52, 4-55 SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC, 4-31 SM 422; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/5 A, 4-61 SM 421; DI 32 x 120 VUC, 4-41 structure of data record 1, A-7 SM 421; DI 32 x 24 VDC, 4-17 substitute 1, 4-8 structure of data record 1, A-4
Index-3
Index
substitute a value, 4-8 wire break check, 4-8 Direct communication, Glossary-4 DP master, Glossary-4 DP slave, Glossary-4
G
Global data, Glossary-6 Ground, Glossary-6 Ground short circuit, analog input module, 5-65 Grounded operation, RS 485 repeater, 10-4
E
Electromagnetic compatibility, 1-8 EMC directive, 1-2 EMV, 7-2 EPROM error analog input module, 5-64 digital module, 4-11 Equidistance, Glossary-4 Equipotential bonding, Glossary-4 Error, of an analog module, 5-33 External malfunction analog input module, 5-64 digital module, 4-11 EXTF LED analog module, 5-62 digital module, 4-9
H
Hardware interrupt, Glossary-6 end of scan cycle, 5-67 of digital modules, 4-14 when limit exceeded, 5-67 Hardware interrupt enable, digital input module, 4-7 Hardware interrupt lost analog input module, 5-65 digital module, 4-11, 4-14
I
I/O bus, 2-4, Glossary-8 IEC 61131-2, 1-2 IM 314, 7-2 IM 467, 8-2 communication services, 8-3 configuration, 8-6 connection to PROFIBUS DP, 8-7 technical specifications, 8-11 IM 467 FO, 8-2 communication services, 8-3 configuration, 8-6 connection to PROFIBUS DP, 8-7 fiber-optic cable, connecting, 8-9 technical specifications, 8-12 Input characteristic curve to IEC 61131, for digital inputs, 4-15 Input delay, Glossary-7 digital input module, 4-7 Insulation test, 1-16 Integration time, Glossary-7 Interface, selecting, 7-7 Interface module IM 460-1 and IM 461-1, 6-10 IM 460-3, 6-14 IM 460-3 and IM 461-3, 6-14 IM 460-4, 6-18 IM 460-4 and IM 461-4, 6-18 IM 461-3, 6-14 Interface modules IM 460-0, 6-7 IM 460-1, 6-10 IM 461-0, 6-7 IM 461-1, 6-10 IM 461-4, 6-18
F
FB, Glossary-5 FC, Glossary-5 Fiber-optic cable, Glossary-5 FM, approval, 1-7 Force, Glossary-5 Four-conductor connection, 5-50, Glossary-15 Four-wire transmitter, Glossary-15 Four-wire transmitters, 5-48 FREEZE, Glossary-5 Front connector missing analog input module, 5-64 digital module, 4-11 Function (FC), Glossary-5 Function block (FB), Glossary-5 Functional grounding, Glossary-5 Fuse blown, Glossary-6 digital module, 4-12 digital output module, 4-8
Index-4
Index
Interface selector switch, 7-5 Interference pulse-shaped, 1-9 sinusoidal, 1-9 Interference frequency suppression, Glossary-7 analog input module, 5-40 Internal fault (INTF), 3-13 Internal malfunction analog input module, 5-64 digital module, 4-11 Internal voltage failure, digital module, 4-11 Interrupt, Glossary-7 Interrupt response time, Glossary-7 Interrupt-triggering channels, of the digital module, 4-14 Interrupts enabling, 4-13, 5-66 of analog modules, 5-66 of the digital modules, 4-13 INTF LED analog module, 5-62 digital module, 4-9 IP 20, 1-16 Isolated, Glossary-8 Isolated measuring sensor, 5-43 Isolated measuring sensors, connecting, 5-43
M
M short circuit, digital module, 4-11 Marine approvals, 1-7 Maximum expansion, 7-3 Measurement, analog input module, 5-40 Measuring method, analog input channels, 5-27 Measuring principle instantaneous value encoding, Glossary-8 integrating, Glossary-9 Measuring range analog input channels, 5-27 analog input module, 5-40 Measuring range module, 5-27 replugging, 5-28 Measuring range module incorrect/missing, analog input module, 5-64 Measuring sensor, isolated, 5-43 Measuring type, analog input module, 5-40 Memory reset, Glossary-9 Mode selector, Glossary-9 Module classes, ID, B-3 Module filtering mode, Glossary-9 Module malfunction analog input module, 5-64 digital module, 4-11 Module overview, 5-3 digital modules, 4-3 Modules, shipping and storage conditions, 1-11
K
Keep last value digital input module, 4-7 digital output module, 4-8 KLV, Glossary-8
N
No load voltage L+, digital output module, 4-8 Non-isolated, Glossary-9 Non-isolated sensors, 5-43 connecting, 5-44
L
LEDs, 7-5 Limit value, analog input module, 5-39 Linearity error, Glossary-8 Load connection, to analog output module, 5-58 Load connection to current output, on analog output module, 5-61 Load connection to voltage output, to analog output module, 5-59 Load memory, Glossary-8 Load voltage failure, of the analog module, 5-31 Load voltage L+ missing, digital module, 4-12 Low voltage directive, 1-3
O
OB 40, 4-14, 5-67 start information, 5-67 OB 82, 4-13, 5-66 Operating conditions, 1-13 Operating limit, Glossary-9 Operating mode, Glossary-9 of CPU, 5-30 Operating system, Glossary-10 Operational limit, 5-32
Index-5
Index
Order number 6ES7401-2TA01-0AA0, 2-7 6ES7405-0DA01-0AA0, 3-24 6ES7405-0KA01-0AA0, 3-26 6ES7405-0KR00-0AA0, 3-26 6ES7405-0RA01-0AA0, 3-28 6ES7407-0DA01-0AA0, 3-18 6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0, 3-20 6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0, 3-20 6ES7407-0RA01-0AA0, 3-22 6ES7421-1BL01-0AA0, 4-17 6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0, 4-41 6ES7421-1FH00-0AA0, 4-36 6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0, 4-38 6ES7421-5EH00-0AA0, 4-28 6ES7421-7BH00-0AB0, 4-20 6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0, 4-31 6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0, 4-44 6ES7422-1BL00-0AA0, 4-52 6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0, 4-61 6ES7422-1FH00-0AA0, 4-64 6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0, 4-72 6ES7422-5EH00-0AB0, 4-68 6ES7422-5EH10-0AB0, 4-47 6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0, 4-55 6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0, 5-97 6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0, 5-68 6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0, 5-74 6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0, 5-88 6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0, 5-129 6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0, 5-120 6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0, 5-105 6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0, 5-141 6ES7460-0AA01-0AB0, 6-7 6ES7460-1BA01-0AB0, 6-10 6ES7460-3AA01-0AB0, 6-14 6ES7460-4AA01-0AB0, 6-18 6ES7461-0AA01-0AA0, 6-7 6ES7461-1BA01-0AA0, 6-10 6ES7461-3AA01-0AA0, 6-14 6ES7461-4AA01-0AA0, 6-18 6ES7467-5FJ00-0AB0, 8-2 6ES7467-5GJ00-0AB0, 8-2 6ES7467-5GJ01-0AB0, 8-2 6ES7467-5GJ02-0AB0, 8-2 6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0, 10-2 Output, analog output module, 5-41 Output analog values, STEP 7 blocks, 5-1 Output range, analog output module, 5-41 Output type, analog output module, 5-41 Overflow, analog input module, 5-65
P
Parameter assignment for analog modules, 5-38 for digital modules, 4-6 in user program, A-2 Parameter assignment error analog input module, 5-65 digital module, 4-11 Parameter assignment missing analog input module, 5-64 digital module, 4-11 Parameters, Glossary-10 analog input module, 5-39, A-9 analog output module, 5-41 data records, A-2 digital input module, 4-7 digital input modules, A-3 digital output module, 4-8, A-6 dynamic, 4-6, 5-38 modifying in user program, 4-6, 5-38 static, 4-6, 5-38 Parameters incorrect, analog input module, 5-64 PARM_MOD, SFC 57, A-2 Permissible potential differences, 7-3 Pin assignment, RS 485 repeater, 10-6 Point-to-point connection, Glossary-10 Potential difference, with analog input modules, 5-42 Power supply module PS 405 10A, 3-26 PS 405 10A R, 3-26 PS 405 20A, 3-28 PS 405 4A, 3-24 PS 407 10A, 3-20 PS 407 10A R, 3-20 PS 407 20A, 3-22 PS 407 4A, 3-18 Priority class, Glossary-10 Process image, Glossary-10 Product status, Glossary-10 PROFIBUS DP, Glossary-11 PROFIBUS DP master interface, 8-2 Programmable controller, Glossary-11 Programming device (PG), Glossary-11 Protection class, 1-16 Protection level, Glossary-11 Pulse edge, 4-7 Pulse-shaped interference, 1-9
Index-6
Index
R
Rack CR2, 2-6 CR3, 2-7 ER1, 2-8 ER2, 2-8 UR1, 2-3, 2-4 UR2, 2-3, 2-4 Radio interference, emission of, 1-10 RAM error, analog input module, 5-64 RC element, Glossary-11 Read analog values, STEP 7 blocks, 5-1 Redundant operation, 3-4 Redundant power supply modules, 3-4 Reference channel error, Glossary-11 analog input module, 5-65 Reference junction, analog input module, 5-40 Reference junction temperature with thermocouples, compensating, 5-53 Reference potential, Glossary-12 Reference temperature, Glossary-12 analog input module, 5-40 Repeater, Glossary-12 See RS 485 repeater Resistance thermometer connection, to analog input module, 5-49 Resistor connection, to analog input module, 5-49 Resolution, 5-6, Glossary-12 Response time, 5-37, Glossary-12 Restart, Glossary-13 Retentivity, Glossary-13 RS 485 repeater, 10-1 appearance, 10-3 application, 10-2 definition, 10-2 grounded, 10-4 grounded operation, 10-4 rules, 10-2 ungrounded, 10-4 ungrounded operation, 10-4 Run time calibration error, analog input module, 5-65
S
S5 modules, configuring, 7-10 S7 basic communication, Glossary-13 S7 communication, Glossary-13 Scan time analog input channels, 5-34 analog output channels, 5-36 Sensor connection, to analog input module, 5-42
Sensor supply missing digital input module, 4-7 digital module, 4-12 Sensors, non-isolated, 5-43 Settling time, 5-37 SFB, Glossary-15 SFC, Glossary-14 SFC 51, 4-13, 5-66 SFC 55 WR_PARM, A-2 SFC 56 WR_DPARM, A-2 SFC 57 PARM_MOD, A-2 SFC 59, 4-13, 5-66 Short circuit to L+ digital module, 4-11 digital output module, 4-8 Short circuit to M, digital output module, 4-8 Shunt resistor, Glossary-13 Sign, analog value, 5-6 Signal module, Glossary-13 Sinusoidal interference, 1-9 SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC, diagnostic data, B-4 SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC, diagnostic data, B-6 SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A, diagnostic data, B-12 SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A, diagnostic data, B-8 SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, diagnostic data, B-10 SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit, diagnostic data, B-14 SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit, diagnostic data, B-18 SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit, diagnostic data, B-16 Smoothing, Glossary-13 Smoothing of analog input values, 5-35 analog input module, 5-40 Spare parts, C-1 Standard communication, Glossary-14 Standards, 1-2 Startup, Glossary-14 STEP 7, Glossary-14 STEP 7 blocks, for analog functions, 5-1 STOP mode, digital module, 4-11 STOP operating mode, analog input module, 5-64 Substitute 1 digital input module, 4-7 digital output module, 4-8 Substitute a value digital input module, 4-7 digital output module, 4-8 Substitute value, Glossary-14
Index-7
Index
SYNC, Glossary-14 System diagnostics, Glossary-14 System function (SFC), Glossary-14 System function block (SFB), Glossary-15 System perturbation, 1-10
U
UL, 1-4 Underflow, analog input module, 5-65 Ungrounded operation, RS 485 repeater, 10-4 User program, parameter assignment in, A-2 Using S7-400 in a zone 2 explosion-risk area, 1-17
T
Technical specifications IM 460-0 and 461-0, 6-9 IM 460-1 and 461-1, 6-13 IM 460-3 and 461-3, 6-17 IM 460-4 and 461-4, 6-21 PS 405 10A, 3-27 PS 405 10A R, 3-27 PS 405 20 A, 3-29 PS 405 4 A, 3-25 PS 407 10A, 3-21 PS 407 10A R, 3-21 PS 407 20 A, 3-23 PS 407 4 A, 3-19 RS 485 repeater, 10-6 Temperature coefficient, Glossary-15 analog input module, 5-40 Temperature error, Glossary-15 Temperature error of the internal compensation, Glossary-15 Temperature unit, analog input module, 5-40 Terminating connector, 7-3, 7-13 Test voltages, 1-16 Thermo emf, 5-52 Thermocouple design, 5-52 principle of operation, 5-52 Thermocouple connection, to analog input module, 5-52 Three-conductor connection, 5-51, Glossary-15 Transmission rate, Glossary-15 Two-conductor connection, 5-51, Glossary-15 Two-wire transmitter, Glossary-15 Two-wire transmitters, 5-47
V
Vibrations, 1-13 Voltage sensors, connecting, 5-45
W
Warm restart, Glossary-16 Wire break, Glossary-16 analog input module, 5-65 digital module, 4-11 Wire break check digital input module, 4-7 digital output module, 4-8 Working memory, Glossary-16 WR_DPARM, SFC 56, A-2 WR_PARM, SFC 55, A-2 Wrong parameters, digital module, 4-11
Index-8

S7-400 ModuleData e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

S7-400 ModuleData e

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

S7-400 ModuleData e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIMATIC Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications

Required Basic Knowledge

Where is this Manual valid?

Place of this Documentation in the Information Environment

Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01

Finding Your Way

Recycling and Disposal

Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01

A&D Technical Support

Nuernberg Johnson City Beijing

Technical Support Worldwide (Nuernberg) Technical Support

Europe / Africa (Nuernberg) Authorization

United States (Johnson City) Technical Support and Authorization

Asia / Australia (Beijing) Technical Support and Authorization

mailto:adsupport@siemens.com GMT: +1:00

mailto:simatic.hotline@sea.siemens.com GMT: 5:00

mailto:adsupport.asia@siemens.com GMT: +8:00

Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01

Service & Support on the Internet

Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01

3-20 3-22 3-24

3.8 3.9 3.10

Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01

Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01

4.20 4.20.1 4.21 5

Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01

6-7 6-10 6-14

6.3 6.4 6.5

Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01

Spare Parts and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01

D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 E-1

Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01

Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01

Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01

Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01

Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01

Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01

Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01

Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01

Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01

General Technical Specifications

What are General Technical Specifications?

Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01

General Technical Specifications

Standards and Approvals

Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01

General Technical Specifications

Explosion Protection Guidelines

Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01

General Technical Specifications

Mark for Australia and New Zealand

or cULus Approval, Hazardous Location

Please read the notes below.

Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01

General Technical Specifications

or cULus Approvals, Hazardous Location for Relay Modules

Please read the notes below.

Automation System S7-400 Module Specifications A5E00267842-01

General Technical Specifications